logiq 9 proprietary manual - 2294854-100, rev 9medsensor.ru/files/ge/us/logiq_9_sm.pdf · ge...
Post on 02-Aug-2018
308 Views
Preview:
TRANSCRIPT
GE Healthcare
1/18/10GEHC_FRNT_CVR.FM
P R E L I M I N A R Y
LOGIQ™ 9
Basic Service Manual
Part Number: 2294853-100Revision: 14
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
i
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
Important Precautions
• THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.• IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER
THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES.
• DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD.
• FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.
• CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.• SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE
LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE.
• NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS.
• LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.
• DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE.
• FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN.
• WARTEN SIE DIESES GERÄT NUR, WENN SIE DIE ENTSPRECHENDEN ANWWEISUNGEN IM KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH GELESEN HABEN UND NACHVOLLZIEHEN KÖNNEN.
• WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
WARNING(EN)
AVERTISSEMENT(FR)
WARNUNG(DE)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
ii -
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
• ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.• SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEHC SOLICITA UN IDIOMA
QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, LA TRADUCCIÓN ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE.
• NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO.
• LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.
• ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS.
• SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEHC, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO.
• NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA.
• O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.
• IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE.
• SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEHC RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE.
• SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO.
• NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
• KÄESOLEV TEENINDUSJUHEND ON SAADAVAL AINULT INGLISE KEELES.• KUI KLIENDITEENINDUSE OSUTAJA NÕUAB JUHENDIT INGLISE KEELEST
ERINEVAS KEELES, VASTUTAB KLIENT TÕLKETEENUSE OSUTAMISE EEST. • ÄRGE ÜRITAGE SEADMEID TEENINDADA ENNE EELNEVALT KÄESOLEVA
TEENINDUSJUHENDIGA TUTVUMIST JA SELLEST ARU SAAMIST.• KÄESOLEVA HOIATUSE EIRAMINE VÕIB PÕHJUSTADA TEENUSEOSUTAJA,
OPERAATORI VÕI PATSIENDI VIGASTAMIST ELEKTRILÖÖGI, MEHAANILISE VÕI MUU OHU TAGAJÄRJEL.
AVISO(ES)
ATENÇÃO(PT)
AVVERTENZA (IT)
HOIATUS (ET)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
iii
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
• ÞESSI ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK ER EINGÖNGU FÁANLEG Á ENSKU.• EF ÞJÓNUSTUAÐILI VIÐSKIPTAMANNS ÞARFNAST ANNARS TUNGUMÁLS EN
ENSKU, ER ÞAÐ Á ÁBYRGÐ VIÐSKIPTAMANNS AÐ ÚTVEGA ÞÝÐINGU.• REYNIÐ EKKI AÐ ÞJÓNUSTA TÆKIÐ NEMA EFTIR AÐ HAFA SKOÐAÐ OG
SKILIÐ ÞESSA ÞJÓNUSTUHANDBÓK.• EF EKKI ER FARIÐ AÐ ÞESSARI VIÐVÖRUN GETUR ÞAÐ VALDIÐ MEIÐSLUM
ÞJÓNUSTUVEITANDA, STJÓRNANDA EÐA SJÚKLINGS VEGNA RAFLOSTS, VÉLRÆNNAR EÐA ANNARRAR HÆTTU.
VAROITUS (FI)
VIÐVÖRUN(IS)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
iv -
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
• DENNE SERVICEMANUAL FINDES KUN PÅ ENGELSK.• HVIS EN KUNDES TEKNIKER HAR BRUG FOR ET ANDET SPROG END
ENGELSK, ER DET KUNDENS ANSVAR AT SØRGE FOR OVERSÆTTELSE.• FORSØG IKKE AT SERVICERE UDSTYRET MEDMINDRE
DENNE SERVICEMANUAL ER BLEVET LÆST OG FORSTÅET.• MANGLENDE OVERHOLDELSE AF DENNE ADVARSEL KAN MEDFØRE SKADE
PÅ GRUND AF ELEKTRISK, MEKANISK ELLER ANDEN FARE FOR TEKNIKEREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PATIENTEN.
• DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING IS ENKEL IN HET ENGELS VERKRIJGBAAR.
• ALS HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL EEN ANDERE TAAL VEREIST, DAN IS DE KLANT VERANTWOORDELIJK VOOR DE VERTALING ERVAN.
• PROBEER DE APPARATUUR NIET TE ONDERHOUDEN VOORDAT DEZE ONDERHOUDSHANDLEIDING WERD GERAADPLEEGD EN BEGREPEN IS.
• INDIEN DEZE WAARSCHUWING NIET WORDT OPGEVOLGD, ZOU HET ONDERHOUDSPERSONEEL, DE OPERATOR OF EEN PATIËNT GEWOND KUNNEN RAKEN ALS GEVOLG VAN EEN ELEKTRISCHE SCHOK, MECHANISCHE OF ANDERE GEVAREN.
ADVARSEL(DA)
WAARSCHUWING(NL)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
v
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
• DENNE SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN FINNES BARE PÅ ENGELSK.• HVIS KUNDENS SERVICELEVERANDØR TRENGER ET ANNET SPRÅK, ER DET
KUNDENS ANSVAR Å SØRGE FOR OVERSETTELSE.• IKKE FORSØK Å REPARERE UTSTYRET UTEN AT DENNE
SERVICEHÅNDBOKEN ER LEST OG FORSTÅTT.• MANGLENDE HENSYN TIL DENNE ADVARSELEN KAN FØRE TIL AT
SERVICELEVERANDØREN, OPERATØREN ELLER PASIENTEN SKADES PÅ GRUNN AV ELEKTRISK STØT, MEKANISKE ELLER ANDRE FARER.
ADVARSEL(NO)
OSTRZEŻENIE(PL)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
vi -
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
• DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN FINNS BARA TILLGÄNGLIG PÅ ENGELSKA.• OM EN KUNDS SERVICETEKNIKER HAR BEHOV AV ETT ANNAT SPRÅK ÄN
ENGELSKA ANSVARAR KUNDEN FÖR ATT TILLHANDAHÅLLA ÖVERSÄTTNINGSTJÄNSTER.
• FÖRSÖK INTE UTFÖRA SERVICE PÅ UTRUSTNINGEN OM DU INTE HAR LÄST OCH FÖRSTÅR DEN HÄR SERVICEHANDBOKEN.
• OM DU INTE TAR HÄNSYN TILL DEN HÄR VARNINGEN KAN DET RESULTERA I SKADOR PÅ SERVICETEKNIKERN, OPERATÖREN ELLER PATIENTEN TILL FÖLJD AV ELEKTRISKA STÖTAR, MEKANISKA FAROR ELLER ANDRA FAROR.
VARNING(SV)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
vii
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
(JA)
(ZH-CN)
(KO)
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
viii -
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATIONAll packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write “Damage In Shipment” on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period.
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT - FOR USA ONLYAll electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Healthcare personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes.
The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORSIf there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Healthcare Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. Mail the information to: Service Documentation, 9900 Innovation Drive (RP-2123), Wauwatosa, WI 53226, USA.
GE Healthcare employees should use TRACKWISE to report all documentation errors or omissions.
SERVICE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
For a complete review of all safety requirements, see the Chapter 1, Safety Considerations section of the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic Service Manual (2294853-100).
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNINGWARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
ix
1/18/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
LEGAL NOTES
The contents of this publication may not be copied or duplicated in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written permission of GE Healthcare.
GE Healthcare may revise this publication from time to time without written notice.
TRADEMARKSAll products and their name brands are trademarks of their respective holders.
COPYRIGHTSAll Material Copyright© 2002-2010 by General Electric Company Inc. All Rights Reserved
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
x -
10/12/10PRECAUTIONS_AND_REV_AP R E L I M I N A R Y
Revision History
List of Effected Pages(LOEP)
RevisionDate
(YYYY/MM/DD) Reason for change0 2002/04/08 Initial Release
1 2002/11/08 Update for BT’02 Release, BEP and FEP changes
2 2003/04/04 Update for R2.1.1 Release and hardware changes
3 2003/10/23 Update for R3.0 Release and hardware changes
4 2004/09/15 Update for R4.0 Release, BEP3, 4D option, CW option
5 2004/11/13 Update for R4.1.0
6 2005/10/25 M3 Update for R6.x release, Added Legal Page, Cover Revision, Flat Monitor, TD Board changes
7 2005/11/21 Update for R6.0.5O.
8 2006/07/25 Update for R7.x release. Added DVR, hardware changes. Release for MS
9 2006/08/01 Update for R7.x release. Release for M3
10 2006/09/06 Update for R7.x release.
11 2007/12/04 Update for R7.x, branding cover updates, additional precaution languages, 19” LCD, BEP4.x, FRU numbers, R7.x baseload instructions.
12 2009/05/27 Update for R9.x
13 2010/01/15 Update for IE6 60601-1-6
14 2010/10/12 Updated for removal of CE Mark
Pages Revision Pages Revision Pages Revision
Title Page N/AChapter 2 - Site Preparation
pages 2-1 to 2-1014
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
pages 7-1 to 7-3414
Important Precautionspages i to iv
14Chapter 3 - System Setup
pages 3-1 to 3-2614
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures
pages 8-1 to 8-9814
Rev History/LOEPpages v to x
14Chapter 4 - Functional Checks
pages 4-1 to 4-2814
Chapter 9 - Renewal Partspages 9-1 to 9-72
14
Table of Contentspages ix to xxxiii
14Chapter 5 - Components and
Functions (Theory)pages 5-1 to 5-98
14Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance
pages 10-1 to 10-3014
Chapter 1 - Introductionpages 1-1 to 1-24
14Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments
pages 6-1 to 6-1814
Indexpages I to IV
14
Back Cover N/A
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xi Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 1Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Service Manual Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2Contents in this Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4
Overview of the Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 4History - Hardware/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7History - Peripherals/Software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7FRUs for Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7History - Supported Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7How to Turn the Scanner On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed Options 1 - 7Product Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8
Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Model Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9Safety Precaution Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9
Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 11
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 16Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17
Safe Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 17Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Table of Contents
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xii Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 18
Battery Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 20
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 21
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22What is EMC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 22
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 23System Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 24
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xiii
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 2Site Preparation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
General Console Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Inrush Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2Site Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3Site Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3Unit Power Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3Power Stability Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4Scan Probe Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6Required Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8Networking Setup Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9Scanner Connected to Hospital’s Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9Purpose of the DICOM Network Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9InSite Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xiv Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 3System Setup
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1The Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Set Up Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2Average Set Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2Set Up Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Brake Pedal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2Operator I/O Panel Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4
Preparing for Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6Verify Customer Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6
System Voltage Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6Rating Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 6ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7Video Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7
Completing the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8
Scanner Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8Back-end Processor Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9Back-end Processor Power Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 9Scanner Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
Transducer Connection and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 10
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11Console Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11Acoustic Noise Output: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11
Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 11On-Board Optional Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 12External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 13
External I/O Pin Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 15Other I/O Ports (Front of system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 17Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 20
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xv
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Available Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Software/Option Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 21
Connectivity Setup Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 22
Before Starting a Software Upgrade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Loading Base Image Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Loading Application Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 23
Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24Printer Set Up (R4.x and later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24Printer Set Up (R2.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application Software . . . . . . . . . 3 - 24
Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25Product Locator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 25
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 26
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xvi Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 4Functional Checks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
General Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4Monitor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
Power On / Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6To Connect Mains Power to the Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6To Boot Up Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8To Place System in Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
Power Off / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9To Power Off Back-End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 9To Shut Down Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
Probe/Connectors Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Connect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Activate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Deactivate a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11To Disconnect a Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 11
Using CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Activate CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Omit Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Restore Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Start Frame/End Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 12
Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 13System B/M-Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 14System CFM and PWD Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 15Basic Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16
To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 16Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17Report Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 17
The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xvii
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
For BT03 and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18For BT04 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 19Using the MOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
USB Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 22Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and Images . . . . . 4 - 22
Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
Mechanical Function Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 25Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 26Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27Brakes and Direction Locks Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xviii Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 5Components and Functions (Theory)
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5Dataflow Control Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Front End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1) . . . . 5 - 8FEPS3.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9Top Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board
(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 13SCB, SCB2 High Level Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14Scan Control Board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 14
Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 16Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 18
EBM, EBM2 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20B–Mode Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21M–Mode Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Back End Processor (BEP 1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 22Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23PCIO Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23PCI Video Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xix
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24Inputs (BEP 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 26
Back End Processor (BEP 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 27Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28PCIO Board: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 28DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002) . . . . . . 5 - 29Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29Internal Storage Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 29Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 30Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup
(RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33
Back End Processor (BEP 3.x). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 36Inputs (BEP 3.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 38
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xx Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 39Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40PCI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 40Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41Inputs (BEP 4.x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
AC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 42
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 43
BEP Power On Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44
BEP Power Off Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45
Operator Console Control PWA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 46Console Main Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47
Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 48Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 51Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) . . 5 - 52
Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 54
Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 55Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 58Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59
DC Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59Video Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59Audio Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 59Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60Control Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 60
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61DC Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61Connectors – Solder Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61Interface Connectors – Component Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxi
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Top Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 63
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 64
External I/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 65Bi-directional Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 67
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 68
Modem and USB Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 69LEDs (non-USB Modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70
Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 71AC Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72AC Power PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 72AC Controller Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74
Mechanical Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76Top Console Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 76
17” LCD (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7719” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 77
Wheels/Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78
Air Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Air Flow Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79
Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80Service Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80Access / Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 80
Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 81Error Logs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 82
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxii Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 83Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 84Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 85
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86Diagnostics Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86Diagnostic Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 86
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 88Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 89Planned Maintenance (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90
4D Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 91Principle of Volume Acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 914D Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92
Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe Cable . . . . . 5 - 92USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 94Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95
Continuous Wave Doppler Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96Continuous Wave Doppler Signal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
PCI CW Doppler PWA card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97Internal CW Doppler Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97Probe Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97Mu Metal Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 97
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxiii
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 6Service Adjustments
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Regulatory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2Monitor Adjustment (Standard only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
Degauss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3Visible Image Display Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
Monitor Tilt (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Monitor Tilt Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5
Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7Brightness and Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7Angularity Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7Color Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Panel Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Time Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8Z-Release Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Checking the Release System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9Cable Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
Emergency Release Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Brake Arm Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxiv Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13Brake Arm Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14Procedure Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Brake Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Front Wheel Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15Front Brake Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 16Rear Wheel Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17Rear Wheel Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxv
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 7Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
Service Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Gathering Trouble Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3Collecting Vital System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
Screen Captures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13Check and Record the P4 Key Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 13Setting the P4 Key to Screen Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14Capturing a Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16Ctrl-PrintScreen Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 17
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Acquisition Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19Diagnostic Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 21
Calibration Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 23
I/O Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24Launching the Op Panel Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 24
Trackball Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25Keyboard Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26Slidepots Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26Encoders Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27Pushbuttons Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 27LEDs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28Touchscreen Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 28Ending the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 29
Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
Disruptive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 30
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxvi Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
PC Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 31
PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33Dicom Verify Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Hard Drive Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxvii
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 8Replacement Procedures
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 4Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5. . . . . . . . 8 - 10Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 . . . . 8 - 12Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16Battery Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Before Starting a Software Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxviii Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Save Connectivity Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17DICOM TCPIP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 17
Image Management Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18Managing Patient Data and Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
Patient Images and Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18Preset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18Backup Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18
EZBackup/Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 19User-Defined Backup Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 22
Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
To Prepare to Load Base Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 33
Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38
Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Loading Application Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 49Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x . . . . . . 8 - 54
Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56Loading Applications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 56Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 60
Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61Application Software Upgrade Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 61Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 64
System Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65To Complete the System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65VCR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65DVR Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 65Print Key Assignment and Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 66Cycle System Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 67Standby Operation Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxix
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
To Place the System in the Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68To Wake the System from Standby Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 68
Functional Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 69
Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 70Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 71
Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Release Lock Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 72Release Lock Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 73
Gas Shock Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 74Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 75Top Tray Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76
Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 76Gas Shock Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 78Install the New Gas Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 81Reassemble Z-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 83
Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Wirecable Removal Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 86Wirecable Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 88Wirecable Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 90
Frog Leg Angle Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Manpower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Kit Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 92Functional Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 95
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxx Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 9
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
List of Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3
Console View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
External Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
Additional Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9Bumper Kit, Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12
Operator Control Panel Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13
Gas Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14
Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16CRT Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 16Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 17Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 18
Operator Control Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20Upper Op Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 20Lower Operator Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 22Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24
Front End Processor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 26
I/O Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32
3-D Externals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34
Back End Processor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35BEP 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 35BEP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36BEP 3.x / 4.x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 38
Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 41
Interconnect Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxxi
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Peripheral Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 44Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 48Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 49AC Distribution Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 50
Power Distribution Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 61
Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 62
Voice Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 63Voice Scan Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 65
4D Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 66
Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 67
Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 68
Customer Documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 69
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 70
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxxii Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
CHAPTER 10Care & Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
Why do Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Maintenance Task Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Tools Required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4
System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6
System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 6Peripheral/Option Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7Mains Cable Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 7
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8General Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8Air Filter Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 8
Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
View the Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Probe Related Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10Basic Probe Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10Basic Probe Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10
Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 11GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 12Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 13Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
Meter Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 14
GE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Table of Contents xxxiii
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 15Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 16Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 17Generic Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 18
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 19
Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 20Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 21Generic procedure on Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23Meter procedure using probe adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe
Isolation (Sink) Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 25
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 27ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 28
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 29
GE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
xxxiv Table of Contents
1/18/10L9_TOC.FMP R E L I M I N A R Y
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-1
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Chapter 1Introduction
Section 1-1Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented in this manual before installing or servicing a unit.
1-1-2 Purpose of Service ManualThis Service Manual provides installation and service information for the LOGIQ™ 9 Ultrasound Scanning System.
Table 1-1 Contents in Chapter 1
Section Description Page Number
1-1 Overview 1-1
1-2 Service Manual Overview 1-2
1-3 Important Conventions 1-9
1-4 Safety Considerations 1-16
1-5 Labels Locations 1-18
1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings 1-18
1-7 Battery Safety 1-20
1-8 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) 1-21
1-9 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts 1-21
1-10 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 1-22
1-11 Customer Assistance 1-23
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-2 Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-2Service Manual Overview
1-2-1 Contents in this Service Manual1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings.2.) Chapter 2 - Site Preparation: Contains pre-installation requirements for the LOGIQ™ 9.3.) Chapter 3 - System Setup: Contains installation procedures.4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that are recommended as part of the
installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance.5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional
explanations of the electronics.6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make available adjustments to
the LOGIQ™ 9.7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running diagnostic or related
routines for the LOGIQ™ 9.8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly
procedures for all changeable Field Replaceable Units (FRU).9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of field replaceable parts for the LOGIQ™ 9.10.)Chapter 10 - Care & Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for the LOGIQ™ 9.
1-2-2 Typical Users of the Basic Service Manual• Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.)• Hospital’s Service Personnel• Contractors (Some parts of Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-3
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-3 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Covered by this Manual
Table 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations
Part Number Description
2188900 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-4 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-5 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-6 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0
2351100 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2375600 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2404587 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
5150000 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5177000 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*
5177000-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*
5177000-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5/4.x BT’07 and BT’09*
*BT09 is a software-only upgrade
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-4 Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4 Product Description
1-2-4-1 Overview of the ProductLOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
- B-Mode- M-Mode- Color Flow Mode (CFM)- Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps- PW Doppler with high PRF- B-Flow Mode- M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging
LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-5
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4-1 Overview of the Product (cont’d)
Figure 1-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components
Front Bumper
Backend Processor Chassis
CD-ROM3.5” MOD
B/W Printer
Operator Console
Gel Warmer
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Monitor (CRT)
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Front CoverVCR
Probe Connector
Swivel Lock
Brake Release
or DVD
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-6 Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4-1 Overview of the Product (cont’d)
Figure 1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with 17” LCD Option - Major Components
Front Bumper
Backend Processor
CD-ROM
B/W Printer
Operator Console
Gel Warmer
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
17”LCD Monitor
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Front CoverVCR
Probe Connector
Swivel Lock Brake Release
or DVD
Subwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)
Chassis
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-7
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4-1 Overview of the Product (cont’d)
1-2-4-2 History - Hardware/Software versionsThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-3 History - Peripherals/Software versionsThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-4 FRUs for Back End ProcessorThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-5 History - Supported ProbesThe contents in this sub-section is in Chapter 9.
1-2-4-6 How to Turn the Scanner On and OffPlease refer to Chapter 4, section 4-2-2 "Power On / Boot Up" , for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner ON and to Chapter 4, section 4-2-4 "Power Off / Shutdown" for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner OFF.
1-2-4-7 How to Check for Hardware/Software version and Installed OptionsTo verify hardware versions on the boards, refer to Section 9-11 "Front End Processor Assembly"
Please refer to Section 4-3 "Software Configuration Checks" to check the software versions on local software on the boards.
Please refer to Chapter 4 to check for installed options.
Figure 1-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD
Operator Console
Gel Warmer
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
19” LCD Monitor
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot KnobsSubwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-8 Section 1-2 - Service Manual Overview
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-2-4-8 Product Manuals
NOTE: The LOGIQ™ 9 Unpacking Procedure is delivered on paper.
See Section 9-23 "Customer Documentation" for customer documentation available for the product.
1-2-4-9 Purpose of Operator Manual(s)The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-9
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-3Important Conventions
1-3-1 Conventions Used in Book
1-3-1-1 Model DesignationsThis manual covers the LOGIQ™ 9 scanners.
1-3-1-2 IconsPictures, or icons, are used wherever they reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
1-3-1-3 Safety Precaution MessagesVarious levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of following ways:
NOTE: Notes provide important information about an item or a procedure. Information contained in a NOTE can often save you time or effort.
DANGER DANGER IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT WILL CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH IF THE INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
WARNINGWARNING WARNING IS USED TO INDICATE THE PRESENCE OF A HAZARD THAT CAN CAUSE SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE IF INSTRUCTIONS ARE IGNORED.
CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored.
NOTICE Equipment Damage PossibleNotice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no personal injury risk. Example: Disk drive will crash.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-10 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-3-2 Standard Hazard Icons
Other hazard icons make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed.
Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could cause harm.
Table 1-3 Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER HEAT PINCH
Table 1-4 Standard Icons Indicating a Special Procedure Be Used
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
LASERLIGHT
Signed Date
TAG &
LOCKOUT EYEPROTECTION
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-11
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-3-3 Product IconsThe following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment.
Table 1-5 Product Icons
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
Identification and Rating Plate
Manufacturer’s name and address. Rear panel
Identification and Rating Plate
Date of manufacture Rating Plate
Serial Number Rating Plate
Catalog Number Rating Plate
Type/Class Label Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection.
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment having even more electrical isolation than standard Type B equipment because it is intended for intimate patient contact.
Probe connectors PCG connectoror Rear of Console
Equipment Type BF Applied Part (man in the box with paddle) symbol is in accordance with IEC 60417-5334. Probe
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates equipment having a high degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact.
ECG connectorSurgical probes
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-12 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM
Defibrillator-proof type of equipment. At the ECG connector on front of system.
“CAUTIONThis unit weighs...
Special care must be used to avoid..."
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit.
On the console where easily seen during transport
"CAUTION" The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.
Various
Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Various
Follow Instructions for Use. “ATTENTION” - Consult accompanying documents” is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
May appear on some probes
"CAUTION - Dangerous voltage" (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.
Various
"Mains OFF" Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch. Rear of system adjacent to mains switch
Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-13
10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM
"OFF/Standby" Indicates the power off/standby position of the power switch.CAUTIONThis Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply
Adjacent to On-Off Switch
"Mains ON" Indicates the power on position of the mains power switch."ON" Indicates the power on position of the power switch.CAUTIONThis Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply
Front Panel Switch
"Protective Earth" Indicates the protective earth (grounding) terminal. Internal
"Equipotentiality" Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.
Rear of console
This unit carries the CE mark. The LOGIQ™ 9 unit complies with regulatory requirements of the European Directive 93/42/EEC concerning medical devices. It also complies with emission limits for a Group 1, Class B Medical Device as stated in EN 60601-1-2 (IEC 60601-1-2).
Rear of Console
NOTE: CE Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.
United States onlyPrescription Requirement label
Rear Panel
Authorized European Representative address. Rear Panel
NOTE: EC REP Mark not on systems manufactured after October 1,2010.
Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-14 Section 1-3 - Important Conventions
10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM
ETL Listing Mark Monogram Rear Panel
GOST Symbol. Russia Regulatory Country Clearance. Rear Panel
This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.
Rear Panel
No hazardous substance, above the maximum concentration value, is present. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE).
Rear Panel
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “10” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.
Probe
Indicates the presence of hazardous substance(s) above the maximum concentration value. Maximum concentration values for electronic information products, as set by the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard SJ/T11364-2006, include the hazardous substances of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium, polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), and polybrominated diphenyl ether (PBDE). “20” indicates the number of years during which the hazardous substance(s) will not leak or mutate so that the use of this product will not result in any severe environmental pollution, bodily injury, or damage to any assets.
Rear Panel
Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-15
10/12/10CHAPTER1.FM
or
This product consists of devices that may contain mercury, which must be recycled or disposed of in accordance with local, state, or country laws. (Within this system, the backlight lamps in the monitor display, contain mercury.)
Rear Panel
How to lower LCD prior to transport Rear of the LCD monitor.
How to lock Operator Panel prior to transport Rear of the LCD monitor.
DO NOT place a finger, hand or any object on the joint of the monitor or monitor arm to avoid injury when moving the monitor and monitor arm.
Rear of the LCD monitor.
Table 1-5 Product Icons (Continued)
LABEL/SYMBOL PURPOSE/MEANING LOCATION
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-16 Section 1-4 - Safety Considerations
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-4Safety Considerations
1-4-1 IntroductionThe following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-4-2 Human SafetyOperating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a LOGIQ™ 9 Training are authorized to service the equipment.
1-4-3 Mechanical Safety
WARNINGWARNING Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest position. Verify that the front brake is locked and the scanner is unable to swivel. Verify that the rear brakes are in the locked position.
WARNINGWARNING Ultrasound probes are highly sensitive medical instruments that can easily be damaged by improper handling. Use care when handling and protect from damage when not in use. DO NOT use a damaged or defective probe. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage.
WARNINGWARNING Never use a probe that has fallen to the floor. Even if it looks ok, it may be damaged.
WARNINGWARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake.
WARNINGWARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system.
WARNINGWARNING While the software install procedure is designed to preserve data, you should save any patient data, images, system setups to a MOD, CD, DVD or hardcopy before doing a software upgrade.
CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-17
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-4-3 Mechanical Safety (cont’d)
NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle:
• Secure the unit in an upright position.• Lock the wheels (brake).• DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point.• Place the probes in their carrying case.• Eject any Magneto Optical disk, CD or DVD from their drive.
1-4-4 Electrical Safety
1-4-4-1 Safe PracticesTo minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The system is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. If an extension cord is used with the system, make sure that the total current rating of the system does not exceed the extension cord rating.
The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment.
Both the system power cable and the power connector meet international electrical standards.
CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 171kg (376 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.ALWAYS:Be sure the pathway is clear.Use slow, careful motions.Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.
CAUTION To avoid injury when you move the LCD monitor and the monitor arm, do NOT put your finger, hand, or object on the joint of the monitor or the monitor arm.
CAUTION Before you move or transport the system, make sure to lock the LCD monitor arm firmly and flip down the monitor to prevent damage to the system.
CAUTION Do NOT grab the speakers to move the monitor and the monitor arm when adjusting the LCD. However, when you turn up the monitor from flip-down status, you can grab the upper corner of the monitor.
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage to the monitor, make sure there is nothing within range of the LCD before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes people as well as things.
NOTICE Be careful not to pinch any of the cables.
WARNINGWARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNINGWARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-18 Section 1-5 - Labels Locations
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-4-4-2 ProbesFollow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner:
• Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the:- Housing- Cable strain relief- Lens- Seal- Connector pins- Locking mechanism
• Do not use a damaged or defective probe.• Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
Section 1-5Labels Locations
Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 2, for the label locations.
Section 1-6Dangerous Procedure Warnings
Warnings, such as the examples below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNINGWARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNINGWARNING EXPLOSION WARNINGDO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD.
WARNINGWARNING Do Not Substitute Parts or Modify EquipmentBecause of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of the equipment.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-19
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-6 Dangerous Procedure Warnings (cont’d)
WARNINGWARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.
WARNINGWARNING Ensure that the system is turned off and unplugged. To verify that the Front End Power Supply (FEPS) is in a zero energy state, wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
WARNINGWARNING Use extreme caution as long as LOGIQ™ 9 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
WARNINGWARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.
WARNINGWARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
WARNINGWARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all mechanical parts. If sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
WARNINGWARNING Wear all PPE including gloves as indicated in the chemical MSDS.
WARNINGWARNING Do Not attempt to charge batteries other than the type included in the kit (NiMH). Standard alkaline batteries CANNOT be recharged.
READ all safety precautions that come from the battery and battery charger manufacturers.
WARNINGWARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-20 Section 1-7 - Battery Safety
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-7Battery Safety
To avoid the risk of injury, follow the warning and cautions to make sure that the battery does not burst, ignite, or generate heat of fumes.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
WARNINGWARNING • The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.• Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0° and 40° C (32° and
104° F).• Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the negative terminals with metal
objects.• Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.• Do not expose the battery to temperature over 60° C (140° F). Keep it away from fire and
other heat sources.• Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.• Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.• Do not drop packs from height as it may cause possible malfunction damage.• Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.• Do not use a damaged battery.• Do not solder a battery.• Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.• Do not contact PCM directly to prevent packs from ESD damage.
CAUTION To avoid the battery bursting, igniting, or fumes from the battery causing equipment damage, observe the following precautions:• Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.• Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.• If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.• If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in a way appears
abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If you have any questions about the battery, consult GE or your local representative.
• Store the battery between -20° C (-4° F) and 60° C (140°F).• Use only GE recognized batteries.• In case of the long term (3 months or more) storage:
• Store the battery in a temperature range of 10° C (50° F) and 30° C (86°F).• When charging for the first time after long-term storage, recover such packs to
original performance by repeating several cycles of full charging and discharging.• When storing packs for more than 6 months, charge at least once per 6 month period to
prevent leakage and deterioration in performance due to self-discharging.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-21
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-8Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)
Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains plug.
To apply Lockout/Tagout:
1.) Plan and prepare for shutdown.2.) Shutdown the equipment.3.) Isolate the equipment.4.) Apply Lockout/Tagout Devices.5.) Control all stored and residual energy.6.) Verify isolation.
All potentially hazardous stored or residual energy is relieved.
.
Section 1-9Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair Parts
Equipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe).
The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:1. Turn off the breaker.2. Unplug the system.3. Maintain control of the system power plug.4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Signed Date
TAG &
LOCKOUT
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-22 Section 1-10 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-10Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
1-10-1 What is EMC?Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radio–frequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-10-2 ComplianceThe LOGIQ™ 9 unit conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements.
For applicable standards refer to the Safety Chapter in the Basic User Manual.
NOTE: For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-10-3 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention
WARNINGWARNING Do not touch any boards with integrated circuits prior to taking the necessary ESD precautions: 1. Always connect yourself, via an arm-wrist strap, to the advised ESD connection point located on the Rear of the scanner (to the right of the power connector). 2. Follow general guidelines for handling of electrostatic sensitive equipment.
WARNINGWARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off. Avoid all contact with electrical contacts, conductors and components. Always use non-conductive handles designed for the removal and replacement of ESD sensitive parts. All parts that have the potential for storing energy must be discharged or isolated before making contact.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 1 Introduction 1-23
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
Section 1-11Customer Assistance
1-11-1 Contact InformationIf this equipment does not work as indicated in this Service Manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below.
Before you call, identify the following information, and acquire image (Alt+D) to send to Milwaukee:
1.) System ID serial number.2.) Software version.3.) Date and time of occurrence.4.) Sequence of events leading to issue.5.) Is the issue repeatable?6.) Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.7.) Media brand, speed, capacity, type.8.) Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
Table 1-6 Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location Phone Number
USA
GE HealthcareUltrasound Service Engineering9900 Innovation DriveWauwatosa, WI 53226
Service: On-site
Service: Parts
Applications Support
1-800–437–1171
1-800-558-2040
1-800-682-5327 or 1-262-524-5698
Canada 1-800-668-0732
Latin AmericaService
Applications Support
1-800-321-7937
1-262-524-5698
EuropeGE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KGBeethovenstraBe 239Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 SolingenGermany
Phone: +33 (0) 130-831-300 (General Imaging and Cardiac)+43 (0) 7682-3800-26 (Voluson-Logiqbook)
Fax: +49 (0)2122-8024-31
Asia (Singapore)GE Ultrasound AsiaService Department - Ultrasound298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06Central PlazaSingapore 169730
Tel: +65 6291-8528
Fax: +65 6291-7006
Japan Support Center Phone: 81-426-48-2940Fax: 81-426-48-2905
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
1-24 Section 1-11 - Customer Assistance
1/18/10CHAPTER1.FM
1-11-2 System Manufacturer
Table 1-7 System Manufacturer
Manufacturer FAX Number
GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC9900 Innovation DriveWauwatosa, WI 53226USA
414-721-3865
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-1
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
Chapter 2Site Preparation
Section 2-1Overview
2-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 2This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a LOGIQ™ 9. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.
Table 2-1 Contents in Chapter 2
Section Description Page Number
2-1 Overview 2-1
2-2 General Console Requirements 2-2
2-3 Facility Needs 2-6
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
2-2 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
Section 2-2General Console Requirements
2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements
NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = ((Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
2-2-1-1 CoolingThe cooling requirement for the LOGIQ™ 9 is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
2-2-1-2 LightingBright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.
2-2-2 Electrical Requirements
NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and LiveThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined NeutralThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-2-1 LOGIQ™ 9 Power Requirements
2-2-2-2 Inrush CurrentInrush current is not a factor to consider due to the inrush current limiting properties of the power supplies.
Table 2-2 Environmental Requirements - LOGIQ™ 9
Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Humidity Heat Dissipation
10o to 35oC -10° to 60° C 30 - 85% non-condensing 3500 BTU pr hour
Table 2-3 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency
100-120 VAC ±10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz
200-240 VAC ±10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-3
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
2-2-2-3 Site Circuit BreakerIt is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the machine be readily accessible.
2-2-2-4 Site Power OutletsA dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other adequate outlets for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.
2-2-2-5 Unit Power PlugIf the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required.
2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements
Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms.
Power Transients(All applications)Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR. The LOGIQ™ 9 requires a dedicated single branch circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
2-4 Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
2-2-3 EMI LimitationsUltrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. Ultrasound machines also generate EMI. The LOGIQ™ 9 complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed.
Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include:
• medical lasers, • scanners, • cauterizing guns, • computers, • monitors, • fans, • gel warmers, • microwave ovens,• light dimmers • portable phones. The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference.
See Table 2-4 for EMI Prevention tips.
Table 2-4 EMI Prevention/Abatement
EMI Rule Details
Be aware of RF sourcesKeep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals.
Ground the unit Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet.
Replace all screws, RF gaskets, covers, cores
After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the shield over the front of card cage. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals.
Replace broken RF gaskets If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
Do not place labels where RF gaskets touch metal
Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label.
Use GE specified harnesses and peripherals
The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified.
Take care with cellular phones Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
Properly dress peripheral cables
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the card cage or hang out of the peripheral bays. Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables to the frame.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-5
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
2-2-4 Scan Probe Environmental Requirements
NOTE: Temperature in degrees C. Conversion to Degrees F = (Degrees C * 9/5) + 32).
2-2-5 Time and Manpower RequirementsSite preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible. If possible, allow six weeks before delivery, for enough time to make necessary changes.
Table 2-5 Environmental Requirements - Probes
Operating Temperature Storage Temperature
Standard Probes 10o to 40o C -10° to 60° C
4D Probes 18o to 40o C -10o to 50 o C
NOTICE SYSTEMS AND ELECTRONIC PROBES ARE DESIGNED FOR STORAGE TEMPERATURES OF -20 TO +50 degrees C. WHEN EXPOSED TO LARGE TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS, THE PRODUCT SHOULD BE KEPT IN ROOM TEMPERATURE FOR 10 HOURS BEFORE USE.
CAUTION The LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) when ready to use, depending on installed monitors and peripherals. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.ALWAYS:Be sure the pathway is clear.Use slow, careful motions.Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 16 kg (35 lbs).
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
2-6 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
Section 2-3Facility Needs
2-3-1 Purchaser ResponsibilitiesThe work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre-installation work before delivery. Use the Pre installation checklist to verify that all needed steps have been taken. Purchaser responsibility includes:
• Procuring the materials required.• Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system.• Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
NOTE: All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a non–listed or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase).
The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-7
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
2-3-2 Required Features
NOTE: GE Healthcare requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system.
Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and LiveThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
Sites with a mains power system without a defined NeutralThe dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet.
NOTE: Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
• Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide.• Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling• Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with
peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE: The LOGIQ™ 9 has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on-board peripherals.
• Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer• Power outlets for test equipment and modem within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit• Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack)• Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
2-3-3 Desirable Features• Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide• Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible• Sink with hot and cold water• Receptacle for bio–hazardous waste, like used probe sheaths• Emergency oxygen supply• Storage for linens and equipment• Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room• Dual level lighting (bright and dim)• Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
2-8 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
2-3-4 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 2 Site Preparation 2-9
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
2-3-5 Networking Setup Requirements
2-3-5-1 Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection)None.
2-3-5-2 Scanner Connected to Hospital’s NetworkSupported networks: DICOM Network (option)
2-3-5-3 Purpose of the DICOM Network FunctionDICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
2-3-5-4 DICOM Option Pre-installation RequirementsTo configure the LOGIQ™ 9 to work with other network connections, the site’s network administrator must provide some necessary information.
Use the Connectivity Setup Worksheet on 3-22 to record the required information that must include:
• A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the LOGIQ™ 9. • The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING
INFORMATION.• The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the
LOGIQ™ 9 for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for solving errors.
2-3-5-5 InSite Requirements• Network 10/100 or 10/100/1G Interface.• Optional analog phone line for older products.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
2-10 Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
1/18/10CHAPTER2.FM
This page was intentionally left blank.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-1
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Chapter 3System Setup
Section 3-1Overview
3-1-1 The Purpose of Chapter 3This chapter contains information needed to unpack and set up the unit. Included are procedures to receive, unpack and configure the equipment. System operation is verified at the factory.
Table 3-1 Contents in Chapter 3
Section Description Page Number
3-1 Overview 3-1
3-2 Set Up Reminders 3-2
3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment 3-4
3-4 Preparing for Set Up 3-6
3-5 Completing the Setup 3-8
3-6 System Configuration 3-11
3-7 Available Probes 3-21
3-8 Software/Option Configuration 3-21
3-9 Connectivity Setup Worksheet 3-22
3-10 Before Starting a Software Upgrade 3-23
3-11 Loading Base Image Software 3-23
3-12 Loading Application Software 3-23
3-13 System Setup 3-23
3-14 Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color 3-24
3-15 Paperwork 3-25
3-16 Checks 3-26
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-2 Section 3-2 - Set Up Reminders
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-2Set Up Reminders
3-2-1 Average Set Up Time
3-2-2 Set Up Warnings1.) Since the LOGIQ™ 9 weighs at least 168kg (370 lbs.) without options, two people are required to
unpack it. Two people are also required for installing any additional items in excess of 16 kg (35 lbs).2.) There are no operator serviceable components. To prevent shock, do not remove any covers or
panels. Should problems or malfunctions occur, turn off the breaker, and unplug the power cord. Only qualified service personnel should carry out servicing and troubleshooting.
3.) After being transported, the unit may be very cold or hot. If this is the case, allow the unit to acclimate before you turn it on. It requires one hour for each 2.5°C increment its temperature is below 10°C or above 40°C.
3-2-2-1 Brake Pedal Operation
3-2-2-2 Operator I/O Panel PositionIf weight is placed on the Operator I/O Panel in its extended position, the console could tip over
Table 3-2 Average Set Up Time
Description Average Set Up Time Comments
Unpacking the scanner 0.5 hours
Scanner wo/options 0.5 hours Dependant on the required configuration
DICOM Option 0.5 - 2.0 hours Dependant on the configuration amount
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Turning the system on without acclimation after arriving at site may cause the system to be damaged.
Table 3-3 Acclimation Time
°C 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -40
°F 140 131 122 113 104 96 86 77 68 59 50 41 32 23 14 5 -4 -13 -22 -31 -40
hrs 8 6 4 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
WARNINGWARNING REMEMBER: If the front caster swivel lock is engaged for transportation, pressing the release pedal once disengages the swivel lock. You must depress the release pedal a second time to engage the brake.
WARNINGWARNING The system should NOT be moved with the Operator I/O Panel extended. Move the Operator I/O Panel to its centered and locked position. Lower the Operator I/O Panel as much as possible before moving the system.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-3
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-2-3 Safety Reminders
DANGER WHEN USING ANY TEST INSTRUMENT THAT IS CAPABLE OF OPENING THE AC GROUND LINE (I.E., METER’S GROUND SWITCH IS OPEN), DON’T TOUCH THE UNIT!
CAUTION Two people should unpack the unit because of its weight. Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted.
CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to its operating environment.
CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a three- to two-prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION Do NOT wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is present.
CAUTION Do not use a 20 Amp to 15 Amp adapter on the 120 Vac unit’s power cord. This unit requires a dedicated 20 A circuit and can have a 15A plug if the on-board peripherals do not cause the unit to draw more than 14.0 amps.
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S) The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the LOGIQ™ 9 and kept near the unit for quick reference.
CAUTION ACOUSTIC OUTPUT HAZARDAlthough the ultrasound energy transmitted from the LOGIQ™ 9 probe is within FDA limits, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
Figure 3-1 Environmental Labels
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-4 Section 3-3 - Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-3Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment
CAUTION Two people are needed to unpack the unit because of its weight.Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both.Two people are required whenever a part weighing 16 kg (35 lbs) or more must be lifted or pushed up or down a slope.
CAUTION Remember to use relevant Personal Protecting Equipment during packing/unpacking. Check with your local EHS representative.
Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure
Step Task
1. Open the four hinges on each door
2. Remove the doors at both ends of the box
3. Place the front door against the rear edge of the pallet. The front door can be used as a ramp.
4. Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanner’s keyboard and all the filling material, from the wooden box.
Be sure to place theramp (front door) asillustrated here.
Front Doorused as ramp.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-5
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
5. Press once on the swivel lock to release the brake.
Caution: Two people are needed in the next step due to the weight of the equipment.
6. Carefully move the scanner out of the wooden box, down the ramp.
7. Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit.
Table 3-4 Unpacking Procedure (Continued)
Step Task
Swivel Lock
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-6 Section 3-4 - Preparing for Set Up
10/12/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-4Preparing for Set Up
3-4-1 Verify Customer OrderCompare items received by the customer to that which is listed on the delivery order. Report any items that are missing, back ordered, or damaged.
3-4-2 Physical Inspection
3-4-2-1 System Voltage SettingsVerify that the scanner is set to the correct voltage.The Voltage settings for the LOGIQ™ 9 Scanner are found on a label to the right of the Power switch and External I/O, on the rear of the system.
3-4-2-2 Rating Plate
NOTE: This Rating Plate example is a representation of several designs used.
Figure 3-2 Rating Plate Example
200 kg
GE Healthcare LOGIQ 9
CISPR 11GROUP 1 CLASS A
Rating Plate
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-7
10/12/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-4-2-3 ETL Testing Laboratories Safety Rating LabelThis ETL label is required for all USA systems.
3-4-2-4 Video FormatsCheck that the video format is set to the locally used video standard, NTSC or PAL.
3-4-3 EMI ProtectionThis unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electo-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation.
Figure 3-3 ETL Label Example
WARNINGWARNING CONNECTING A LOGIQ™ 9 SCANNER TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE SCANNER.
200 kg
GE Healthcare LOGIQ 9
CISPR 11GROUP 1 CLASS A
ETL Label
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-8 Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-5Completing the Setup
3-5-1 Power On / Boot Up
NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-5-1-1 Scanner Power On
1.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.2.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.3.) Connect the Main Power Cable to a hospital grade power receptacle with the proper rated voltage.
Never use an adapter that would circumvent the safety ground. 4.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals and the Back-end Processor.
Figure 3-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the On / Off switch on the Control panel (Figure 3-5) indicates the Back End Processor is in standby mode:
For BT03 systems and prior, the On / Off switch illuminates amber.For BT04 systems and later, the On / Off switch blinks amber and green.
Cable ClipCircuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-9
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-5-1-2 Back-end Processor Boot Up
1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once.When the On / Off switch on the Control Panel is pressed once, the Back-end Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner.
No status messages are displayed during this process.
3-5-2 Power Off / Shutdown
NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
3-5-2-1 Back-end Processor Power Down
1.) Press the On / Off switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
Figure 3-5 On / Off switch
Figure 3-6 System Exit Menu
On / Off switch
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-10 Section 3-5 - Completing the Setup
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-5-2-2 Scanner Shutdown
1.) Switch OFF the Circuit Breaker at the back of the system.2.) Disconnect the Mains Power Cable is necessary. For example: Relocating the scanner.
3-5-3 Transducer Connection and Removal1.) To connect a transducer to one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:
a.) Ensure that the transducer twist lock lever is in the horizontal position.b.) Insert the transducer connector on the receptacle guide pin until it touches the receptacle
mating surface.c.) Twist the transducer twist lock lever to vertical position to lock it in place.
2.) To disconnect a transducer from one of the three right-most transducer receptacles:
a.) Turn the transducer twist lock lever to the horizontal position.b.) Separate the transducer connector from the receptacle mating surface.
NOTE: It is not necessary to turn OFF power to connect or disconnect a transducer.
Figure 3-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner, with Power On
NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system.
NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
Cable ClipCircuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-11
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-6System Configuration
3-6-1 System Specifications
3-6-1-1 Physical DimensionsThe physical dimensions of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit are summarized in Table 3-5 and Table 3-6.
Table 3-1 lists the size of LOGIQ™ 9, with monitor and on-board peripherals.
3-6-1-2 Console Weight
3-6-1-3 Acoustic Noise Output:Less than 70dB(A) according to DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.
3-6-2 Electrical Specifications
Table 3-5 Physical Dimensions of LOGIQ™ 9
HeightWidth Depth
Minimum Maximum
127 cm / 50 inches 160.7 cm / 63.25 inches 64 cm / 25.2 inches 89.9 cm / 35.4 inches
Table 3-6 Weight of LOGIQ™ 9 and Monitors, With and Without Peripherals
Model With Peripherals - kg [lbs] Without Peripherals - kg [lbs]
LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT 206 [454] 185 [408]
LOGIQ™ 9 with CRT, Upgraded to LCD
(includes counterweight)206 [454] 185 [408]
LOGIQ™ 9 with LCD 192 [423] 168 [370]
Table 3-7 Electrical Specifications for LOGIQ™ 9
Voltage Tolerances Current Frequency
100-120 VAC ±10% 9.5 A 50-60 Hz
200-240 VAC ±10% 4.75 A 50-60 Hz
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-12 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-3 On-Board Optional Peripherals
Table 3-8 Approved On-Board Peripherals
Device Manufacturer Model Video Signal
B/W Video Printer SONY UP-895MDW NA
B/W Video Printer SONY UP-D897MD NA
Video Cassette Recorder MitsubishiHS_MD3000UHS_MD3000E
NTSCPAL
Video Cassette Recorder SONY SVO-9500MDSVO-9500-MDP
NTSCPAL
Color Video Printer SONY
UP-51MDUP-D21UP-D55
UP-D23MD
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-13
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system)
Figure 3-8 External I/O Panel Labels (Prior to BT03)
Figure 3-9 External I/O Panel Connectors
1 2 3 4 6 7
9 10 11 12 13 148
5
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-14 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4 External I/O Connector Panel (Back of system) (cont’d)
Table 3-9 External I/O Connector Descriptions
Item Connector Name Table Number Description
1 Audio Output (Left) RCA Phono Jack
2 Audio Output (Right) RCA Phono Jack
3 Trigger Output BNC Connector
4 Footswitch Table 3-10Hirose Electric Co. RM12BRB-5S,
Footswich transport shelf is in the back at the bottom
5 RS232 Com1 DSUB 9 pin male
6 Expose 1 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack
7 Expose 2 Table 3-11 Mini-phone Jack
8 Modem Connection Table 3-12 RJ-11 with global adapter kit for connection
9 Composite Video Out BNC Connector, Color Output
10 B/W Video Out BNC Connector, Black and White Output
11 S-Video Output Table 3-13 4 pin mini-DIN
12 S-VGA Output Table 3-14 DSUB-HD22 15 Pin female
13 USB (1) Table 3-15
14 Ethernet Connection Table 3-16 RJ-45 Connector
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-15
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs
Table 3-10 Footswitch Connector
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 Foot 1 Left switch
2 Floating Ground Ground
3 Foot 2 Center switch
4 Floating Ground Ground
5 Foot 3 Right switch
Table 3-11 Remote Expose 1 & 2 Connectors
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 SHUTTER/PRINT Print command to external device
2 Signal GND Ground
Table 3-12 Modem, RJ11 Modular 6 Pin
Pin No Output Signal Description
2 TEL L4 Telephone L4
3 TEL L2 Telephone L2
4 TEL L1 Telephone L1
5 TEL L3 Telephone L3
Others NC Non-connection
Table 3-13 S-Video Connector, 4 Pin
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 SVIDEO OUT/IN YG Y (Luma) GND
2 SVIDEO OUT/IN CG C (Chroma) GND
3 SVIDEO OUT/IN Y Y (Luma) SIGNAL
4 SVIDEO OUT/IN C C (Chroma) SIGNAL
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-16 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-4-1 External I/O Pin Outs (cont’d)
Table 3-14 S-VGA Connector, Shrinked Sub-D 15 Pin
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 VGA OUT1 R Red
2 VGA OUT1 G Green
3 VGA OUT1 B Blue
4, 9,11,12,15 N/C N/C
5, 6, 7, 8, 10 GND GND
13 VGA OUT1 HS H Sync
14 VGA OUT1 VS V Sync
Table 3-15 USB (A) Connector
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 VCC USB Power Supply
2 - Data USB Data (-)
3 + Data USB Data (+)
4 GND USB Power Ground
Table 3-16 Ethernet Connector, RJ45 Modular 8 Pin
Pin No Output Signal Description
1 ETHER TD Ethernet RD+
2 ETHER TD Ethernet RD-
3 ETHER RD Ethernet TD+
6 ETHER RD Ethernet TD-
Others NC Non-connection
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-17
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system)
Figure 3-10 Front Connectors
Table 3-17 Front I/O Connector Descriptions
Item Connector Name Description
1 USB On BEP 3.x/4.x Only
2 USB On BEP 3.x/4.x Only
3 CW CW probe connection port (optional)
4 4D 4D Probe connection port (optional)
5 Probe Connectors The two left most connectors are recommended for 4D Probe placement
6 USB On upper console for wired voice connection Only
1 2
3
4
6
5
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-18 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d)
Table 3-18 CW Connector, J1 (Optional)
Pin No Output Signal Description
2 DOPIN COAX CENTER, RED JACKET
3 DOPIN GND COAX SHIELD, RED JACKET
5 ID0 R1-2
6 PCW COAX CENTER, WHT JACKET
7 PCW GND COAX SHIELD, WHT JACKET
8 ID1 R1-1
10 OUTER SHIELD
Shell OUTER SHIELD
Table 3-19 4D Connector (Optional)
Pin No Signal
4 GND
8 SIN_DRV
7 SIN_RTN
2 ACTIVE
5 COS_RTN
6 COS_DRV
3 HALL1
Table 3-20 Flock of Birds, Small Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)
Pin No Signal
1 EEC
2 EXC_RTN
3 Rx_Y
4 Rx_X
5 Rx_RTN
6 Rx_Z
7 EXC
8 EED
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-19
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-5 Other I/O Ports (Front of system) (cont’d)
Table 3-21 Flock of Birds, Large Connector (Optional, not shown in Figure 3-10)
Pin No Signal
1 TYRTNO
2 EECO_TX
3 EED_TX
4 PWM_EMI
5 TXRTN0
6 TZRTN0
7 VCC_
8 GND
Center TYRTNO
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-20 Section 3-6 - System Configuration
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
3-6-6 Video SpecificationVideo specifications may be needed to be able to connect laser cameras or other devices to the LOGIQ™ 9.
NOTE: 800x600 75hz is the only output available for external video connectors
Table 3-22 Video Specifications
Timing Parameter
CRT
1024x76875Hz
External Video Connection
CRT and LCD
800x60075Hz
LCD
1280x102460Hz
Horizontal Rate [kHz] 60.02 46.88 64.00
Horizontal Period [µs] 16.66 21.33 15.62
Pixel Clock [MHz] 78.75 49.50 108.00
H Blank Width [µs] 3.66 5.17 3.77
H Sync Width [µs] 1.22 1.62 1.03
H Front Porch [µs] 0.20 0.32 0.44
Active Horizontal Period [µs] 13.00 16.16 11.85
Vertical Rate [Hz] 75.03 75.00 60.00
Vertical Period [ms] 13.33 13.33 16.67
V Sync Width [lines=ms] 32=0.53 25=0.53 not available at printing
V Front Porch [lines=µs] 3=50.00 3=64.00 .016ms
Equalization Gate [lines=µs] 1=16.66 1=21.3 N/A
Lines: Field/Frame 800 625 1066
Active Lines/Frame 768 600 1024
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-21
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-7Available Probes
See Specifications in the LOGIQ™ 9 User Reference Manual for probes and intended use.
See Chapter 9 "Renewal Parts" on page 9-1, for part numbers to be used when ordering new or replacement probes.
Section 3-8Software/Option Configuration
Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System for information on configuring items like Hospital, Department, Language, Units (of measure), Date, Time and Date Format.
For information on configuring Software Options, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.
For information on configuring DICOM Connectivity, Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Basic User Manual, Chapter 16, Customizing Your System.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-22 Section 3-9 - Connectivity Setup Worksheet
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-9Connectivity Setup Worksheet
Site System Information
Services (Destination Devices)
TCP/IP Settings
Device Type Manufacturer Name IP Address Port AE Title123456789101112
Name - AE Title:
Dept:
LOGIQ SN: Type:
Floor:
Room:
REV:
Comments:
CONTACT INFORMATION
Name Title Phone E-Mail Address
Site:
IP Settings
IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Default Gateway:
Remote Archive Setup
Remote Archive IP:
Remote Archive Name:
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-23
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-10Before Starting a Software Upgrade
This information has been moved, see Section 8-6 "Before Starting a Software Load" on page 8-17
Section 3-11Loading Base Image Software
This information has been moved, see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, orSection 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38
Section 3-12Loading Application Software
This information has been moved, see Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49, orSection 8-13 "Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-56
Section 3-13System Setup
This section has been moved - See Section 8-15 on page 8-65
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-24 Section 3-14 - Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-14Connecting USB Line Printers - Black/White and Color
3-14-1 Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)1.) Attach the USB cable from the printer to the USB port on the back of the ultrasound system. The
New Hardware detected pop-up will be displayed briefly.2.) If you’re attaching an HP Deskjet 990Cxi or 970Cxi printer or HP Deskjet 6122, the system should
immediately recognize the newly attached printer and automatically install and configure the printer for you without any additional user intervention.
On Systems Running Software prior to R4.x.x follow the steps in 3-14-2 on page 3-24.
3-14-2 Printer Set Up (R2.x)
3-14-2-1 To Set Up Printer Before Installing Application SoftwareIf you must connect the printer in the following order: Base Image Software -> Printer -> Application software, complete the following steps:
1.) Install the Base Image Software.2.) Plug in the printer USB cable and the system will recognize the device. 3.) Load the Application Software. .
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 3 System Setup 3-25
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-15Paperwork
NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals...) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user information is available during operation and service of the complete system.
3-15-1 Product Locator InstallationUpon completion of the system set up, complete and mail the Product Locator Installation card.
NOTE: The Product Locator Installation card may vary from the Product Locator cards below.
3-15-2 User Manual(s)Check that the correct User Manual(s), for the system and software revision, is included with the installation. Specific language versions of the User Manual may also be available. Check with your GE Sales Representative for availability.
Figure 3-11 Product Locator Installation Card
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
3-26 Section 3-16 - Checks
1/18/10CHAPTER3.FM
Section 3-16Checks
Perform all functional checks.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-1
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
Chapter 4Functional Checks
Section 4-1Overview
4-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 4This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments. System operation is verified at the factory.
4-1-2 Required Equipment• An empty (blank) MO Disk (If system has a Magneto-Optical Drive) or blank CD-R or DVD-R.• At least one transducer. See “Probes” on page 1-70. for an overview.
(normally you should check all the transducers used on the system)
Table 4-1 Chapter 4 Contents
Section Description Page Number
4-1 Overview 4-1
4-2 General Procedure 4-2
4-3 Software Configuration Checks 4-23
4-4 Peripheral Checks 4-24
4-5 Mechanical Function Checks 4-25
NOTICE Most of the information pertaining to this Functional Checks chapter is found in the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide (see below).
Table 4-2 Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers
Application Software Version Direction Number
R2.X 2309820-100
R3.X 2384458-100
R4.X 5113779-100
R6.X 5140807-100
R7.X 5173872-100
R9.X 5338270-100 (User Guide)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-2 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-2General Procedure
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERSOperate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:1. Turn off the breaker.2. Unplug the system.3. Maintain control of the system power plug.4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Signed Date
TAG &
LOCKOUT
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-3
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-1 System Features
4-2-1-1 Control Panel
Figure 4-1 Control Panel Tour
1. Touch Panel and Controls 11. Depth
2. Touch Panel Brightness Control 12. Imaging Feature Keys
3. Video 13. Freeze and Print Keys
4. Audio On/Off and Volume 14. Probe Holder
5. TGC 15. Gel Holder
6. Reverse 16. On/Off Switch
7. Additional Feature Keys 17. 4D probe holder insert
8. Keyboard 18. USB Connector - for wired mic only
9. Mode/Gain Keys 19. Subwoofer Volume knob - retain settings set at factory
10. Imaging/Measurement Keys
2
14
4
8
3
15 1 5
147
10 9 12
13
11
6
1817
16
19
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-4 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-1-2 Touch Panel
NOTE: Different menus are displayed depending on which Touch Panel Menu is selected.
At the bottom of the Touch Panel, there are five combination rotary dials/push buttons. The functionality of these rotaries changes, depending upon the currently displayed menu. Press the button to switch between controls (as with Focus Position/Number), or rotate the dial to adjust the value.
Figure 4-2 Touch Panel Display Tour - BT06
Table 4-3 Touch Panel Display
1. Patient Enters Patient screen.
2. Scan Enters scanning mode screen.
3. Reports Activates default report and Touch Panel of report choices.
4. End Exam Activates Image Management and Touch Panel with end of exam options.
5. Utility Activates the configuration system.
6. Preset Selects the application to use.
7. Probe Indicator Indicates and selects the probes.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-5
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-1-3 Monitor Display
Figure 4-3 Monitor Display Tour
Table 4-4 Monitor Display Features
1. Institution/Hospital Name, Date, Time, Operator Identification.2. Patient Name, Patient Identification.3. Power Output Readout4. GE Symbol: Probe Orientation Marker.5. Image Preview.6. Gray/Color Bar.7. Cine Gauges8. Worksheet/Direct Report 9. Measurement Summary Window.10. Image.11. Measurement Calipers.12. Measurement Results Window + Direct Report13. Image Clipboard.14. Probe Identifier. Exam Preset.
15. Imaging Parameters by Mode.16. Focal Zone Indicator.17. TGC.18. Depth Scale.19. Body Pattern.20. Image Management Icons: Active Images, Delete, Previous/Next
Image and Menu.21. Current date and time, Caps Lock: (lit when on), network
connection indicator (PC=connected, PC with X=not connected), Human face (VoiceScan), iLinq, system messages display.
22. Trackball Functionality Status: Scroll, M&A (Measurement and Analysis), Position, Size, Scan Area Width and Tilt.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-6 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON.
NOTE: When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
NOTE: If the unit has been unplugged or main breaker in the OFF state for more than 3 to 5 days, the unit may not boot, or may beep when turned on.
NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
NOTE: On BEP3.X and BEP4.X, there is a blinking stand-by indicator. When the ON/OFF switch blinks between green and amber, the system is in STANDBY.
4-2-2-1 To Connect Mains Power to the ScannerConnecting the LOGIQ™ 9 scanner involves preliminary checks of the power cord, voltage level and compliance with electrical safety requirements.
1.) Ensure that the wall outlet is of appropriate type, and that the power switch is turned OFF.2.) Verify that the onsite mains voltage is within the limits indicated on the rating label near the Circuit
Breaker on the rear of the unit.3.) Verify the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the scanner is OFF.4.) Verify that the power cable is without any visible damage.5.) Connect the Power Cable to the back of the system.6.) Ensure the Cable Clip slips securely over the shoulders on the molded plug.
DANGER ALWAYS CONNECT THE UNIT TO A FIXED POWER SOCKET WHICH HAS THEPROTECTIVE GROUNDING CONNECTOR.
DANGER NEVER USE A THREE-TO-TWO PRONG ADAPTER; THIS DEFEATS THESAFETY GROUND.
DANGER ENSURE THAT THE POWER CORD AND PLUG ARE INTACT AND THAT THEPOWER PLUG IS THE PROPER HOSPITAL-GRADE TYPE (WHERE REQUIRED).
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERSOPERATE THIS UNIT ONLY WHEN ALL BOARD COVERS AND FRAME PANELS ARESECURELY IN PLACE. THE COVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR SAFE OPERATION, GOOD SYSTEMPERFORMANCE AND COOLING PURPOSES.
NOTICE Use only power supply cords, cables, and plugs provided by or designated by GE Healthcare.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-7
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up (cont’d)
7.) Connect the Power Cable to an appropriate mains power outlet, allowing sufficient slack so that the unit can be moved slightly.
8.) Switch ON the Circuit Breaker at the rear of the system.
When power is applied to the scanner and the rear Circuit Breaker is turned ON, power is distributed to the Cooling Unit, Control Panel, Monitor, Internal and External I/O Boards, Peripherals, the Back End Processor and the Front End Power Supply.
NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time.
4-2-2-2 To Boot Up Back End Processor
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once.The Back-End Processor starts and the software code is distributed to initiate the scanner. No status messages are displayed during this process.
Figure 4-4 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
NOTICE When AC power is applied to the scanner, the ON/OFF switch on the Control panel illuminates amber, indicating the system is in System Ready Mode.
Figure 4-5 ON/OFF switch for Back End Processor Boot Up
Cable ClipCircuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
ON / OFF Switch
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-8 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-3 Standby ModeUse Standby Mode to decrease the power off/on time while transporting system for a portable exam.
NOTE: DO NOT put the system in Standby Mode more than 20 times in a row. You should power off the system daily.
4-2-3-1 To Place System in Standby Mode
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.
The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.
3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power cable or switching off the breaker. The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:
- If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power On/Off button starts blinking on/off.- If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15
seconds.
NOTE: Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch will blink while the system is in Standby Mode. Because of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.
4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall. The system beeps.
NOTE: DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged, this will turn the system off.
5.) Transport the system as needed and plug it back in within 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.
NOTE: It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months.To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time.
See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
4-2-3-2 To Wake the System from Standby Mode
1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than.25 seconds. If you press the On/Off switch too long, the system will shutdown. It takes about 45 seconds for the system to become fully functional.
NOTE: If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of Standby Mode.
NOTE: Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-9
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
NOTE: After turning off a system, wait at least ten seconds before turning it on again. The system may not be able to boot if power is recycled too quickly.
4-2-4-1 To Power Off Back-End Processor
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.2.) Select Shutdown from the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.3.) Allow the system to close files and shutdown. Wait until the standby light turns amber.
Figure 4-6 System Exit Menu for Back End Processor Power Off
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-10 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-4-2 To Shut Down Scanner
.
1.) From the rear of the system, switch OFF the Circuit Breaker.2.) Slip the Cable Clip off the shoulders on the molded plug, then disconnect the Mains Power Cable
from the scanner.
Figure 4-7 Circuit Breaker and Power Cable on Back of Scanner
NOTICE Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable before switching OFF the Circuit Breaker will activate the uninterruptible power system (UPS) in the backend processor, forcing an ordered shutdown of the system.
NOTICE The UPS serves only as a battery backup that allows for a soft shut-down of the scanner to prevent file corruption. IT DOES NOT REGULATE INCOMING VOLTAGE.
WARNINGWARNING Disconnecting the Mains Power Cable is required before servicing or relocating the scanner.For USA only:Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the electrical Mains Power Cable plug.Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:1. Turn off the breaker.2. Unplug the system.3. Maintain control of the system power plug.4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Cable ClipCircuit Breaker
Mains Power Cable
Signed Date
TAG &
LOCKOUT
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-11
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-5-1 To Connect a Probe
1.) Place the probe's carrying case on a stable surface and open the case.2.) Carefully remove the probe and unwrap the probe cable.3.) DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free. Impact to the probe head could result in irreparable
damage.4.) Turn the connector locking handle counterclockwise.5.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place.6.) Turn the connector locking handle clockwise to secure the probe connector.7.) Carefully position the probe cable in the probe cord holder spot so it is free to move, but not
resting on the floor.
4-2-5-2 To Activate a ProbeSelect the appropriate probe from the probe indicators on the Touch Panel.
The probe activates in the currently-selected operating mode. The probe's default settings for the mode and selected exam are used automatically.
4-2-5-3 To Deactivate a ProbeWhen deactivating the probe, the probe is automatically placed in standby mode.
1.) Press the Freeze key.2.) Gently wipe the excess gel from the face of the probe. (Refer to the Basic User Manual for
complete probe cleaning instructions.)3.) Carefully slide the probe around the right side of the keyboard, toward the probe holder.
Ensure that the probe is placed gently in the probe holder.
4-2-5-4 To Disconnect a ProbeProbes can be disconnected at any time. However, the probe should not be selected as the active probe.
1.) Move the probe locking handle counterclockwise. Pull the probe and connector straight out of the probe port.
2.) Carefully slide the probe and connector away from the probe port and around the right side of the keyboard. Ensure the cable is free.
3.) Be sure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage box.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-12 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-6 Using CINE
4-2-6-1 To Activate CINE
1.) Press Freeze, then roll the Trackball to activate CINE. 2.) To start CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop. To stop CINE Loop playback, press Run/Stop.
4-2-6-2 To Omit Images
1.) Roll the Trackball to the frame you want to delete and press Omit Image.
4-2-6-3 To Restore Images
1.) To undo deleting an image from the CINE Loop, press Restore Image.
4-2-6-4 To Move Quickly to Start/End Frame
1.) Press First to move to the first CINE frame.2.) Press Last to move to the last CINE frame.
4-2-6-5 To Start Frame/End Frame
1.) Turn the Start Frame dial to the left to move to the beginning of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the right to move forward through the CINE Loop.
2.) Turn the End Frame dial to the right to move to the end of the CINE Loop. Turn the dial to the left to move backward through the CINE Loop.
4-2-6-6 To Adjust the CINE Loop Playback Speed
1.) Turn the Loop Speed dial right/left to increase/decrease the CINE Loop playback speed.
4-2-6-7 To Disconnect B-Mode CINE from Timeline CINE
1.) To review the B-Mode CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select B Only. 2.) To review the Timeline CINE Loop only, press Cine Mode Selection and select TL Only. 3.) To return to linked B-Mode and Timeline CINE Loop review, press Cine Mode Selection and
select B/TL.
4-2-6-8 To Move through a CINE Loop Frame By Frame
1.) Turn Frame by Frame to move through CINE memory one frame at a time.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-13
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-7 Image Management Quick Guide / User Guide For Image Management functionality, refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide. It talks about several topics:
• Clipboard • TCP/IP
• Printing Images • Services (Destinations)
• Browsing and Managing an Exam’s Stored Image • Buttons
• Connectivity, and Dataflow Concept and Creation • Views
• Starting an Exam • Verifying and Pinging a Device
• Configuring Connectivity
Table 4-5 Quick Guide / User Guide Direction Numbers
Application Software Version Direction Number
R2.X 2309820-100
R3.X 2384458-100
R4.X 5113779-100
R6.X 5140807-100
R7.X 5173872-100
R9.X 5338270-100 (User Guide)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-14 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode ChecksFor a basic functional check of the system’s different modes, the Quick Guide / User Guide will familiarize you with image optimization for B-Mode, M-Mode, Color Flow, and Doppler.
Figure 4-8
Table 4-6 B/M-Mode Functions
Control Description
Power Output (Acoustic Power) Optimizes image quality and allows user to reduce beam intensity. 10% increments between 0-100%. Values greater than 0.1 are displayed
Dynamic Range Controls how echo intensities are converted to shades of gray, thereby increasing the adjustable range of contrast.
Focus Number and PositionIncreases the number of transmit focal zones or moves the focal zone(s) so that you can tighten up the beam for a specific area. A graphic caret corresponding to the focal zone position(s) appears on the right edge of the image.
Rejection Selects a level below which echoes will not be amplified (an echo must have a certain minimum amplitude before it will be processed).
Edge Enhance Brings out subtle tissue differences and boundaries by enhancing the gray scale differences corresponding to the edges of structures. Adjustments to M Mode's edge enhancement affects the M Mode only.
Frame Average Temporal filter that averages frames together. This has the effect of presenting a smoother, softer image.
Colorize Enables gray scale image colorization. To deactivate, reselect a Gray Map.
Gray Map Determines how the echo intensity levels received are presented as shades of gray.
Rotation (Up/Down) Rotates the image by selecting the value from the pop up menu.
Frequency Multi Frequency mode lets you downshift to probe's next lower frequency or shift up to a higher frequency.
Frame Rate/Resolution Optimizes B Mode frame rate or spatial resolution for the best possible image.
B Flow Provides intuitive representation of non-quantitative hemodynamics in vascular structures.
Sensitivity/PRI Adjusts the sample rate for the flow signal.
Background On/Off Background On lets you view the anatomy roadmap; Background Off lets you view just flow information.
Sweep Speed Changes the speed at which the timeline is swept.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-15
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
Figure 4-9 CFM and PWD Functions
Table 4-7 CFM and PWD Functions
Baseline Adjusts the baseline to accommodate faster or slower blood flows to eliminate aliasing.
PRF/Wall FilterVelocity scale determines pulse repetition frequency. If the sample volume gate range exceeds single gate PRF capability, the system automatically switches to high PRF mode. Multiple gates appear, and HPRF is indicated on the display.
Angle Correct Estimates the flow velocity in a direction at an angle to the Doppler vector by computing the angle between the Doppler vector and the flow to be measured
Threshold Assigns the gray scale level at which color information stops.
Map Allows a specific color map to be selected. After a selection has been made, the color bar displays the resultant map.
Invert Allows blood flow to be viewed from a different perspective, i.e. red away (negative velocities) and blue toward (positive velocities). The real-time or frozen image can be inverted.
Packet Size Controls the number of samples gathered for a single color flow vector.
Quick Angle Correct Quickly adjusts the angle by 60 degrees
Doppler Display Formats
Display layout can be preset to have B-Mode and Time-motion side-by-side or over-under.In the side-by-side layout, there are three display alternatives defined: equal priority, time-motion priority or time-motion with B-Mode reference.In the over-under layout, there are three display alternatives defined: time-motion priority, B Mode priority or equal priority.
Sample Volume Gate Length Sizes the sample volume gate
Scan Area Slants the B-Mode or Color Flow linear image left or right to get more information without moving the probe
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-16 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
NOTE: The following instructions assume that you first scan the patient and then press Freeze.
4-2-10-1 To Measure Distance and Tissue Depth
1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper at the start point (distance) or the most
anterior point (tissue depth).3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) Move the Trackball to position the second active caliper at the end point (distance) or the most posterior point (tissue depth).
5.) Press Set to complete the measurement.The system displays the distance or tissue depth value in the measurement results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:
• To toggle between active calipers, press Measure.• To erase the second caliper and the current data measured and start the measurement again, press
Clear once.
NOTE: To rotate through and activate previously fixed calipers, turn Cursor Select.
NOTE: After you complete the measurement, to erase all data that has been measured to this point, but not data entered onto worksheets, press Clear.
4-2-10-2 To Measure Circumference/Area (Ellipse)
1.) Press Measure once to display an active caliper.2.) Move the Trackball to position the active caliper.3.) Press Set to fix the start point.
The system fixes the first caliper and displays a second active caliper.
4.) Move the Trackball to position the second caliper.5.) Turn the Ellipse control; an ellipse with an initial circle shape appears.
NOTE: Be careful not to press the Ellipse control as this activates the Body Pattern.
6.) Move the Trackball to position the ellipse and to size the measured axes (the calipers).7.) To increase the size, turn the Ellipse control in a clockwise direction. To decrease the size,
turn the Ellipse control in a counterclockwise direction.8.) To toggle between active calipers, press Measure. 9.) Press Set to complete the measurement.
The system displays the circumference and area in the measurement results window.
NOTE: Before you complete a measurement:
• To erase the ellipse and the current data measured, press Clear once. The original caliper is displayed to restart the measurement.
• To exit the measurement function without completing the measurement, press Clear again.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-17
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-10-3 WorksheetsMeasurement/Calculation worksheets are available to display and edit measurements and calculations. There are generic worksheets as well as Application specific worksheets. The worksheets are selected from the Measurement Touch Panel.
4-2-10-4 Report Pages Measurements/Calculations that are included on the worksheet can also be displayed on Report Pages. Report Pages can be customized to meet the appropriate needs of the user.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-18 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11 The MOD (Magnetic Optical Drive)
4-2-11-1 For BT03 and priorThe onboard 3.5 inch Magnetic Optical disk drive supports the following densities:
- Standard: 640MB; 540MB; 230MB; and 128MB- Overwrite: 1.3GB, 640MB; and 540MB
Figure 4-10 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT03 and prior
Magnetic Optical Drive (MOD) Eject Button
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-19
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11-2 For BT04 and laterThe LOGIQ™ 9 supports the portable, external Fujitsu DynaMO 1300 U2 Pocket Magnetic Optical (MO) drive to read old media and to use up unused MO disks.
NOTE: The MO drive is intended to be a temporary storage solution only and NOT for everyday use. For permanent storage, ALWAYS use the DVD drive that is shipped with your system.
To Connect the Portable MO Drive
1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. The MO drive is powered by the USB port; therefore, no power cord is needed.
2.) Set the MO drive inside the side Peripheral Storage Area, next to the image printer. Make sure the MO drive sits far enough inside the storage area, but close enough to reach while plugged into the USB port.
3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the back of the system.
Figure 4-11 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-20 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11-2 For BT04 and later (cont’d)Alternative Site for MO Drive. If you have a printer that takes up the entire storage area, there is an alternative site above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. To connect the portable MO drive to the LOGIQ 9 system:
1.) Connect the USB cable to the back of the MO drive. 2.) Set the MO drive above the Front Peripheral Storage Area, far enough away from the edge. 3.) Connect the USB cable to the USB port on the front of the system.
Figure 4-12 Magnetic Optical Drive - BT04 and later
CAUTION DO NOT connect the MO drive to the USB port adjacent to the top of the Control Panel.
If you intend to use the MO drive semi-permanently, attach the MO drive to the system using velcro, or other secure method (not supplied by GE).
DO NOT lock the Control Panel into place while the MO Drive is located above the Front Peripheral Storage Area. DO NOT load any CDs that accompany the MO device.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-21
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-11-3 Using the MOD
1.) Before installing an MO disk in the MOD, check the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MOD. Also, ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed).
2.) Insert the disk into the MOD with the label facing up.
3.) There are different methods to eject a disk from the MOD. In some cases disk ejection is automatic. Manual ejection methods are listed below in preferred order from best (1) to worst (4).
a.) When in Archive Menu, use the softkey choice –or– click Image Presets up, then click the left softkey switch up for ARCHIVE, then toggle the switch under EJECT MOD.
b.) Press the Eject switch on the MOD while system is ON.c.) Press and hold the Eject switch while the system is booting.d.) Mechanical ejection. Insert the end of a paper clip into the hole next to the Eject switch while
system power is OFF.
NOTICE Never move the unit with a disk in the MOD because the drive actuator will not be locked and the MOD could break.
NOTICE Avoid mechanical ejection whenever possible. Mechanical ejection leaves the actuator unlocked and the MOD susceptible to damage if moved. If forced to use this method, reboot the system, then insert and eject a known good disk using one of the other manual ejection methods.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-22 Section 4-2 - General Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-2-12 USB DrivesConnect only one USB drive (USB HDD/USB flash drive) to the system in total. DO NOT connect two or more devices at the same time.
NOTE: Do not create multiple partitions. Use USB Drive with single partition.
The USB Flash Drive is an ESD-sensitive device. GE only supports the NDL 256MByte 066E0690 USB Flash Drive.
4-2-13 Backup and Restore Database, Preset Configurations and ImagesThe Backup and Restore procedures vary based on the application software that is installed. For the appropriate Backup and Restore information, see the LOGIQ™ 9 Quick Guide / User Guide
CAUTION Before removing the USB Flash Drive from the USB port, press Eject (F3) and select USB Drive from the pull-down menu to disconnect the USB Flash Drive.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-23
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-3Software Configuration Checks
Table 4-8 Software Configuration Checks
Step Task to do Notes
1. Verify Date and Time is correct
2. Verify that Location (Hospital Name) is correct
3. Verify Language settings are correct
4. Verify assignment of Printer Keys
5. Verify all of the customer’s options are set up correctly
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-24 Section 4-4 - Peripheral Checks
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-4Peripheral Checks
Check that peripherals work as described below:
Table 4-9 Peripheral Checks
Step Task to do Notes
1. Press Freeze. Stops image acquisition.
2. Press (Print 1), (Print 2), (Print 3) or (Print 4) on the Control Panel
Prints image displayed on the screen on B&W or Color printer, depending on the key assignment configuration
3. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. Starts the video counter at a different point:
4. Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. Displays the Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window
5. Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the counter number in the counter field. Displays number
6. Press Set Counter to save the change. Saves number
7. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel Returns to the scanning mode
8. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.Starts RecordingDisplays a red dot in the VCR status area on the Title bar to indicate that recording has begun
9. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control panel.Stops recordingChanges the video status icon to (Pause)
10. Press video on the Control Panel and the assignable play
Plays back an examination
11. Use the Assignable keys on the Control PanelPerforms actions on the recorded session, such as stop, pause, rewind or fast forward.Updates the video status icon accordingly
12.While in playback mode, use the Trackball to adjust the video playback speed and scroll through the record.
Searches on the tape
13. Press the assignable PAUSE Stops the tape at the desired frame.
14. Press Freeze while playing back a recorded session.
Stores the last few seconds of a recorded sequence as a cineloop. Enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see 4-2-6 for further information on cineloop operation).
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-25
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
Section 4-5Mechanical Function Checks
4-5-1 Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor
Figure 4-13
Step Task Note(s)
1. Pull handle up under the platform towards you to release horizontal lock
Maneuvers the Display Platform horizontally at present level of height
2. Pull handle at left hand grip toward you to release the Vertical Lock
Maneuvers the Display Platform up and down (between the vertical end stops) as long as you pull
the handle toward you
3. Pull both handles toward you to release both Vertical and Horizontal locks
Maneuvers the Display Platform both horizontally and vertically as long as you keep pulling these handles
toward you
Table 4-10 Standard Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-26 Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-5-2 Operator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)
Figure 4-14 Operator Movement
Step Task Note(s)
1. Move Up/Down Use both hands, one at the top 17” LCD the 17” LCD and one at the bottom, to adjust the LCD up and down,
2. Tilt Forward/Back Use both hands, one at the top of the 17” LCD and one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.
3.Move Left/Right
Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 17” LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the
screen left and right.
Table 4-11 17” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
Hold here for Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for Step 3
Hold here for Step 3
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 4 Functional Checks 4-27
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-5-3 Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Figure 4-15 Operator Movement
Step Task Note(s)
1 Tilt Forward/Back Use both hands, one at the top of the 19” LCD and one at the bottom, to rotate the screen forward and back.
2.Move Left/Right
Use both hands, one at the lower left handle hold of the 19” LCD and one at the lower right handle hold, to adjust the screen left
and right.
Table 4-12 19” LCD Display Platform Maneuverability Checks
Hold here for Steps 1 and 2
Hold here for Step 3
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
4-28 Section 4-5 - Mechanical Function Checks
1/18/10CHAPTER4.FM
4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks ChecksCheck that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1.
4-5-5 Site LogUse the site log found on Section 10-9 "Site Log" on page 10-29 to record site visits.
Table 4-13 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions
Step Task Note(s)
1. Press on pedal no. 2
Engages the brakes in full lock
2. Press on pedal no.1
Releases the brake
3. Press on pedal no.1
Engages swivel lock.You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked
direction.
4. Press on pedal no. 2
Releases swivel lock
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-1
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Chapter 5Components and Functions (Theory)
Section 5-1Overview
5-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 5This chapter explains LOGIQ™ 9’s system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem function. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS) and probes.
Table 5-1 Contents in Chapter 5
Section Description Page Number
5-1 Overview 5-1
5-2 General Information 5-2
5-3 Front End Processor 5-7
5-4 Back End Processor (BEP 1) 5-22
5-5 Back End Processor (BEP 2) 5-27
5-6 Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) 5-34
5-7 Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) 5-39
5-8 BEP Power On Path 5-44
5-9 BEP Power Off Path 5-45
5-10 Operator Console Control PWA 5-46
5-11 Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9) 5-54
5-12 Internal I/O 5-55
5-13 Top Console 5-63
5-14 Monitor 5-64
5-15 External I/O 5-65
5-16 Peripherals 5-68
5-17 Modem and USB Modem 5-69
5-18 Power Distribution 5-71
5-19 Mechanical Descriptions 5-76
5-20 Air Flow Control 5-79
5-21 Service Platform 5-79
5-22 4D Option 5-91
5-23 Continuous Wave Doppler Option 5-96
5-24 PCI CW Doppler PWA card 5-97
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-2 Section 5-2 - General Information
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-2General Information
LOGIQ™ 9 is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and Phono. A Doppler probe may also be connected and used.
The system can be used for:
- B-Mode- M-Mode- Color Flow Mode (CFM)- Power Doppler Imaging (PDI) with topographic and directional maps- PW Doppler with high PRF- B-Flow Mode- M-Color Flow Mode, with B-Mode Gray Scale and Color Flow Imaging
LOGIQ™ 9 is a digital beamforming system. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on the hard drive and all necessary software is loaded from the hard drive on power up.
Figure 5-1 LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 - Major Components
Front Bumper
Backend Processor Chassis
CD-ROM3.5” MOD
B/W Printer
Operator Console
Gel Warmer
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
Monitor
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Front CoverVCR
Probe Connector
Swivel Lock
Brake Release
or DVD
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-3
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-2 General Information (cont’d)
Figure 5-2 LOGIQ™ 9 BT06 with LCD Option - Major Components
Front Bumper
Backend Processor
CD-ROM
B/W Printer
Operator Console
Gel Warmer
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
17”LCD Monitor
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot Knobs
Front CoverVCR
Probe Connector
Swivel Lock Brake Release
or DVD
Subwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)
Chassis
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-4 Section 5-2 - General Information
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-2 General Information (cont’d)
Figure 5-3 LOGIQ™ 9 with 19” LCD
Operator Console
Gel Warmer
Monitor Controls
Name Plate
19” LCD Monitor
Op. Panel Upper Bezel
Touchscreen/Display
TGC Slidepot KnobsSubwoofer Knob(Do not adjust)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-5
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-2-1 Block Diagram
Figure 5-4 LOGIQ™ 9 Simple Block Diagram
FRONT END PROCESSOR
PROBES
FRONTPLANE
FRONT END BACKPLANE DOPPLER
ATX POWER SUPPLY
UPS
AC POWER
OP I/O PANEL 17" Monitor
USER INTERFACE
SONY COLOR PRINTERUP-2900MD
PC2IOPCVIC
PC MOTHERBOARD
POWER ON/OFF (RESET*)
FLOCK
OF
BIRDS
(optional)
EthernetPC2IPSOUND
CARDPCI
VIDEO
AGP
VIDEO
XD
IF
RFA
MP
TD
3
TD
4
TD
5
TD
6
TD
7
TD
0
TD
1
TD
2
FE
PS
SC
B
EQ
4
BM
P
EXTERNAL I/O
MODEMAC CONTROLLER
XFMR BOX
TO MONITOR
TO PC
TO PERIPHERIALS
TO MODEM
TO CARD RACK
230Vac230Vac
115Vac
115 or 230Vac
230V
ac
115V
ac
BACK END PROCESSOR
ECG Patient Interface
3.5" MOD
CD-ROMHard Drive
SONY VCRSVO-9500MD
SONY B/W PRINTERUP-890MD
TO OUTLET
INTERNAL I/O
PCI CABLE
230Vac
Vid
eo O
utpu
ts
Net
wor
k C
onne
ctio
n
US
B C
onne
ctio
n
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-6 Section 5-2 - General Information
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-2-2 Dataflow Control Description
5-2-2-1 Data SetsEach scan mode will produce data to a corresponding data set in the Image Memory. The data sets are represented in ring-buffers. Each active data set will be allocated to one of the following types of acquisition data:
• 2-D tissue data• Doppler data• M-mode data• 2-D Color flow • Trace data• Video Y-component data• Video UV-component data• Color M-mode data• RF data
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-7
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-3Front End Processor
The Front End Processor generates the strong bursts transmitted by the probes as ultrasound into the body. It also receives weak ultrasound echoes from blood cells and body structure, amplifies these signals and converts them to a digital signal.
Figure 5-5 The Front End
XDIF TD
BoardSum
Rigel
Equalization
Barrel ShiftDigital Gain NCO FIR
TGC Gen
XDIFControl
CommutatorControl
TemperatureSensors
PowerSupplyMonitors
Scan BusInterface
B Mode Processor
SyntheticAperture
Axial InterpDetector
VectorCompound
SmoothingFilter
RateConverter
DynamicRange
EdgeEnhance
FocalZoneSplicer
B ModeM ModeOutput
M PeakHoldScan Bus
Interface
TDControl
Bus
40P040P1
TxSyncBPCLK
HVPwr SupControl
I,Q
Grey 2D, M
PCI Cable to BEP
Scan Control Board
ScanSequencer
TD ControlTxSyncRxSyncGenerator
SystemClockGenerator/Distributor
PCI-PCIBridge
Ring Buffer
I,QCapture
ProcessedCapture(B, M)
PCI Bus
Scan Bus
T/R SwitchProbePortMUX
A/D
Pulser
RFAmp
PreAmp TGC
VideoCapture
Top Plane
Front EndPower Supply
240VAC
+5 V
+3.3 V
+5 V analog
-5 V analog
PS ON
Internal I/O
+12 V
+120 V
I,Q
I2C Master
Scan Bus
PCI Bus
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-8 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-1 Front End Processor Power Supply Board (FEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1)The power supply assembly receives approximately 220VAC from the secondary side of the mains isolation transformer.
The FEPS assembly supplies DC regulated power to the Front End card rack of the LOGIQ™ 9. The assembly is configured as a PCB which fits into the right-most slot of the Front End card rack. It interfaces with the back plane to supply power to the Front End circuit boards.
A general enable signal (PS_ON) controls enabling and disabling all FEPS Low Voltage outputs. These include +5VA, -5VA, +5V, 3V3, +12V, and +15V (all except PHVP ‘High Voltage’). An Enable circuit on the FEPS detects when PS_ON becomes valid and holds all outputs off until then.
The high voltage lockout circuit monitors the +5VA, -5VA, +12VA and 3V3 supplies and locks out the PHVP supply in the event that any one of them go below 10% of their nominal value.
PWR_OK is an active high TTL compatible output which provides a status indication of the AC input power. It should be capable of sinking 5mA maximum. The signal switches to a TTL ‘High’ when the AC input voltage reaches the minimum specified input level at power up. Upon loss of input voltage, PWR_OK will go ‘Low’.
5-3-2 FEPS3.xThe FEPS3 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it provides the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) required by the TDs (5.x and TD6) and RFAMP2.
Table 5-2 FEPS, Output Comparison
System NameFEPS, FEPS2, FEPS2.1
Nominal OutputFEPS3.x
Nominal Output
5VPA +5.05V +6.0V
5VNA -5.05V -6.0V
5VP +5.05V +5.05V
3V3 3.33V 3.33V
PHVP +121.2V / +24.2 +121.2V / +24.24V
12VP 12.12 13.0V
15VP +15.15 +15.15
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-9
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3 Front End SubsystemThe LOGIQ™ 9 Front End Subsystem consists the XDIF (Transducer Interface) board, RF Amp board and eight TD (Transmit Delay) boards.
The Front End Subsystem provides 128 receive and 128 transmit channels as well as gain and bandpass filtering of the received signal.
5-3-3-1 XDIF (Transducer Interface) Board
The XDIF supports four 128 Channel probe ports with the ability to select one of the four probe ports. The XDIF supports a probe multiplexer requiring a 200V (+100V and -100V). The multiplexer in the probe will select 128 of the out of up to 192 channels.
The XDIF uses a T/R (Transmit/Receive) switch on each output to the RF Amplifier board. During transmit the T/R switch prevents the high voltage transmit pulser from damaging the receive preamplifier. During receive the T/R switch isolates the receive preamp from the transmit high voltage pulser.
5-3-3-2 Top PlaneConnects the receive signals from the XDIF board to the RF Amplifier board at the front of the circuit boards.
Figure 5-6 Basic Front End SubSystem
Figure 5-7 XDIF Board Functions
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-10 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3-3 RF Amp, RF Amp1.2, RF Amp2 Board(Radio Frequency Amplifier Board)
The RF Amplifier board shall contain 128 channels of the circuitry that is necessary to amplify the small electronic echo signals that are received from the probe transducers. Each channel shall consist of a low-noise, active input termination preamplifier, a time-gain compensation (TGC) amplifier, and a low noise differential drive amplifier (buffer). The RF Amp board shall physically reside in the Beamformer card cage adjacent to the XDIFF board.
The probe level analog input signals shall enter the RF Amp board on a series of board to board connectors that mate the RF Amplifier Board to the XDIFF Board. These connectors carry the transducer level receive signals that originate at the probe and make their way through the probe interface relays, and T/R switches. The digital interface, power supplies, and reference ground shall be provided to the RF Amp board by the system backplane.
Each amplified signal generated by the RF Amp board shall provide a differential output and drive filter circuitry located on the TD boards via the system backplane. The TD boards perform an anti-alias filtering operation and convert the transducer signals to a 12 bit data stream that feeds the digital beamforming electronics.
RF Amp2 BoardThe RF Amp2 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
Figure 5-8 RF Amp, RF Amp2 Functions
Figure 5-9 RF Amp Board Functional Block Diagram
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-11
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3-4 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8)
Major functions of the TD boards are:
- Transmitter- Analog Receive- A/D (Analog to Digital conversion)- Digital Receiver (Rigel Beamformer Chip)- Control & Timing
The TD (Time Delay) boards send 128 transmit signals to the XDIF board. The 128 receive channels from the RF board get low pas filtered, converted from analog to digital and then use the Rigel beamformer chip to generate complex digital data signals representing one or two beams of ultrasound echo information sent to the EQ board.
Figure 5-10 Basic TD Board Functions
Figure 5-11 Basic TD Input/Output Signals
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-12 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-3-4 TD, TD4, TD5.x, TD6 (Time Delay) Boards (8) (cont’d)
Major control signal from the EQ board are the Digital TGC/VREF and Serial Control Bus (I2C). Control signal between the Scan Control board consist of Power, Timing Clocks, TD Control Bus and Fault Interrupts
Time Delay (TD, TD4, TD5) Board Function Summary:
• Each board assigned to a subset of 16 channels.• Generates and amplifies the excitation waveform for each channel.• Digitizes the input RF signal from the RF Amplifier board.• Applies dynamic apodization, dynamic receive delays, and filters to the digitized RF signal.• Automatically adapts receive beams for speed or resolution depending on scans.• Sums detected echo channel to channel, then board to board. (Boards must be contiguous.) The
last TD forwards the total output to the EQ.• Monitors current consumed for transmit and issues a fault signal if overcurrent is detected.
TD5 and TD5.1 (Time Delay 5)The TD5 Board was introduced with R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
TD5.1 has same functionality as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s
TD6 and (Time Delay 6)The TD6 Board was introduced with R6.0.0 Software and BT06. It is not backward compatible with prior hardware as it requires the new voltages (+/- 6V and 13V) provided by the FEPS3 Board.
TD6 has same functionality as TD5.
Figure 5-12 Basic TD Input/Output Control Signals
NOTICEd
DO NOT MIX TD6 boards with TD5.x boards.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-13
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-4 Scan Control Board (SCB, SCB2)The Scan Control Board combines onto one board the basic functionality of Image Port (IP), Front End Control and Timing (FECT), Scan Sequencer (SS2) and the Scan Trigger (System Timing).
Figure 5-13 SCB Simplified Block Diagram
FEC INT:TD_HVFAULT*
HVINT*I2CINT*
PRBINT*CWINT*
(From IP2 Block)SCAN TIGGERS(2:0)
EQ_BE_RxSyncPA_SCB_ACFAIL(1:0)
QRS*
LOC_SCAN_BUS(17:0)
System ClocksMFG Test ClocksSCB_EQ_RxSync
VIDEO_DAT(4:0)
From BMP (EBM)BM_SCB_DAT(9:0)
From MEQ (EBM)IQ_SCB_DAT(31:0)
FE_SYTM_BUS(59:0) FECB_CLK(10:0)
LOC_CLK IP_CLK
IP_CLK
EQ_BE_RxSync
LOC_SCAN_BUS(13:0)
LOC
_SLV
_PC
I_B
US
(60:
0)
To MEQ & BMP (EBM)GLOB_SEC_PCI(61:0)
IP_CLKPCI 33MHz
VID_CLK
VP_DAT(7:0)
SCAN SEQUENCER BLOCK
Scan Sequencerand
Peripherals
Scan BusI/FVP_ADR(4:0)
VP_STB
SCAN I/F LE
To MEQ, BMP (EBM)SYS_SCAN_BUS(13:0)
SYSTEM TIMING BLOCK
FECT BLOCK
Front End ControlBoard Block
SystemTimingControl
ClockGeneration
To TD BoardsFEC_TD_BUS(80:0)
LOC_CLK
DSP PCI & CTRLPCI Slave
andDecode
PCI Interface
IMAGE PORT 2 BLOCK
ImageMemory
IPCONTROL
IP_CLK
IP_CLK
IP_CLK
Videoand
PipelinkInput
IP C
TR
L
Loca
l PC
I Bus
Cable From PCPRIM_PCI(52:0)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-14 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-4-1 SCB, SCB2 High Level Features• Generates and buffers system clocks:
- 40 MHz (40P0 and 40P1)- 10 Mhz (BPCLK)- TXSync- RxSync
• Configures the beamformer to fire B/M-Mode, Color, or PW Doppler vectors.• Controls scan sequencing in real-time; setting the vector firing order and timing intervals.• PCI interface to Back End Processor (BEP), BMP, and EQ or EBM/EBM2.• Buffers B/M data from BMP/EBM/EBM2, data from the EQ/EBM/EBM2 (for Color and PW Doppler),
and video data from the VCR to transmit to the BEP for software processing and display.• Interface between Host PCI and TD boards.
5-3-4-2 CompatibilityOnly SCB2 Boards should be used with R3.0.0 software and greater
5-3-4-3 Scan Control Board LEDs
Table 5-3 SCB LED Indications
Function Monitored
LED Number LED Color LED Function
I960 Processor DS1 Red i960 Fail
DS2 Yellow i960 Local Bus Activity
Image Port DS3 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS4 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS5 Yellow IP Master Enable
DS6 Yellow IP Master Ready
Pipelink DS7 Red IQ Left FIFO Error
DS8 Red IQ Right FIFO Error
DS9 Red BM FIFO Error
DS10 FIFO’s Empty
Scan Sequence DS11 Red Crash
DS12 Yellow FIFO Error
DS13 Yellow Command Pulse
DS14 Yellow Unused
DS15 Yellow Pause
DS16 Green Unused
DS17 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence
DS18 Green Happy Light - Toggles during Scan Sequence
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-15
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-4-3 Scan Control Board LEDs (cont’d)
Table 5-4 SCB2 2365739 LED Indications
LED Number LED Color LED Function
DS1 Green FPGA Programming Done (Passed)
DS2 Red i960 Fail
DS5 Green Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS6 Red Toggles during Image Port Frames
DS7 Red Crash
DS8 Yellow FIFO Error
DS9 Yellow Command Pause
DS10 Yellow Unused
DS11 Yellow Pause
DS12 Green Unused
DS13 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)
DS14 Green Happy Light (toggles during Scan Sequence)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-16 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-5 Equalization (EQ) Board (component of EBM Board)
5-3-5-1 General DescriptionThe EQ dynamically gains and filters the received signal output from the final beamformer sum. TGC control calculates range dependent analog and digital gains. The digital gain is applied to the I/Q signal. The gained signal is then rotated in frequency to place the frequency of interest in the passband of the subsequent FIR lowpass filter. The rotator center frequency may also be range dependent. These controls, and the selection of the FIR coefficients may also be processing bank, vector number, or transmit focal zone dependent.
Figure 5-14 EQ Board Block Diagram
ScanControl
Bus
SCANControl
I/F
LocalBoard
Control
TemperatureMonitoring
Circuits
VoltageMonitoring
Circuits
IICSPROM
IICA/D
Converters
LocalBoardControl
LocalBoardControl
XDIF/Probe BusTo: XDIF & Relay
Comm Control BusTo: XDIF
LocalBoardControl
XDIFand
Probe I/F
Commutator
Control I/F
LocalBoardControl
CLK-10MHZ
CLK-10MHZ
AnalogDelay
BaseTGC
DynamicApodization
AnalogTGC
DigitalTGC
TGC BusTo: TDs
V-RefGen
MUX
BARRELSHIFTER
GainMod’s
5
GainMod’s
5LUTDelay
Td: I-dat
21
I (L,R)
5
Td: Q-dat
21
Q (L,R)
16
17
17
16
I (L,R) I (L,R)
16
Q (L,R)
16
Q (L,R)
16
I (L,R)
16
Q (L,R)
16
I (L,R)
16
Q (L,R)
16
I (L,R)
16
Q (L,R)
16
I (L,R)
Q (L,R)MULTIPLIER NCOM
NCOFPGA
FIR
FIR
CoefRAM
CoefRAM
�Data Pipe BusTo: BMP/SCB
BARRELSHIFTAND
OUTPUTFPGA
EQ Board Block Diagram
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-17
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-5-2 Basic Functions• Compensates for the attenuation of the transmitted signal in tissue by depth: performs TGC based
on focal zone.• Compensates for frequency shift (TFC) in tissue, needed in B-Mode and M-Mode.• Filters out harmonics and optimizes signal to noise ratio.• Delivers amplified and corrected I & Q data to the BMP and the Scan Control Board.• Interfaces probe detection and probe ID signals between the XDIF and the host.• Controls transducer commutator (multiplexer) for muxed probes with more elements than channels
in the beamformer.• Monitors active probe temperature.• Masters the front end (FE) I2C busses for voltage and temperature monitoring.• Turns off PHVP on the card rack power supply if a TD board pulls too much power or malfunctions.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-18 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-6 B/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board
5-3-6-1 General DescriptionThe B/M-mode Processor (BMP) subsystem takes the digital complex data from the EQ subsystem and converts it to either B-mode (2D) or M-mode (timeline) data.
• Processes I & Q data for B-Mode and M-Mode imaging.• Calculates echo signal’s amplitude.• Converts sample rate to display rate.• Implements dynamic range and edge enhancement.• Splices multiple focal zones into one image.• Sends processed B/M data to the Scan Control Board.
Figure 5-15 BMP Internal Functions
Figure 5-16 BMP Control Inputs/Outputs
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-19
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 BoardThe EBM Board was used on forward production units starting with BT’02 (November 2002). The EBM2 Board was used on forward production units starting with R3.0.0 Software (BT’03 October 2003). The detailed functionality is found in the previous EQ and BMP sections.
5-3-7-1 OverviewThe EBM/EBM2 board is the data path interface board between the last Time Delay board (TD) and the Scan Control Board (SCB). The EBM/EBM2 receives data from the Time Delay boards, processes the data for depth attenuation effects, and passes the data on to the B/M processor, then to the Scan Control Board. This board is composed of two main sections the Equalization (EQ) and the B/M Mode Processor (BMP).
The EQ section compensates for the attenuation of ultrasound in tissue. The attenuation of ultrasound in tissue is usually modeled as being linearly dependent on frequency and depth. The EQ section provides two major data processing functions to compensate for this phenomenon, Time Gain Control (TGC), and Time Frequency Control (TFC). Using TGC and TFC, the EQ ”equalizes” image signals by removing depth dependent attenuation effects from the signal, hence the name ”equalization” board. In layman terms, the EQ gives a point deeper in the body an equal opportunity to contribute to the ultrasound image as one closer to the body’s surface.
The BMP section process IQ Vectors from the EQ to create B and M mode vectors. This design is composed of 12 major blocks; Synthetic Aperture, Axial Interpolator, Detector/Vector Compounder, Smoothing Filter, Rate Converter, Dynamic Range Compression, Edge enhance, Splicer, B–Mode Output, M–Mode Output, Vector Configuration and the PCI Interface.
5-3-7-2 Modes of OperationThe EBM/EBM2 equalization design section supports two input data buses from the final summer of the TD board set. The two buses are referred to as the I and Q data buses (or pipes). Each two’s complement bus is 24 bits wide and passes data from the final TD board to the EBM/EBM2 board. Different system modes of operation cause the two data pipes to handle data in different ways. The EBM/EBM2 board transfers output data to the Scan Control Board over two, two’s complement sixteen bit I and Q buses. Internal EBM/EBM2 board data pipes are sixteen bit two’s complement format.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-20 Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)
5-3-7-3 EBM/EBM2 Interface with XDIF relay boardThe EBM/EBM2 EQ section supports an eight-bit read/write data interface to the XDIF relay board. The interface is used to transfer commutator control information to the selected probe and provides host access to the XDIF relay board itself. The EBM/EBM2 board monitors four probes present and four probe hook lines from the XDIF relay board. The EBM/EBM2 EQ section monitors the lines, and generates an interrupt signal when any of the signals change state. The interrupt signal will be debounced to limit the frequency with which probe interrupts may be generated. The EBM/EBM2 board also measures the temperature of the selected probe over two lines from the XDIF relay board. The SCE pulse signal connected to the EBM/EBM2 EQ section in order to be able to support the Global Beamforming future development.
Figure 5-17 EBM/EBM2 Board Block Diagram
Power Supply HV Control
Probe Temperature
Sensor
High SpeedSSRAM ~ 9Mbit
Fan Control /Power SupplyMeasurement
Configuration Flash
(Host Programmed)
BarrelShifter
Delay
Multiplier
NCOLUT
17
I(L,R)
17
Q(L,R)
16Q(L,R)
ComplexMult
32-tapFIR
32-tapFIR
16
I(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
BarrelShift &Output Block
16
I(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
CoefRAM
CoefRAM
24
I(L,R)TD: I-Data
24
Q(L,R)TD: Q-Data
CLK-10MHzCLK-40MHz
16
5
Analog Delay
BaseTGC Analog
TGC V-refGEN
DynamicApodization
Digital TGC
MUX
SCANCtrlI/F
PCII/F
I2CI/F
XDIF/Probe
I/F
16
Q(L,R)
16
I(L,R)
TGC / Vref Bus
CommutatorCtrlI/F
Gain Mod’s
5
PSCtrlI/F
TestVector
Generator
SyntheticAperture
AxialInterpolation
LowPassFilter
Detector &Vector
Compound
16
16
16
16
16
16
15
RateConverter15
VectorConfiguration
DynamicRange
Compress
EdgeEnhance Splicer8 8
B-ModeOutput
M-ModeOutput
8
8
15
8
8
B/M ModeOutput
Test VectorCapture
10 MSB
PCII/F
Local SCAN Bus
FIFO8Kx18
FIFO8Kx18
FIFO8Kx18
SRAM64Kx16
PCI BUS
SCAN CONTROL BUS
I2C BUS
CLK-20MHz
CLK-20MHz
IQ (Q) Data
(I) Data
XDIF Interface BuXDIF Probe Interf
Power Supply Con
RXSYNCTXSYNC
TXSYNC
RXSYNC Delayed
RXSYNC Delay
HV Line
16I(L,R)
5TFC
Power Supply HV Control
Power Supply HV Control
Probe Temperature
Sensor
Probe Temperature
Sensor
High SpeedSSRAM ~ 9Mbit
High SpeedSSRAM ~ 9Mbit
Fan Control /Power SupplyMeasurement
Fan Control /Power SupplyMeasurement
Configuration Flash
(Host Programmed)
Configuration Flash
(Host Programmed)
BarrelShifter
Delay
BarrelShifter
Delay
MultiplierMultiplier
NCONCOLUT
17
I(L,R)
17
Q(L,R)
17
I(L,R)
17
I(L,R)
17
Q(L,R)
17
Q(L,R)
16Q(L,R)
16Q(L,R)
ComplexMult
ComplexMult
32-tapFIR
32-tapFIR
32-tapFIR
32-tapFIR
16
I(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
BarrelShift &Output Block
BarrelShift &Output Block
16
I(L,R)
16
I(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
16
Q(L,R)
CoefRAMCoefRAM
CoefRAMCoefRAM
24
I(L,R)TD: I-Data
24
Q(L,R)TD: Q-Data
CLK-10MHzCLK-40MHz
16
5
Analog Delay
Analog Delay
BaseTGCBaseTGC Analog
TGCAnalog TGC V-ref
GENV-refGEN
DynamicApodization
DynamicApodization
Digital TGC
Digital TGC
MUXMUX
SCANCtrlI/F
SCANCtrlI/F
PCII/FPCII/F
I2CI/FI2CI/F
XDIF/Probe
I/F
XDIF/Probe
I/F
16
Q(L,R)
16
I(L,R)
TGC / Vref Bus
CommutatorCtrlI/F
CommutatorCtrlI/F
Gain Mod’s
5
PSCtrlI/F
PSCtrlI/F
TestVector
Generator
TestVector
Generator
SyntheticApertureSyntheticAperture
AxialInterpolation
AxialInterpolation
LowPassFilter
LowPassFilter
Detector &Vector
Compound
Detector &Vector
Compound
16
16
1616
1616
16
16
1616
1616
16
16
1616
1616
1515
RateConverter
RateConverter1515
VectorConfiguration
VectorConfiguration
DynamicRange
Compress
DynamicRange
Compress
EdgeEnhance
EdgeEnhance SplicerSplicer88 88
B-ModeOutputB-ModeOutput
M-ModeOutput
M-ModeOutput
88
88
1515
88
88
B/M ModeOutput
Test VectorCapture
B/M ModeOutput
Test VectorCapture
10 MSB
PCII/FPCII/F
Local SCAN Bus
FIFO8Kx18FIFO8Kx18
FIFO8Kx18FIFO8Kx18
FIFO8Kx18FIFO8Kx18
SRAM64Kx16SRAM
64Kx16
PCI BUS
SCAN CONTROL BUS
I2C BUS
CLK-20MHz
CLK-20MHz
IQ (Q) Data
(I) Data
XDIF Interface BuXDIF Probe Interf
Power Supply Con
RXSYNCTXSYNC
TXSYNC
RXSYNC Delayed
RXSYNC Delay
HV Line
16I(L,R)
16I(L,R)
5TFC
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-21
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-3-7 EBM, EBM2 Board (cont’d)
5-3-7-4 B–Mode Output BlocksThe B–mode output block collect vector data and tags for delivery to the Scan Control Board. It can form output vectors from one or multiple input vectors (multi–transmit focus). The vector tags are used to form the control bytes in the output vector. Only complete vectors are sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block. The maximum vector length shall be 512 pixels.
5-3-7-5 M–Mode Output BlockM–mode acquisition is nearly always a multiple firings per output vector operation. When the vector rate is higher than the display rate a peak accumulate function shall be used to provide an output which is the point–by–point peak signal amplitude of all the firings since the last output. The M–mode output block usually outputs one processed M vector after combining the receive vectors from several firings. The maximum ratio of input vectors to output vectors is 256, although this number is transparent to the hardware. M_GATE tag shall control when the current peak accumulation stops, the vector is sent and a new vector is formed. The peak accumulation shall be reset after the data is sent to the BM_OUTPUT Block.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-22 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-4Back End Processor (BEP 1)
The Back End Processor (BEP 1) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Figure 5-18 CPU/Back End Processor BEP1
SOUND CARD
SLOT 5
DIGITAL OUTSPEAKER OUT
MIC INLINE OUT
LINE IN
PCI VIDEO
SLOT 3
AGP VIDEO
SLOT 2
SLOT 7
10/100bT
PARALLEL
COM1
COM2 (EXT)
USB1
USB2
PC MOTHERBOARD
PCIO MODULEATX POWER SUPPLY
UPS
HARD DRIVE
ECG
MOD
CD RW
IDE #2
JWR1
SLOT 4
PC2IPRS232 #3RS232 #4
I2C
PC2IP
SLOT 6
AC POWER
RS422
RGB OUT
JFP1
SVGA OUT 1
SVGA OUT 2
S/C VIDEO OUT
SVGA IN
POWER
PCI BIRD CARD
Front Panel
ETHERNET
PCIO Board
PCVIC Board
HD LED
IDE #1
UPS Battery
Optional 3D�system
SLOT 1
Control
MIDDLE DRIVE BAY
BOTTOM DRIVE BAY
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
TOP DRIVE BAY
CPU #1
CPU #2
256
MB
DIM
M
256
MB
DIM
MD
IMM
Slo
t #1
DIM
M S
lot #
2
DIM
M S
lot #
3
DIM
M S
lot #
4
JWOL1
AGP Slot
PCI Slot #1
PCI Slot #2
PCI Slot #3
PCI Slot #4
PCI Slot #5
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-23
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and two 733MHz processors
5-4-2 PCI CardsFive (5) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel2.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers3.) Blank or PCI Bird 3D Card - Option4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card
5-4-3 AGP Video Card - SVGA Video to the PCVIC Card• Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.• Resolution shall be 800x600.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
5-4-4 PCIO BoardThis GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
- Power and Internal PCI control signals
5-4-5 PCI Video Card- Input from AGP Video card- SVGA output to the image monitor- RGB output to color printer
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-24 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-6 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as:
- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position- System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.
5-4-7 Internal Storage Devices:• A 20 or 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).• CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).
5-4-8 Location of the Back End Processor
Figure 5-19 Backend Processor 1 mounted in scanner
P3 Backend Processor
Front of Scanner
Rear Side of Scanner
P4 Backend Processors typically have a fan in the center of the coverLeft Side of scanner
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-25
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-9 Inputs (BEP 1)
5-4-9-1 AC Power
5-4-9-2 DC Voltages
5-4-9-3 Input Signals
5-4-9-4 Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-5 AC Power
Input Description Connection from:
230 VAC AC Power AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Table 5-6 DC Input Voltages
Input Description Connected to:
+5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Table 5-7 Input Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.
Top Console > IIO > PC2IOON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register Interrupt Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Microphone in to BEP Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP
Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler AudioReplay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP
Table 5-8 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
UPS Control RS232 Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO
RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
I2C Bus Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. PC2IO > IIO > EIO
Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2 Modem PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-26 Section 5-4 - Back End Processor (BEP 1)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-4-10 Outputs
Table 5-9 Output Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
+5VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO
+12VDC DC Voltage PC2IO > IIO
PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack
Standby TBD PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo SVideo Out PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console) BEP > Top Console
BW Video RGB BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out Audio Out from BEPBEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-27
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-5Back End Processor (BEP 2)
The Back End Processor (BEP 2) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Figure 5-20 CPU/Back End Processor BEP2
Frame Grabber
RGB OUT
SVGA OUT
1
SVGA OUT
2
S/C VIDEO
OUT
DVI IN
POWER
DGIO Board
DGVIC Board
Control
512 M
B D
IMM
512 M
B D
IMM
Channel A
DIM
M S
lot
#0
Channel B
DIM
M S
lot
#0
Channel A
DIM
M S
lot
#1
Channel B
DIM
M S
lot
#1
10/100bT
PARALLEL
COM1
USB1/2
PC
MOTHERBOARD
AT
X P
OW
ER
SU
PP
LY
UP
S
HARD DRIVE
ECG
MOD
DVD RW
IDE
#2
PO
WE
R
AC
PO
WE
R
Front Panel
Header
Front
PanelHD Led
SA
TA
0
MIDDLE DRIVE
BAY
BOTTOM DRIVE
BAY
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
TOP DRIVE BAY
CHASSIE FAN
CPU
AGP Slot
RS232 #3
RS232 #4
I2C
PC2IPIIB
RS422
USB3/4
USB3/4
Motherboard
SVGA
PCI Slot #2
PCI Slot #1
PCI Slot #5
FAN quick disconnect
Chassis
Rear Fan
FP
US
B 1
CP
U F
an
SCSI Card
PCI Slot #3
PCI Slot #4
PCI Slot #6
AGP card with DVI Output
FP
US
B2
USB5/6
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-28 Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and one 2GHz processor.
5-5-2 PCI CardsSix (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) Sound Card - Sound Blaster Live for audio to speakers2.) Blank or FOB3.) PCI Video Card - Digital Video to the Touch Panel4.) USB Control5.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor6.) Blank or CW option
5-5-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC• Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.• Resolution shall be 800x600.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).
5-5-4 PCIO Board:This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
- Power and Internal PCI control signals
5-5-5 PCVIC Card- Input from Motherboard AGP Video (BEP 2.0)
This GE designed board does not plug into any slot but is mounted to the inside of the PC chassis.
- SVGA output to the image monitor- RGB output to color printer
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-29
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-6 DGVIC, DGIO and ADD Cards BEP 2.1 (BT’02, November 2002)The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the DGVIC board.
The DGVIC converts the digital video to RGBS, SVGA (to Monitor and External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs.
The DGIO provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.
5-5-7 Additional Memory (RAM) (BT’03, October 2003) - BEP2.2Additional memory was added to the motherboard for R3.0.0 Software and BT’03. One of the 256 MByte SIMM modules was replaced with a 512 MByte module. This brings the total RAM memory to 768MBytes and designated the unit to be a BEP2.2.
5-5-8 DGVIC/DGIO Upgrade It is possible that older P3 Back End Processor video chains could be upgraded to digital. This involves replacing the Analog AGP Video card with a Matrox video card that has analog and video outputs.
The PC2IO/PCVIC Tray assembly is also replaced with the DGIO/DGVIC Tray.
Digital video is supplied by the Matrox video card to the DGVIC for distribution to peripherals. Monitor video is taken directly from the Analog output of the Matrox video card instead of the DGVIC.
5-5-9 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as:
- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position- System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year.
5-5-10 Internal Storage Devices• A 40 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• 3.5 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (available from front of scanner).• CD-RW Drive (available from front of scanner).
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-30 Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-11 Location of the Back End Processor
Figure 5-21 Backend Processor 2 mounted in scanner
BEP 2
Front of Scanner
Rear Side of Scanner
Left Side of scanner
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-31
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-12 Inputs
5-5-12-1 AC Power
5-5-12-2 DC Voltages
5-5-12-3 Input Signals
Table 5-10 AC Power
Input Description Connection from:
230 VAC AC Power AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Table 5-11 DC Input Voltages
Input Description Connected to:
+5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Table 5-12 Input Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.
Top Console > IIO > PC2IOON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register Interrupt Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Microphone in to BEP Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console) Top Console > IIO > BEP
Audio in to BEP Audio from VCR or Doppler AudioReplay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-32 Section 5-5 - Back End Processor (BEP 2)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-12-4 Bi-directional Signals
NOTE: BEP2.x processors have one Com Port and six USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the modem via the Internal I/O. A USB to Serial Converter feeds the external serial connection via the Internal I/O. BEP 2.1 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC Tray. BEP 2.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.
5-5-12-5 USB to Serial Adapter Cable Setup (RS232 Serial Port Connector on the External I/O)
The Prolific USB to RS232 Adapter Cable (black one) should be properly set up when the Base Image Load is applied to the system. However, if you need to set a specific parameter for the USB COM Port (COM1) perform the following steps:
- After booting up with the Service Key (Dongle), entering Maintenance Mode and Windows, select My Computer>Properties>Hardware Tab>Device manager.
- Under Ports (COM & LPT) select “Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm/Port (COM 3)” and select Properties.
- Under the Port Settings TAB you can set the Bits per second, Data bits, Parity Stop Bits and Flow Control to the desired values.
Table 5-13 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
UPS Control RS232 Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO
RS232 XDCTRL Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
I2C Bus Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. PC2IO > IIO > EIO
Spare RS232 Not Used PC2IO > IIO > Not Used
VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2 Modem PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
Table 5-14 Factory Default Values
Signal Name Setting
Bits Per Second 9600
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-33
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-5-13 Outputs
Table 5-15 Output Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
+5VDC DC Voltage DG2IO > IIO
+12VDC DC Voltage DG2IO > IIO
PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) DG2IO > IIO > Card Rack
Standby TBD DG2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo SVideo Out DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIO
VGA
VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen(Top Console)
BT06 17” LCD (with Matrox VID card)
BEP > Top Console
(2 connectors: LCD and PCI DGVIC)
BW Video RGB BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
DGVIC > DG2IO > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out Audio Out from BEPBEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
TRIG Video Trig Signal PC2IO > IIO > EIO
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-34 Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-6Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
The Back End Processor (BEP 3.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Figure 5-22 CPU/Back End Processor BEP3.x
On BEP 3.x with LCD units only:
This card is replaced with the Matrox Dual Output video card
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-35
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of RAM and a 3.2 GHz processor.
5-6-2 PCI CardsSix (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) USB 2.0 Hub Card2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card3.) PCI Video Card4.) PCI DGVIC Card5.) PC2IP Card6.) Blank or CW Card
5-6-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card• Analog output shall comply with the SVGA specification.• Resolution shall be 800x600.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).• AGP Video Card (CRT only)• Matrox Dual Output Video Card replaces standard AGP Video card (LCD only).
5-6-4 PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards The ADD Card is a PCI card that mimics the AGP video and provides a digital video output to the PCI DGVIC board.
The PCI DGVIC converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.
5-6-5 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition is defined as:
- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position- System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six (6) months.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-36 Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-6 Internal Storage Devices:• A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).
5-6-7 Location of the Back End Processor
Figure 5-23 Backend Processor mounted in scanner
BEP 3 / 3.5
Front of Scanner
Rear of Scanner
Left Side of Scanner
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-37
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-8 Inputs (BEP 3.x)
5-6-8-1 AC Power
5-6-8-2 DC Voltages
5-6-8-3 Input Signals
5-6-8-4 Bi-directional Signals
NOTE: BEP3 processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the Internal I/O. BEP 3 Processors have digital video coming from a Matrox or ADD card going to the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI DGVIC Tray. BEP 3 processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.
Table 5-16 AC Power
Input Description Connection from:
230 VAC AC Power AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Table 5-17 DC Input Voltages
Input Description Connected to:
+5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Table 5-18 Input Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O.
Top Console > IIO > PC2IOON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register Interrupt Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Table 5-19 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
UPS Control RS232 Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO
I2C Bus Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2 Modem PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-38 Section 5-6 - Back End Processor (BEP 3.x)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-6-9 Outputs
Table 5-20 Output Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
+5VDC DC Voltage Bulkhead > IIO
+12VDC DC Voltage Bulkhead > IIO
PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card Rack
Standby TBD PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top Console
SVideo SVideo Out PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console) BEP > Top Console
BW Video RGB BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out Audio Out from BEPBEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
TRIG Video Trig Signal PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-39
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-7Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
The Back End Processor (BEP 4.x) receives the data from the Front End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor.
Back End Processor software is also providing Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Processing.
NOTE: Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP) will be minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances.
Figure 5-24 CPU/Back End Processor BEP4.x
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-40 Section 5-7 - Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-1 EnclosureThe EMC enclosure shall house an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 1 GB of RAM and a 3.4 GHz processor.
5-7-2 PCI CardsSix (6) PCI slots on the mother board shall contain the following:
1.) PCI Video Card2.) Blank or PCI Bird Card3.) USB Cable4.) PCI DGVIC2 Card5.) PC2IP3 Card6.) Blank or CW Card
5-7-3 AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card• Digital output shall comply with the DVI specification.• Resolution shall reflect the installed monitor specifications.• Support for 32 bit True Color• Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes.• 128-bit internal memory interface.• Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec).• Full Direct 3D and Open-GI support (desirable).• PCI Express Video Card
5-7-4 PCI DGVIC2 and ADD2 Cards The ADD2 Card is a PCIe card that mimics the SVGA video and provides a digital video output to the PCI DGVIC2 board.
The PCI DGVIC2 converts the digital video to SVGA (to External I/O), S-video and Composite video outputs. It also provides signals and power to I/O boards. Signals like PS_ON, I2C, RS232, PC Power and PC On/Off.
5-7-5 UPS Battery OperationThe UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off condition. The Off condition is defined as:
- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position- System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
The expected life of the battery is approximately one (1) year. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six (6) months.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-41
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-6 Internal Storage Devices:• A 80 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet.• DVD Drive (available from front of scanner).
5-7-7 Location of the Back End Processor
Figure 5-25 Backend Processor mounted in scanner
BEP 4.x
Front of Scanner
Rear of Scanner
Left Side of Scanner
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-42 Section 5-7 - Back End Processor (BEP 4.x)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-8 Inputs (BEP 4.x)
5-7-8-1 AC Power
5-7-8-2 DC Voltages
5-7-8-3 Input Signals
5-7-8-4 Bi-directional Signals
NOTE: BEP4.x processors have one Com Port and 12 USB Ports. The Com Port is connected to the Internal I/O. BEP4.x Processors have digital video coming from an ADD2 card going to the DGIO/DGVIC or PCI-DGVIC2 Tray. BEP4.x processors have Ethernet and Analog Video on the motherboard.
Table 5-21 AC Power
Input Description Connection from:
230 VAC AC Power AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
Table 5-22 DC Input Voltages
Input Description Connected to:
+5Vstb Standby voltage DC Power Supply via Backplane
GND Electrical Ground DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/O
Table 5-23 Input Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
PWR_OK* Power verification signal from Card Rack Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO
ON/OFF Switch Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel.(Reset button on the rear of the External I/O not active) Top Console > IIO > PC2IO
I2C Register Interrupt Interrupt signal from I2C Bus EIO > IIO > PC2IO
Table 5-24 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
UPS Control RS232 Control Signals to and from the UPS BEP > IIO
I2C Bus Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. PC2IO > IIO > EIO
VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) Control signal to Internal VCR PC2IO > IIO > VCR
USB #1 USB bus to Top Console PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
COM 1 Can be configured to transfer report page data PC2IO > IIO > EIO
COM 2 Modem PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem
Ethernet Standard TCP/IP Ethernet BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network
USB #2 USB Bus for External Units BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-43
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-7-9 Outputs
Table 5-25 Output Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
+5VDC DC Voltage Bulkhead > IIO
+12VDC DC Voltage Bulkhead > IIO
PS_ON* TBD (Active Low) PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Card Rack
Standby TBD PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > Top Console
SVideo SVideo Out PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
CVideo Composite Color Video PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
VGA VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console) BEP > Top Console
BW Video RGB BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIOThis signal is not used on LOGIQ™ 9
Audio Out Audio Out from BEPBEP > IIO > Internal VCR
BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR
TRIG Video Trig Signal PCI-DGVIC > Bulkhead > IIO > EIO
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-44 Section 5-8 - BEP Power On Path
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-8BEP Power On Path
(refer to Figure 5-26 on page 5-44 )
The Back End Processor is powered ON by:
- Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch. - The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the
Internal I/O.- The PC Power ON signal from the II/O (B6) goes to the PC2IO (D2) then to the BEP
motherboard commanding the BEP Power Supply to turn ON.
Figure 5-26 BEP Power On Path
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-45
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-9BEP Power Off Path
(refer to Figure 5-27 on page 5-45 )
The Back End Processor is powered Off by:
- Press and release the OP I/O Standby (On/Off) switch.- The signal from the OP I/O goes to the II/O (A4) and through the rack power relay in the
Internal I/O to the I2C register.
- Software detects the request to power down via the I2C buss from the II/O (B5) to the BEP (D1).
- The system begins a controlled shut down procedure closing applications, files, turning off FE rack power and finally BEP power.
Figure 5-27 BEP Power Off Path
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-46 Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-10Operator Console Control PWA
Figure 5-29 and Figure 5-28 show the audio path through the Operator Console Control Printed Wire Assembly.
Figure 5-28 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Power
Figure 5-29 USB-OP Console Control PWA - Audio
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-47
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1 Console Main Cable
5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04
Figure 5-30 Main Cable Drawing - prior to BT04
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-48 Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)
5-10-1-2 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - Prior to BT04
Table 5-26 Main Cable Composition Prior to BT04
Item Function Lower to Description
A Safety Ground Connector A - G Safety Ground Connector
B DVI to DVI Interface B - I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I
C RGB to the Main Monitor C - H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
E USB Audio, Microphone E - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
F DC Power and Control F - K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel
G Safety Ground Connector A - G Safety Ground Connector
H RGB to the Main Monitor C- H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
I DVI to DVI Interface B - I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I
J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
L Microphone to the Operator panel E - L to the Operator panel Microphone
M “Z” Release Cable From piston to “Z” release handle on the console
Table 5-27 Connector A & G- Safety Ground
Pin Signal
1 Ground
Table 5-28 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground
2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20
3 Ground 12 21
4 13 22 Ground
5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock -
6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock +
7 Return 16 +12V Backlight
8 17 LVDS Data 2-
9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 2-
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-49
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)
Table 5-29 Connector C & H - Touch Screen Interface
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 Red 6 Red Ground 11 nc
2 Green 7 Green Ground 12 nc
3 Blue 8 Blue Ground 13 H Sync
4 nc 9 nc 14 V Sync
5 nc 10 Sync Ground 15 nc
Table 5-30 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral
Table 5-31 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right
2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone
3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB
4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB
5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D-
Table 5-32 Connector F - Op Console Power
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0
2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc
3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground
4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 Ground USB
5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 USB D-
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-50 Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-1 Main Cable Connector Functions - Prior to BT04 (cont’d)
Table 5-33 Connector K- Op Console Power, Audio, Mic, Control
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 Standby LED 0 13 +15V 25 nc
2 nc 14 + 15V Ground 26 nc
3 On/Off SW1 15 nc 27 USB 5V
4 On/Off SW0 16 nc 28 USB Ground
5 +12V 17 MIcrophone 29 USB 5V
6 +12V Ground 18 Microphone Ground 30 USB Ground
7 +12V 19 Shield Power/Control 31 USB D+
8 +12V Ground 20 Shield Audio/Mic 32 USB D-
9 +12V 21 Audio - Left 33 Shield USB
10 +12V Ground 22 Audio - Left Ground 34 nc
11 +15V 23 Audio - Right
12 + 15V Ground 24 Audio - Right Ground
Table 5-34 Connector L- Console Microphone
Pin Signal
1 Microphone
Microphone Ground
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-51
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-3 Main Cable Connector Functions - BT04 and after
Figure 5-31 Main Cable - BT04 and after
Table 5-35 Main Cable Composition - BT04 and after
Item Function Lower to Description
A Safety Ground Connector A & G Safety Ground Connector
B DVI to DVI Interface B & I Interface to the Touch Screen B- I
C Housing Terminals C & H Video for Main CRT
D 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D & J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
E USB Audio, Microphone E - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
F DC Power and Control F - K DC Power and Control to the Operator panel
G Safety Ground Connector A & G Safety Ground Connector
H RGB to the Main Monitor C & H RGB to the Main Monitor C - H
I DVI to DVI Interface B & I Interface to the Touch Screen B - I
J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D & J 110 VAC to the Main Monitor D - J
K USB Audio, Microphone and DC E/F - K USB Audio, Microphone and DC for Operator Panel
M “Z” Release Cable From piston to “Z” release handle on the console
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
M
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-52 Section 5-10 - Operator Console Control PWA
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-4 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218)
Table 5-36 Connector A & G- Safety Ground - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal
1 Ground
Table 5-37 Connector B & I - Touch Screen Interface - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 LVDS Data 2- 10 LVDS Data 1+ 19 Ground
2 LVDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20
3 Ground 12 21
4 13 22 Ground
5 14 +5V 23 LVDS Clock -
6 +5V 15 Return 24 LVDS Clock +
7 Return 16 +12V Backlight
8 17 LVDS Data 0-
9 LVDS Data 1- 18 LVDS Data 0+
Table 5-38 Connector C & H - Video for Main CRT - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 TMDS Data 2- 10 TMDS Data 1+ 19 Ground
2 TMDS Data 2+ 11 Ground 20 nc
3 Ground 12 nc 21 nc
4 nc 13 nc 22 Ground
5 nc 14 +5V 23 TMDS Clock -
6 DDC Clock (SCL) 15 +5 Return 24 TMDS Clock +
7 DDC Data (SCA) 16 Hot Plug Detect C1 Analog Red
8 Analog Vert Sync 17 TMDS Data 0- C2 Analog Green
9 TMDS Data 1- 18 TMDS Data 0+ C3 Analog Blue
C4 Analog Horz Sync
C5 Ground
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-53
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-10-1-4 Main Cable Connectors with Pinouts - BT04 and after (5119218) (cont’d)
Table 5-39 Connector D & J - 110VAC to Monitor - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 110 VAC 2 Ground 3 Neutral
Table 5-40 Connector E - USB, Audio & Microphone - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 nc 6 USB 5V 11 Ground Audio - Right
2 nc 7 USB 5V 12 Ground Microphone
3 Audio - Left 8 USB D+ 13 Ground USB
4 Audio - Right 9 nc 14 Ground USB
5 Microphone 10 Ground Audio - Left 15 USB D-
Table 5-41 Connector F - Op Console Power - BT04 and after (5119218)
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 +15 6 +12V 11 Standby LED 0
2 +15 7 +12V 12 nc
3 nc 8 +12v 13 +12 Ground
4 On/Off SW0 9 +15 Ground 14 +12 Ground
5 On/Off SW1 10 +15 Ground 15 +12 Ground
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-54 Section 5-11 - Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-11Patient I/O (Currently not supported by the LOGIQ™ 9)
The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processor’s cabinet with its connector panel available on the front of the scanner.
The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.
Inputs
- Phono (from a phono heart microphone)- ECG / Respiration- AUX1- AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)
These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system.
Outputs
Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board.
Figure 5-32 Patient I/O - Block Diagram
Digital Trace Data
PHONO
AUX 1
ISOLATION
AUX 2
ECG / RESPIRATION
(Pulse/Pressure)
PHONO
ECG
AUX1
AUX2
A/D
(Pulse/Pressure)
to PC2IO
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-55
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-12Internal I/O
The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, PC Module, and the rest of the system, including the Top Console and the Peripherals. Table 9-26 on page 9-45 and Table 9-30 on page 9-58 have information on cable call-outs.
Figure 5-33 Internal I/O Basic Interconnect
INTERNAL I/O
PC2IO
PCVIC
TV
vid
eo,
SG
VA
& I2
C
Pow
er
SVGA BD.
PC2IP
UPS
PAT I/O
RS232
Power
Power
Serial data, I2C
RS232, I2C& ctrl. signals
EXTERNAL I/O
PERIPHERALS(VCR & printers)
AC POWER& FANS
3D &ROTATIONADAPTER
FRONT-ENDPROCESSING
MODULE
SVGAMONITOR
TV - RGBS
TV
vid
eo, a
udio
,R
S23
2, c
trl.
sign
als
Ctr
l. si
gnal
s
Ctr
l. si
gnal
s
Ctr
l. si
gnal
sau
dio
& T
V v
ideo
Pow
er
TV video, SVGA, RS232 &I2C
Power
RS
232,
US
B, I
2C, E
ther
net,
SV
GA
, TV
vid
eo&
ctr
l sig
nals
Pow
er
TOP CONSOLE
US
B, a
udio
, ctr
l. si
gnal
s
Pow
er
SVGASVGA
BACK-END PROCESSING MODULE
Pow
er
Eth
erne
t, U
SB
,C
OM
1/2
& a
udio
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-56 Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-12 Internal I/O (cont’d)
Internal I/O Enhancement for BT’03 (FC200423)Modifications were made to the Internal I/O in October of 2003 to enhance the performance of the Microphone function. Resistor values were changed in the microphone amplifier circuit to increase the gain, a capacitor was added to reduce noise as well as a modified wiring scheme and differential pre-amp to reduce noise. This new FRU is backwards compatible.
Figure 5-34 Internal I/O Module Overview
50M
50M
LeftRight
RightLeft
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
RS-232C
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD
A8A9
A6A7
A2
A11
A10
USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT
PC/VIC
PC2IO
D1
D2
Remote
ECG
MOD
CD/RWFLOCK OF BIRDS�
(option)
Ethernet
PC2IP
SOUND CARD
PCI VIDEO
AGP VIDEO
UPS CNTRL
Mic InLine OutLine In
10/100 T
USB #1USB #2
COM1
COM2 (EXT)
Power from PC
I/O-PC2IOSignals Cable
PC MODULE
Video Rcvr
Op Control
Audio AmpMic Pre-Amp
Video/Mic
AC Power
Speaker
MONITOR
OP PANELA1
A3
A4
A5
B5
B6
B7
B9
B8
B2
B1
B3
B4
A15
A14
TO CARD RACK
TO�INTERNAL I/O�
BOARD
To AC CONTROL ASSY�for FAN SPEED�
RegulationUSER INTERFACE
RS-232C
Video Output
B/W Video In
SONY B/W PRINTER�UP890MD
SONY�COLOR PRINTER�
UP-2900MD
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
PC�
MO
THER
BO
AR
D
D3
D4
D5
SVGA from AGP
SVGA Out
RGB & Sync
SVGA VIDEO
SVGA VIDEO
COLOR PRNT�VIDEO
COLOR PRNT�VIDEO
TOUCH PANEL�VIDEO
TOUCH PANEL�VIDEO
PCI Bus to FEP�Cardrack
RGB Out
On LCD units only:
Matrox Dual Output video card
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-57
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-12 Internal I/O (cont’d)
The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources to multiple destinations.
• SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of RGB can be fed to a color printer.
• Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and printers.
• The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers.
• Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and Modem.
• Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO.• Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board.• The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board.• An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed.
Figure 5-35 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-58 Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-1 Location in the UnitThe Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).
5-12-2 LEDsNine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK.
NOTE: The -15 V LED is not used on the LOGIQ™ 9. It is normal for it to be off (not lit).
5-12-3 FusesAll output voltages are fused
5-12-4 Jumpers and Dip-switchesThere are no Jumpers or Dip Switches on the Internal I/O.
Figure 5-36 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-59
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-5 Inputs
5-12-5-1 DC Voltages
5-12-5-2 Video Input Signals
5-12-5-3 Audio Input Signals
Table 5-42 DC Input Voltages
Input Description Connection from
+3.3 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+5 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+10 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+15 VDC Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
-15 VDC -Not used on the L9 -Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+6 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
–5 VDC (analog) Input DC Voltage DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32
+5 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17
+12 VDC Input DC Voltage Backend Processor > J17)
Table 5-43 Video Input Signals
Input Description Connection from
SVGA Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)
SVHS Video Signal to VCR & External I/O PC2IO(Connector J16)
SVHS Video Signal to MBD (IMP) VCR (Connector J11)
Luma Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)
Comp. Video Video Signal to External I/O PC2IO (Connector J16)
Comp. Video Video Signal to MBD (IMP) Color printer
Table 5-44 Audio Input Signals
Input Description Connection from
Two channel audio
Audio signals, summed and distributed
MBD (IMP)
Two channel audio VCR
Two channel audio BEP
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-60 Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-5 Inputs (cont’d)
5-12-5-4 Serial Ports
5-12-5-5 Control Signals
Table 5-45 Serial Ports
Input Description Connection from
USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - Top console
USB Standard USB Serial Bus BEPM - IEIO
Ethernet Standard Ethernet BEPM - IEIO
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM1 - IEIO
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus BEPM COM2 - IEIO
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - Spare (J16)
RS232 Standard RS232 Serial Bus PC2IO - VCR (J16)
RS232 PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16)
RS232 PC2IO – UPS (Connector J16)
Table 5-46 Control Signals
Input Description Connection from
Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16)
Control signals Spare MBD/FEC (Connector J16)
Trace trigger To EIO PC2IO (Connector J16)
Fan control signals To AC Power MBD (Connector J16)
Power control signals To MBD and AC Power PC2IO (Connector J16)
Power on/off To Relay Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO Test (Connector J16)
Standby To Top Console PC2IO (Connector J16)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-61
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-6 Outputs
5-12-6-1 DC Voltage
5-12-6-2 AUDIO
5-12-6-3 Connectors – Solder Side
Table 5-47 DC Output Voltages
Output Description Connection to
+5 VDC +12 VDC
From BEP
Spare (Connector J21)+5 VDC, -15 VDC,
-5 VDC analog
From Card Rack
+5 VDC +12 VDC
From BEP
Not Used +5 VDC, -15 VDC,
-5 VDC analog
From Card Rack
+5 VDC, +15 VDC,
From Card Rack Not Used
+12 VDC From BEPTop Console
+15 VDC From Card Rack
+5 VDC+12 VDC
From BEP
EIO+5 VDC,
+15 VDC, -5 VDC analog
+6 VDC analog
From Card Rack
Table 5-48 Audio Outputs
Output Description Connection to
Audio (two channels) Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP
Top Console speakers and BEP
VCR and IEIO
Table 5-49 Connectors, Solder side
Input Description Connection from
A12/J21 Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female
A13/J20 Spare – power, 15pins D-sub, female
A14/J24 AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female
A15/P23 Rotation adapter – signals, 15pins D-sub, male
A16/P22 Spare – signals, 25pins D-sub, female
P30 EIO – signals and power, 110pins male
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-62 Section 5-12 - Internal I/O
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-12-6 Outputs (cont’d)
5-12-6-4 Interface Connectors – Component SideTable 5-50 Connectors, Component Side
Input Description Connection from
A1/J1 B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female.
A2/P4 VCR remote ctrl – RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.
A3/P5 Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male.
A4/J2 Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female.
A5/P4 Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male.
A6/J6 Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack.
A7/J7 Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack.
A8/J8 Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack.
A9/J9 Audio in from VCR, right
A10/J10 SVHS out to VCR
A11/J11 SVHS in from VCR
B1/J12 USB to Top console
B2/J13 USB to external I/O
B3/J14 Ethernet
B4/J15 Audio I/O
B5/J16 PC2IO signals
B6/J17 PC2IO power
B7/P18 COM1
B8/P19 COM2
B9/P25 UPS remote control
J32 MBD – signals and power
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-63
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-13Top Console
The Top Console includes a Stand By/On switch, a keyboard, different controls for manipulating the picture quality, and controls for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A).
BT’03 Consoles added a USB connector to the Upper Op Panel for the Wired Voice Scan Option. This connection should only be used for Wired Voice Scan.
Figure 5-37 Top Console
Figure 5-38 BT’03 Top Console
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-64 Section 5-14 - Monitor
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-14Monitor
17-inch High Resolution Monitor with no interlace scan includes loudspeakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning).
Figure 5-39 Monitors: CRT (top), 17” LCD option (left), 19” LCD (right)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-65
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-15External I/O
The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external items.
5-15-1 Location in the UnitOn the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker.
5-15-2 Input Signals
Figure 5-40 External I/O
Table 5-51 Input Signals
Input Description Connection from/via/to
Footswitch Connector
Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to ground.
Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V)
Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O > PC2IO (BEP)
DC Voltages from BEP
+5 VDCUsed for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External
I/O +12 VDC
DC Voltages from Card Rack
+5 VDC
Used for Optical Couplers on FootswitchCard Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O
+15 VDC
-5 VDC analog
+6 VDC analog
External I/O
Right Side of Scanner
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-66 Section 5-15 - External I/O
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-15-3 Bi-directional Signals
Table 5-52 Bi-directional Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
Ethernet Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (Ethernet Connector)
COM1 Serial RS-232 port (Can be configured to transfer report page data to an external processor)
External Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)
USB Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V) USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (USB #2))
Modem Internal Modem Telephone Line ConnectionAnalog Phone Line - External I/O
(Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear Side)- Modem
COM2 Serial RS-232 port (on rear side of External I/O)
Modem - External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1)
Burn-in Power On/Off Control
Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O) - Used for factory testing. External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O
Figure 5-41 External I/O
EXTERNAL I/OModule
TRIGGER
USB
SVGA OUT
MODEM
FOOTSWITCH
RS232 (COM1:)
Audio (R)
Audio (L)
C-Video OUT
10/100Base-TX
S-Video OUT
BW Video OUT
EXPOSE #1EXPOSE #2
External I/OUpper PWB
To MODEM
Modem PhoneConnection
Burn InPower
ON/OFFControl
Connection toInternal I/O Board
EXTERNAL I/O
PWB
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-67
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-15-4 Output Signals
Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section.
Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O.
• R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers.• Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors
for external monitors and printers.• Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU.• An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including
DICOM Network.
Table 5-53 Output Signals
Signal Name Description Signal Path
Stereo Audio Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to internal VCR).
Audio Source (Internal VCR/Microphone/BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR.
Composite Video External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative.
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Composite Video Device
Super Video (SVHS)
Super VideoLuminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.
Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced.
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR
Black and White video
External black and white video1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative.
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External B/W Video Device
Trig Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V
SVGASVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output
(Same signal as sent to the systems monitor)
PCIDG/DG VIC > PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External
Monitor
Remote Expose #1 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Peripheral
Remote Expose #2 A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Peripheral
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-68 Section 5-16 - Peripherals
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-16Peripherals
A DVR or VCR, an analog or digital Black-and-White Video Printer, and an analog or digital Color Printer may be installed on the scanner. These devices receive video signals from the Internal I/O Board and power from the AC Control Box.
Peripherals are generally specified and approved regionally.
BT’02 (BEP 2.1 and above) systems have digital peripheral capabilities through USB or USB To SCSI converters.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-69
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-17Modem and USB Modem
5-17-1 General DescriptionMulti-Tech global modem. The modem is a standard modem that connects to an analog phone line for InSite capabilities.
A USB Modem was introduced at BT04. The USB modem does not require external power, and has no serial connection as it plugs directly into the back of the BEP.
BT07 and later do not support the modem.
5-17-2 Location in the Unit
5-17-3 Inputs/Outputs (non-USB Modem)• DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter)• RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O• Analog Phone line via External I/O
5-17-4 FusesNone
5-17-5 Jumpers and Dip-switchesNone
Figure 5-42 Modem: Location in Unit
Global Modem
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-70 Section 5-17 - Modem and USB Modem
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-17-6 LEDs (non-USB Modem)The Modem has 10 LEDs on its front.
Figure 5-43 LEDs on Modem’s Front Panel
Table 5-54 LEDs on Modem
LED Color Description Normally State
- Red TD (Transmit Data) Flashes during use.
- Red RD (Receive Data) Flashes during use.
- Red CD (Carrier Detect)ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during
communication.OFF indicates no or broken connection.
- Red 56 (56K Mode) During Power On: Briefly FlashingThese LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON
until the modem is reset or connected the next time.At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF.
- Red 33 (V.34 Mode)
- Red 14 (V.32bis Mode)
- Red OH (Off hook)ON when dialing, online, or answering a call
Flashes if puls dialingOff when modem not in use
- Red TR (Terminal Ready)
ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call.
OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will
disconnect.
- Red EC (Error Correction (V.42))ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON
Blinking: Compression turned ONOFF: Normal operation.
- Red FX (Fax) Always OFF
TDRD CD 56 3314OHTRECFX
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-71
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-18Power Distribution
Figure 5-44 Overall Power Distribution
P5FB
2008
04X
FM
R B
OX
FB20
0803
P6
P10
0P
101
P8 P7 P9 P10
P11
070C
5080
To
Co
lor
Pri
nte
r
To
VC
R
To
B/W
Pri
nte
r
070C
5080
070C
5080
FB20
0802
-4
To
FE
ca
rd r
ac
k
FB20
0802
-1
FB20
0802
-3
FB20
0802
-2
INT
ER
NA
L I
/O
Fan
Ass
embl
yFB
2005
80
A13
A12A14
FB20
0795
AC
CO
NT
RO
L B
OX
Mo
de
m
Re
se
rve
d f
or
Wir
ele
ss
Mic
2286
301
PS
_ON
_L(R
PW
ON
N)
L9 P
OW
ER
DIS
TRIB
UTI
ON
DIA
GR
AM
(AC
& D
C)
For 1
00-1
20V
, con
nect
toP
5 pi
n1-4
.Fo
r 220
-240
V,
conn
ect t
o P
5 pi
n 3-
6.F2F1 F3 F4 F5
100-
120V
220-
240V
BE
P
Po
we
r
Su
pp
ly
AC
Ad
ap
ter
120V
120/
230V
220V
220V
220V
5V 3.3V
-12V
5V_s
tndb
y
BE
P
DG
VIC
&D
GIO
B6
J31
J32
FB20
0798
A4 A5 P30
BE
P_12
V
RA
CK
_15V
BEP
_5V
RA
CK_
5VR
AC
K_1
5VB
EP_5
VB
EP_
12V
OP
Pa
ne
l
FB20
0320
PC
I Vid
eo
12
V c
om
es
fro
m B
EP
USB
HU
B
5VIN
VE
RTE
R
3.3V
INV
ER
TER
12V
3.3V 5V
15V
Aud
io
LCD
Dis
play
12V
B1
USB
15V
070D
2802
USB
12v
Ma
in A
C P
ow
er
In
RA
CK
_-5V
RA
CK
_3V3
Inru
sh c
urre
nt li
mite
r
RC
del
ay
AC
Det
ect
120V
AC
_ A
20VA
C12
0VA
C_
B
FAN
OU
T_L
PC
2IP
I96012
V5V
RP
WO
NN
RP
WIS
ON
EX
TE
RN
AL
I/O
J10
A1A2
A3A4
A5A6
A7A8
A9A
10A
11A
12
Fro
nt
En
d
Po
wer
Su
pp
ly
(FE
PS
)
A13
R FX D I F
T D 0
S C B
T D 1
T D 2
T D 3
T D 4
T D 5
T D 6
T D 7
E B M
5VP
A, 5
VN
A (A
nalo
g)
5VP
, 3.3
VP
(Dig
ital)
PH
VP
(120
V)
+/- 1
00V
Pow
er_O
K
PS
_ON
_L(R
PW
ON
N)
RP
WIS
ON
BT'
04 a
nd la
ter s
yste
ms,
the
mod
em is
USB
atta
ched
and
does
not
requ
ire A
C p
ower
.
No
te :
Rep
lace
d by
3 le
ad c
able
(FC
2005
71) a
nd Y
cab
le(5
1126
31) f
or B
T'04
and
late
r sys
tem
s.
No
te :
12V
Mot
herb
oard
Lo
ca
ted
un
de
r B
EP
Pe
rip
he
ral vo
lta
ge
se
lecto
r
To
ma
in m
on
ito
r
To
peri
ph
era
ls
To
op
tio
na
l m
od
em
To
BE
P
Mai
n C
B
Vo
lta
ge
fe
ed
ba
ck f
an
sp
ee
d c
on
tro
l co
min
g
fro
m E
BM
C22
D2
15
V c
om
es
fro
m F
EP
S
Ma
in M
on
ito
r
Ma
in C
ab
leB
EP_5
V
RA
CK
_15V
Lin
e F
ilte
r
RPW
ON
N =
Rac
k P
ower
on
RP
WIS
ON
= R
ack
Pow
er is
on
For B
EP P
ower
on/
off
sign
al p
ath
see
Sec
5-4-
14 (o
n)S
ec 5
-4-1
5 (o
ff)
To P
robe
Bia
s(v
ia X
DIF
)
EB
M g
ener
ates
+/-
100V
from
12V
PO
n ol
der s
yste
ms
the
EQ
pro
vide
s: -1
00V
(fro
m 1
2VP)
+100
V (f
rom
120
V)
15VP
24
V B
att
ery
Pa
ck
for
BE
P U
PS
Min
us le
ad h
as a
20A
fuse
Arro
ws
indi
cate
whi
ch b
oard
s us
eth
is v
olta
ge.
All
volta
ges
and
Pow
er_O
K s
igna
lar
e ge
nera
ted
inth
e FE
PS
exc
ept
as n
oted
.
120V
AC
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
12V
P (D
igita
l)
+/- 1
00V
from
EBM
for t
est
poin
t onl
yon
FEP
S
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-72 Section 5-18 - Power Distribution
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-1 AC Power Distribution OverviewThe AC Power’s main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan.
5-18-2 AC Power PWB
The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site.
The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system.
The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power.
From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in Figure 5-45) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains.
Figure 5-45 AC Power Distribution
AC INLET BOXTO OUTLET
M
INRUSHLIMIT
Mainsswitch
230V
ac11
5Vac
230Vac
20Vac
230 115
Fanregulator
L
TRANSFORMER BOX
TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac)
TO MONITOR (115 Vac)
TO MODEM (230 Vac)
TO PC (230 Vac)
TO CARD RACK (230 Vac)
Cable #27
Cable #13
Cable #7TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O
POWER SUPPLY ON,FAN SPEED CONTROL
CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27
AC DISTRIBUTION PWB
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-73
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-2 AC Power PWB (cont’d)
Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs). The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages.
From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets;
• 20 VAC• 115 VAC• 230 VAC
The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. (See separate description, Chapter 5 - Air Flow Control).
The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.)
The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets:
• Modem• Back End Processor• Card Rack
Figure 5-46 Connectors on Back of AC Controller
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-74 Section 5-18 - Power Distribution
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-3 AC Controller Differences
Figure 5-47 Original AC Controller Functions
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-75
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-18-3 AC Controller Differences (cont’d)
Figure 5-48 AC Controller FC 200403/FC200404
AC C
ontro
ller F
C20
0403
/FC
2004
04
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-76 Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-19Mechanical Descriptions
5-19-1 Monitor
5-19-1-1 Standard• Tilt: 10° forwards and backwards.• Swivel: 90° rotation.
5-19-2 Top Console Positioning
• Vertical Access: The control panel offers 27 inches (200 mm) of vertical adjustment.• Horizontal Access: The control panel offers 45° of horizontal adjustment when the Z-arm is
released.
Figure 5-49 Top Console Positioning
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-77
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-19-2-1 17” LCD (Option)• Tilt Adjustable Monitor: Tilt Angle: Up 10°, Down 90°• Range of Movement: Up 89mm, Down 211mm
Left and Right from center: max 855mm• Monitor Arm Neck: plus or minus 90° • Monitor Arm Rotary: plus or minus 150° • Monitor Neck Swivel: plus or minus 90°
5-19-2-2 19” LCD• Side to side ± 33cm (± 15in)• Tilt/Rotate Adjustable Monitor• Tilt Angle: Up 20°, Down 90°• Rotate Angle: 90° right, 90° left• Fold-down and lock mechanism for transportation
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.
Figure 5-50 LCD Monitor - Positioning (17” LCD shown)
CAUTION To avoid injury or damage, make sure nothing is within the range of motion before moving the monitor and monitor arm. This includes both objects and people.Pay attention to the monitor arm position to avoid hitting it against anyone or anything.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-78 Section 5-19 - Mechanical Descriptions
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-19-3 Wheels/BrakesCheck that the brakes and direction locks function as described below.
NOTE: The swivel lock and brake cannot be engaged (pressed down) at the same time since pressing the main brake releases the swivel lock and pressing the swivel lock releases the main brake. Therefore, if the swivel lock is engaged you need to press the main brake pedal (#2) twice to lock the scanner from rolling. Once will release the swivel lock and once again will engage the main brake in full lock as stated in step 1.
Table 5-55 Brakes and Direction Lock Instructions
Step Task Expected Result(s)
1. Press on pedal no. 2
To engage the brakes in full lock
2. Press on pedal no.1
To release the brake
3. Press on pedal no.1
To engage swivel lock.You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked
direction.
4. Press on pedal no. 2
To release swivel lock
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-79
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-20Air Flow Control
5-20-1 Air Flow DistributionThe fan at the rear of the scanner draws air into the scanner, through the foam filter, and pushes it through a flange that moves the air into a cavity on top of the card rack.
Air holes in the bottom of this cavity allow the air to move down through the card rack. Air exits the card rack through holes on its internal side panel into the interior of the scanner near the rear of the Backend Processor.
The internal fan in the Backend processor draws the air into the PC allowing it to pass through the interior of the PC, and exit the lower front area of the scanner.
Section 5-21Service Platform
5-21-1 IntroductionThe Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to all ultrasound and cardiology systems containing a PC backend. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GE’s scanners more e-enabled than ever. The Service Platform will increase service productivity and reduce training and service costs.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-80 Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI)
5-21-2-1 InternationalizationThe user interface provided by the service platform is designed for GE personnel and as such is in English only. There is no multi-lingual capability built into the Service Interface.
5-21-2-2 Service LoginSelect the wrench icon in the status bar at the bottom of the scan display screen. This icon links the user to the service login screen.
NOTE: In R4.x.x and after, the wrench icon has been removed from the upper display. To access the Service Platform, click on Utility, then select Service.
5-21-2-3 Access / SecurityThe service interface has different access and security user levels. Each user is only granted access to the tools that are authorized for their use.
NOTE: OnLine Center access to the scanner requires a password and they must have ‘Disruptive’ permission and customer input to run diagnostics.
Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users.
Figure 5-51 Login Screen for Global Service User Interface
Table 5-56 Service Login User Levels
User Level Access Authorization Password
Operator
Authorized access to specified diagnostics, error logs and utilities. Same acquisition diagnostic tests as GE Service.
uls
Administrator uls
External Service gogems
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-81
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-3 Service Home PageThe navigation bar at the top of the Customer Service Home Page screen allows the user to select from several tools and utilities.
Figure 5-52 Customer Service Home Page
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-82 Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4 Error Logs TabFrom the Error Logs Tab the Log Viewer displays four categories with pull-down sub-menus and an Exit selection. The Service Interface allows scanner logs to be viewed by all service users.
NOTE: Beginning with R4.x application software, some of the Log Viewer screens are different than those shown in this section. However, the basic functionality has not changed. Also, some additional navigational features have been added, such as Last Page and Get Page.
The Filter Error log is keyed to GE Service login access permissions and is not available to customer level analysis.
NOTE: Beginning with R4.x application software, filtering has been removed and all users have the same access to the logs.
The log entries are color-coded to identify the error level severity at a glance.
The Service Interface supports the transfer of these logs to local destinations such as the MOD, CD-Rom or DVD drive.
Table 5-57 Log Entry Key
Severity Error Level Color Code
1 Information Green
2 Warning Blue
3 Error Red
Figure 5-53 Log Viewer / Logs / Log Entries
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-83
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4-1 LogsThe eight sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Infomatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, DICOM, and UPS Power.
NOTE: Figure 5-53 provides a graphical example of the log entries for the System Logs.
Log table headings for the different logs are as follows:
• SystemLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message, and TouchPanel keystrokes (BT06).
• PowerLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Analog_5V, DC_5V, DC_3.3V, Pos_15V, Analog_12V, Pos_HV, Neg_5V, Pos_100V, Neg_100V.
NOTE: For systems running R2.x and R3.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
NOTE: In R4.x application software, the Power log present in R2.x and R3.x application software was renamed UPS Power as described below.
NOTE: All readings in the Power log are in mV. Readings for analog voltages will vary depending on whether the system has an FEPS2.x or FEPS3.x. It is normal for the Pos_HV, Pos_100V, and Neg_100V to read 0. Readings for these voltages are not captured in this log. To check these voltages, run the Power Supply diagnostic.
• InfomaticsLog entry headings include TimeStamp, Revision, PtID, PtDOB, PtSex, PtWeight, PtHeight, ExamID, ExamCategory, ExamCurDate, ExamStartTime, ExamEndTime, ActiveScanTime, FreezeTime, TimeOfImageArchived, AccessionNumber, RefPhyName, ReadingPhyName, Operator, RoomNo, BodyPatternSelected, InstitutionName, ActiveModeTime, CalculationMade, CalculationTime, HelpUsage, ProductName, SystemSWRev, NoOfSWModules, SystemPowerOnTime, SystemIdleTime, NoOfBoards, ProbeChangedDate, ProbeChangedTime, ProbeChangedStatus, NoOfProbeSlots, NoOfProbes, ProbeID, ProbeSerialNumber, and ActiveExamProbes.
• TemperatureLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Upper FEC Sensor, and Lower FEC Sensor.
NOTE: In R4.x application software, the log entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Average, TD0, TD1, TD2, TD3, TD4, TD5, TD6, TD7, EQOut, EQIn, and RFI.
• ProbeLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Error Message, Severity, Revision, and three (3) new labels that have not yet been named.
• BoardLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, Board, Severity, and two (2) new labels that have yet been named.
• DICOMLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
• UPS PowerLog entry headings include Time Stamp, Error Level, Package, and Error Message.
NOTE: This log was called Power in R2.x and R3.x application software.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-84 Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4-2 UtilitiesThe two sub-menus of the Utilities category are Plot Log, and Plot Page.
• Plot LogAllows for the color coded plot of all Log contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.
• Plot PageAllows for the color coded plot of all Page contents with the package on the ‘x’ axis and incident count on the ‘y’ axis.
5-21-4-3 SearchOn the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to find. This filter field works well for filtering the Sys log file for the word “fail”.
Figure 5-54 Utilities Sub-Menus
Figure 5-55 Search Sub-Menu
Plot Log Plot Page
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-85
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-4-4 ExitThe sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Service Desktop home page.
Figure 5-56 Exit Log Sub-Menu
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-86 Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-5 DiagnosticsDetailed Diagnostic information is found in Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting.
NOTE: After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
5-21-5-1 Diagnostics ExecutionDiagnostic tests are executable by both local and remote users. The Service Platform provides top-level diagnostic selection based on the user’s level and login access permissions. Remote access will require disruptive diagnostic permissions to run Acquisition diagnostics.
5-21-5-2 Diagnostic ReportsDiagnostic tests return a report to the Service Platform. The platform retains the report and allows for future viewing of the diagnostic logs.
Figure 5-57 User Diagnostic Page
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-87
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-6 Image QualityThe Image Quality page is intended to contain tools for troubleshooting image quality issues.
5-21-7 CalibrationThe Calibration page is intended to contain the tools used to calibrate the system.
Figure 5-58 Image Quality Page
Figure 5-59 Calibration Page
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-88 Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-8 ConfigurationThe Configuration page is intended to be used to setup various configuration files on the system.
The Service Platform is the access and authorization control for remote access to the configuration subsystem.
The enable/disable of software options can be done from this Configuration page.
Starting with BT07 and later, this page contains the remote connectivity setup for InSite ExC.
Figure 5-60 Configuration Page
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-89
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-9 UtilitiesThe Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools such as System Shutdown, the Image Viewer Utility, and the iLinq Configuration Utility.
5-21-10 ReplacementThe Replacement page is intended to contain tools used to track replacement parts used in the system.
Figure 5-61 Customer Utilities Page
Figure 5-62 Part Replacement Page
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-90 Section 5-21 - Service Platform
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-21-11 Planned Maintenance (PM)The PM page is intended to contain the tools used in periodic maintenance of the system.
Figure 5-63 Planned Maintenance Page
FIELD IS NOT YET POPULATED
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-91
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-224D Option
Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform 4D scans.
5-22-1 Principle of Volume AcquisitionThe underlying principle for 3D volume acquisition and reconstruction is the formation of an image composed of multiple 2D scans at known elevation positions.
The acquisition of volume data sets is performed by 2D scans with special transducers designed for 2D scans, 3D sweeps, and real time 4D scans. These transducers have imbedded motors that control the movement and positioning of the acoustic “stack”. The motor control box generates signals that determine the direction and speed that the stack is driven. The motor controller also generates signals sent to the Scan Control Board (routed through the internal IO) that are used for 3D image reconstruction.
NOTE: The fan on the motor control box is thermostatically controlled. Hence, the fan will only run when necessary. You should note that the fan activates after a fairly short period of use of a 3D/4D probe.
NOTE: There are no LED indicators on the motor controller to aid in determining the presence/absence of AC power to the box.
Figure 5-64 Volume Acquisition
Central 2D-Scan
Start 2D_Scann
Range of VOL-Sweep
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-92 Section 5-22 - 4D Option
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram
5-22-2-1 Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable and 4D Probe CableThe connection between the motor control box and the front bulkhead is a 15 pin sub-D (at the motor controller) and a LEMO (at the bulkhead).
Table 5-58 maps the conversion from 15 pin sub-D to 7 pin Lemo.
Figure 5-65 4D BLock Diagram
Table 5-58 Motor Controller to Bracket Cable (2375551) and 4D Probe Cable (2384183) Pin Conversions
Signal Sub D 15 Pin on MC Lemo on L9 (12 pin)Lemo on Probe Cable, 12 Pin
Lemo on Probe Cable, 7 Pin
GND 7 4 4 1
SIN_DRV 1 8 8 2
SIN_RTN 2 7 7 3
ACTIVE 14 2 2 4
COS_RTN 4 5 5 5
COS_DRV 3 6 6 6
HALL1 5 3 3 7
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-93
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)
.
Figure 5-66 Pin Diagrams
6 1
57
2
4 3
18
7
129
2
6 11 10
3
5 4
Pin Diagram of 7 pin Lemo connector on the small end of the 4D Probe Cable
Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the large end of the 4D Probe Cable.
81
2 9
12
3
10 11 7
45
6
Pin Diagram of 12 pin Lemo connector on the L9 for the Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-94 Section 5-22 - 4D Option
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)
The pinout of the motor controller to the front bracket requires a 15 pin SUB-D female Connector (MC4) with the following pinout:
5-22-2-2 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power CableThe connection between the motor control box and the PC backend requires a standard USB compatible 5 pin USB female connector(MC2) with following pin out:
Table 5-59 15-pin SUB-D Pinout for Motor Controller to Front Bracket Cable
PIN Signal name In/Out Description Characteristics
1 SIN_DRV_1 Out Sin1 Motor Drive Line 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
9
2SIN_RTN_1/SIN_DRV_3
In/ Out Sin1 Motor Return Line /Sin3 Motor Drive Line
12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
10
3 COS_DRV_1 Out Cos1 Motor Drive Line 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
11
4 COS_RTN_1 In Cos1 Motor Return Line 12 – 28 V 1,5 A rms
12
5 HALL1 In Null puls detector 5V TTL level
13 STRA1 In Strobo generator sign.1 5V TTL level
6 STRB1 In Strobo generator sign.2 5V TTL level
14
ACTIVE Out Indicates that the Mot-Ctrl-Box is connected to the selected probe.
Pull down resistor in Mot-Ctrl_Box with 100 Ohm to GNDSignal low = Mot-Ctrl-Box is connected to sel. probe
7 GND
15 Reserved_1 IN Reserved Input 5V TTL level
8 + 5V Out Output + 5V low power
M1 GND Screw of the housing
M2 GND Screw of the housing
Table 5-60 USB to Motor Controller Cable and Power Cable Pin Out
PIN Signal name In/Out Description Characteristics
1 VCC IN Power
2 DM Data minus USB 2.0 Compatible
3 DP Data plus USB 2.0 Compatible
4 GND
5 SHELL
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-95
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-22-2 4D Block Diagram (cont’d)
The LOGIQ 9 3D/4D motor control box also includes a power supply with connection to the L9 110 VAC power distribution (MC1).
5-22-2-3 Motor Controller to Internal I/O CableA 9 pin SUB-D connection to the L9 Internal IO(MC3) requires the pin out as shown below.
Table 5-61 Motor Controller to Internal I/O Cable Pin Out
PIN Signal name In/Out Description Characteristics
1 VOL_TR Out Sig. f. volume start 3,3V TTL level
6 FRAME_TR Out Sig. f. frame start 3,3V TTL level
2 DIRECTION Out indicate probe direction 3,3V TTL level
5
CONN_2 Out Indicate cable connection to Mot-Ctrl-Box
Pull down resistor in mot-Ctrl_Box with 100 Ohm to GND Signal low = Mot_Ctrl_Box is connected to L9 system
7 GND
3 GND
8 NC Not connected
4 RESET IN RESET for Hardware3,3V TTL level signal is low active
9 NC Not connected
M1 GND Screw of the housing
M2 GND Screw of the housing
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-96 Section 5-23 - Continuous Wave Doppler Option
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-23Continuous Wave Doppler Option
Beginning with BT04 (Application Software R4.X.X), the LOGIQ™ 9 can be configured to perform Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler scans.
The parts needed to perform Continuous Wave Doppler scans include:
• PCI CW Doppler PWA card• Internal CW Doppler Cable• 5 mHz or 8 mHz probe• Mu Metal Shield
5-23-1 Continuous Wave Doppler Signal FlowThe signal path for the CW probes is somewhat different from other LOGIQ™ 9 probes. The signal-path from the probe does not pass through the card rack, it transitions directly from the probe to the back of the BEP. The following block diagram depicts the functional elements of the PCI CW Doppler Card in the BEP.
In very simplified terms, the PCI CW Doppler PWA card generates the CW signal and sends it out C34 on the back of the BEP. The internal CW Doppler Cable transfers the signal from the BEP to the CW Probe via a LEMO connector. The probe transmits the signal into the patient and receives the echo back. The CW Doppler Board amplifies the received signal then sends it via the PCI Interface to PCI Bus and on to the monitor.
Figure 5-67 PCI CW Doppler PWA Block Diagram
Transmitter
PCI I/FController
A/DReceiver
LIMOConnector
Probe I.D.
PC
I Bus
LocalOscillator
Rx Gain
Tx Gain
Sampling Rate
16
Prog.BlockBuffer
2
2
2
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory) 5-97
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
Section 5-24PCI CW Doppler PWA card
The CW Doppler has a local controller that configures transmit and receive paths. The controller performs all required signal processing in order to produce 16 bit signed integer I/Q data path.
The CW Doppler transmitter output power is controlled in 1 Volt increments. The output power is adjustable continuously without stopping data collection.
The receiver gain is controlled between 0 and 100% max. gain and allows for 55 dB of gain and is programmable without stopping data collection.
The CW Doppler has a PCI interface that acts as a bus master. An interrupt is generated via the PCI Interface to the Host PC when the defined number of data samples has been acquired in the Block Buffer. The contents of the Block Buffer is DMA'd into Host PC memory.
5-24-1 Internal CW Doppler CableThe internal CW Doppler Cable connects between the PCI CW Doppler PWA to a LEMO brand connector on the LOGIQ9 chassis. The Probe cable has the following pin assignments:
5-24-2 Probe ConnectorThe two probes connect to the system via a LEMO connector: FFA.3S.310.CLAC11. with pin connections provided below. A Resistor, R1, must be installed as an identifier for the probe type:• 5 MHz - 75 K ohm• 8 MHz - 25 K ohm
P1 J1 Conductor Signal
1 2 Coax Center, red jacket DOPIN
2 3 Coax shield, Red jacket. DOPIN GND
4 5 W3 ID0
6 6 Coax center, wht jacket PCW
5 7 Coax shield, Wht jacket. PCW GND
3 8 W5 ID1
10 W1,W2 shield
Shell HW1 W1,W2 shield
Lemo Conductor Signal
2 Coax Center, red jacket DOPIN
3 Coax shield, Red jacket. DOPIN GND
5 R1-2 ID0
6 Coax center, wht jacket PCW
7 Coax shield, Wht jacket. PCW GND
8 R1-1 ID1
10 Outer shield
Shell Outer shield
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
5-98 Section 5-24 - PCI CW Doppler PWA card
1/18/10CHAPTER5.FM
5-24-3 Mu Metal ShieldMu metal shield is used to block flux field from the L9 isolation transformer mounted below the BEP.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-1
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
Chapter 6Service Adjustments
Section 6-1Overview
6-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 6This chapter describes how to test and adjust the mechanical capabilities of a scanner that may be out of specification. Although some tests may be optional they should only be performed by qualified personnel.
.
Section 6-2Regulatory
Verify, where applicable, that any regulatory information or tests required by national law are present and accounted for, and any regulatory tests required by national law are performed and documented.
Table 6-1 Chapter 6 Contents
Section Description Page Number
6-1 Overview 6-1
6-2 Regulatory 6-1
6-3 Monitor 6-2
6-4 Panel Calibration 6-8
6-5 Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment 6-8
6-6 Brake Arm Adjustment 6-13
6-7 Brake Adjustment 6-15
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERSOperate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes.
NOTICE Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts:1. Turn off the breaker.2. Unplug the system.3. Maintain control of the system power plug.4. Wait for at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Signed Date
TAG &
LOCKOUT
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-2 Section 6-3 - Monitor
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
Section 6-3Monitor
NOTE: After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
Contrast, brightness and degauss are adjusted using the three (3) keys located on the front of the monitor just below the screen.
6-3-1 Monitor Adjustment (Standard only)
6-3-1-1 DegaussDegaussing refers to the process of removing magnetic-field effects from the monitor. Operation of the monitor within a magnetic field may adversely effect color purity. Degaussing can be used to correct this problem.
To activate the manual degauss:
1.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment button while the brightness/contrast adjustment indicator is not displayed on the monitor. To cancel the manual degauss, press the <<< or >>> adjustment button again.
2.) Press the toggle button for brightness and contrast.3.) Press either the <<< or >>> monitor adjustment.
NOTE: The monitor automatically degausses at power on.
Figure 6-1 Monitor Adjustment Switches: CRT (left), 17” LCD option (center), and 19” LCD (right)
DECREASE INCREASEMENU
DECREASE MENU INCREASEDECREASE MENU INCREASE
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-3
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-1-2 Brightness and Contrast
To calibrate CRT brightness and contrast, go to Utility -> Test Patterns -> Brightness Calibration. The screen display will change as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-3 .
Record any changes to the final brightness and contrast settings and leave this information with the system. Generally speaking, do not change the controls once they have been set. Once set, the display then becomes the reference for the hard copy device(s).
Follow the instructions on the screen. Press the menu button (middle) to adjust the Contrast to 50. Press the menu button again and adjust the Brightness to 100. Decrease the Brightness setting until the inner gray is the same shade as the black box that surrounds it. This brightness setting should range between 35 to 55.
Final adjustment relies on customer approval. Cameras and printers may need to be adjusted to match any monitor changes.
Table 6-2 Brightness and Contrast - Standard
Room Condition Contrast Brightness
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology 85 35
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 90 55
Bright Room 100 100
Figure 6-2 Monitor Brightness/Contrast Calibration Test Pattern - Standard
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-4 Section 6-3 - Monitor
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-1-3 Visible Image Display AdjustmentIf you get a monitor where the image is smaller than the physical CRT displayed area, in other words the image does not fill the screen, you can adjust the size of the visible image display:
1.) Press and HOLD the center button "brightness/contrast (icons)" for about 10 seconds or so, you'll then see an expanded menu. This will allow you to adjust parameters like Color, Size/Center, Geometry, etc. and Utility.
NOTE: It is recommended that only the image size be adjusted as required and not anything else.
2.) Press the Left or Right Arrow buttons to highlight Size/Center then Press the Center button.3.) Use the Center button to select H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size.4.) Use the Left or Right Arrows to adjust H-Position, H-Size, V-Position or V-Size parameters.5.) When complete use the Center button to select Exit and press the Left or Right arrow buttons6.) Use the Left or Right Arrow buttons to select Exit and press the Center button to exit the main menu.
6-3-2 Monitor Tilt (Standard)The monitor is capable of a full 10° forward and backward tilt. Although the default setting of the tilt tension on the monitor should be adequate to tilt the monitor for your viewing preference, it can be easily adjusted.
The monitor chassis is attached to the monitor mount plate that has a shaft that inserts into the top plate of the scanner. This feature allows the monitor to swivel without need for adjustment.
The monitor mount plate has two points for adjustment.
6-3-2-1 Monitor Tilt Adjustment ProcedurePassing through the monitor mount plate on its underside is a large bolt, with a locking nut on its left side, that provides the tension for monitor tilt. Adjust the tilt tension by loosening or tightening the locking nut on this bolt.
NOTE: The right side of this bolt will receive an Allen wrench to provide resistance when loosening and tightening the locking nut.
6-3-2-2 Monitor Counter-balance Adjustment ProcedureAt the back of the monitor mount plate is a nut securing a bolt passing through the shaft. This bolt has a tapered end and several spring washers that when seated into the cylinder provides a proper counter-balance for the monitor.
6-3-2-3 ToolsPhillips screwdriver
Open-ended wrenches
6-3-2-4 Manpower1 person, 1 hour + travel or
2 people, 1 hour + travel if the monitor needs to be removed.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-5
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-2-5 Procedure
1.) Raise the Control Panel to a height that allows you to work underneath the monitor.2.) Remove the eight (8) Phillips screws holding the Under Shelf Cover to the Shelf Cover Assembly.3.) Remove four (4) Phillips screws holding the monitor Rear Cover Assembly to the monitor chassis.4.) You now have access the monitor tilt and counter-balance adjustments. Adjust accordingly.5.) Install the monitor rear cover assembly to the monitor chassis.6.) Position the shelf cover assembly and secure it in place with the Under Shelf Cover and the eight
Phillips screws.
Figure 6-3 Monitor Tilt Tension Adjustment
Monitor Mount Plate
Tilt Adjustment Bolt Counter-balance Adjustment Bolt
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-6 Section 6-3 - Monitor
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-3 Monitor Adjustment (17” LCD Option Only)
6-3-3-1 Brightness and Contrast
NOTE: On the 17” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.
6-3-3-2 Angularity Test PatternAn Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.
Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.
6-3-3-3 Color Settings
Table 6-3 Brightness and Contrast - 17” LCD
Room Condition Contrast Brightness
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 90 55
Bright Room 100 100
Figure 6-4 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 17” LCD
Table 6-4 Color Settings - 17” LCD
Temperature Gamma Saturation Hue
15000K 2.6 0 0
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-7
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-3-4 Monitor Adjustment (19” LCD Only)
6-3-4-1 Brightness and Contrast
NOTE: On the 19” LCD monitor, the brightness adjustment comes before contrast.
6-3-4-2 Angularity Test PatternAn Angularity test pattern has been added for the LCD. This test pattern serves as a learning tool for you to become familiar with the effect moving the LCD has on the image.
Pixel test patterns have also been added: Blue/Yellow (B/Y and Y/B), Cyan/Red (C/R and R/C), Green/Magenta (G/M and M/G) and Black/White (K/W and W/K). Pixel patterns should appear to be a uniform color rectangle. If an area of the screen appears to have a dark or light grouping of pixels, first clean the screen to ensure that gel or dust is not causing an optical defect.
6-3-4-3 Color Settings
Table 6-5 Brightness and Contrast - 19” LCD
Room Condition Contrast Brightness
Dark Room for Radiology/Cardiology
Dim Room for Radiology/Cardiology 95 60
Bright Room 100 100
Figure 6-5 Angularity Viewing Test Pattern - 19”LCD
Table 6-6 Color Settings - 19” LCD
Temperature Gamma Saturation Hue
13000K 2.2 0 0
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-8 Section 6-4 - Panel Calibration
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
Section 6-4Panel Calibration
The Touch Panel Adjustment/Calibration procedure can be found in Section 7-6-1-1 “Calibration Utilities” on page 7-23.
Section 6-5Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
The operator panel can move up and down (Z direction). A gas spring in the scanner provides a counter force to "balance" the weight of the operator panel and allows for positioning with minimal effort. A lever on the main handle has a cable (similar to a bicycle cable) that provides the release for the gas spring. This cable has one end attached to the release lever and the other end attached to the mechanism on the gas spring piston.
6-5-1 Time RequiredApproximately 1 person for 1 hour plus travel.
6-5-2 ToolsPhillips screwdriver
10mm open-end wrench
Two (2) small slotted screwdrivers
Needle-nose pliers
Small ruler
Large slotted screwdriver
3mm Allen wrench
6-5-3 Preparations
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. COMPLETELY POWER OFF AND SHUTDOWN THE SCANNER BEFORE SERVICING.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-9
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-5-4 Z-Release Cable Adjustment
6-5-4-1 Checking the Release System
1.) Squeeze the Z-release lever and move the operator panel to its highest position. If this is not possible, perform the necessary steps in Emergency Release Procedure on page 6-12.
2.) Place a small ruler next to the Z-release lever as shown in the Figure 6-6 below.3.) Gently wiggle the Z-release lever and measure the amount of play in the lever.4.) If this amount is 3mm or more, there is too much play in the cable. Perform the steps in the section
Z-Release Cable Adjustment on page 6-9 to reduce the amount of play in the cable.5.) Attempt to lower the operator panel by pushing down on it. The operator panel should not move.
While continuing to push down, slowly squeeze the Z-release lever.6.) Note the position of the Z-release lever when the operator panel starts to move. It should be 1/4 to
2/3 of the lever’s range of motion.
CAUTION Before making any adjustments, check the Z-release system to determine what adjustments need to be made.
Figure 6-6 Z-Release Measurement
Z-Release Lever
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-10 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-5-4-2 Cable Adjustment
1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw in the cable adjustment screw to tighten the Z-release cable.
2.) If you cannot remove enough of the play in the cable using this adjustment, see Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring on page 6-10
6-5-5 Cable Adjustment at Gas Spring
6-5-5-1 Preparations
1.) If not already performed, Power Off / Shutdown the scanner.2.) Remove the right- and left-side covers of the scanner .3.) Remove the front cover of the scanner .4.) Remove the black-and-white printer.5.) Remove the VCR.
NOTE: The height of the printer and VCR make them difficult to remove without first removing the front cover.
Figure 6-7 Z-Release Cable Adjustment Screw
Underside of Z-Release LeverZ-Release CableCable Adjustment Screw
Underside of Screw HeadHalfway Between Castingand Un-squeezed Lever
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-11
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-5-5-2 Procedure
NOTE: The operator panel must be at or near its highest position.
1.) From underneath the handle use a 10mm open-end (small “ignition” style) wrench to screw out the cable adjustment screw so the underside of the screw head is about half way between the casting and the unsqueezed lever. See Figure 6-7 on page 6-10 .
2.) There is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Refer to Figure 6-8. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp.
3.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the cable end which is above the clamp and pull upward to take up any cable slack.
4.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp down along the cable so that it is nestled back in the Forked Retainer.
5.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.
6.) Without squeezing the release lever, check that the forked retainer is in its fully up position.7.) Squeeze the release lever and watch the forked retainer move down immediately as the lever is
squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the cable adjustment screw per step 1.
Figure 6-8 Gas Spring Mechanism
WARNINGWARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the forked retainer. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced at the factory.
Wire Clamp
Cable End
Forked Retainer
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-12 Section 6-5 - Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-5-6 Emergency Release Procedure
When the operator panel is at or near its highest position it is possible to see the gas spring mechanism with the Black and White Printer or the VCR removed. If the operator panel is stuck in the down position, it is not possible to see the gas spring mechanism as it is down behind the card rack. To avoid removing the Card Rack to make adjustments, try this procedure to raise the operator panel.
1.) Using 3mm Allen Wrench, remove the shoulder bolt holding the release lever on the handle.2.) Tilt the release lever down and pull on the cable as shown in the figure below. This will give
unlimited travel and hopefully release the gas spring. Push up on the operator panel while you are pulling on the cable.
3.) If you have no cable to pull (cable broken) or you are unable to release the gas spring in this manner, you must remove the Card Rack to gain access to the gas spring mechanism.
6-5-7 Procedure Completion1.) Install the VCR.2.) Install the Black-and-White printer.3.) Replace the front cover .4.) Replace the side covers.5.) If required, Power On / Bootup the scanner.
CAUTION Do NOT use excessive force!
Figure 6-9 Release Lever
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-13
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
Section 6-6Brake Arm Adjustment
Adjustments to the brake arm may be necessary if the pedals do not depress readily nor engage so the front wheels lock in place and do not swivel.
6-6-1 ToolsFlat-head screwdriver
6-6-2 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour + travel
6-6-3 Preparations1.) Remove the front bumper.
Figure 6-10 Brake Adjustment
TOP VIEW
Swivel Lock Pedal /Brake Pedal Release
Brake Pedal /Swivel Lock Release
Brake ArmAdjustment Rod
Front Brake ArmAdjustment Nuts
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-14 Section 6-6 - Brake Arm Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-6-4 Brake Arm Adjustment ProcedureTo adjust the brake arm it is recommended to separate both front adjustment nuts from the brake assembly.
2.) Remove the brake clamps that are inserted through a small hole in the front adjustment nuts and slipped over the nut at its collar.
3.) Loosen the front retaining nuts to allow room for adjustments.4.) With a screwdriver you can pry the front adjustment nuts away from their connectors in the brake
assembly.5.) Set the main brake - the brake assembly should be pulled to the left.6.) Seat the right adjustment rod into the right adjustment nut under the right front wheel as far as it will
go.7.) Seat the right front adjustment nut onto the adjustment rod as far as it will go.8.) In order to insure that the same length of adjustment rod is seated into the two adjustment nuts you
will turn the adjustment rod one turn out of the rear adjustment nut under the front wheel and turn the front adjustment nut off the adjustment rod a similar turn.
9.) Repeat this alternating rotation until the front adjustment nut lines up easily with the connector in the brake assembly.
10.)Push the adjustment nut onto the brake assembly connector and secure the retaining nut tight against the adjustment nut.
NOTE: Repeat the same procedure to adjust the swivel lock. The only difference would be to set the swivel lock prior to the adjustments.
6-6-5 Procedure Completion1.) Install the front bumper.
Figure 6-11 Front Adjustment Hardware
Brake Clamp Screwdriver
Adjustment NutsRetaining Nuts
Brake Assembly
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-15
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
Section 6-7Brake Adjustment
6-7-1 Front Wheel BrakesService adjustment to the front brakes involve setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below.
6-7-1-1 ToolsAllen Wrenches
6-7-1-2 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour + travel
6-7-1-3 Preparations
1.) Set the rear brakes to prevent the scanner from rolling.2.) Remove the front bumper.
6-7-1-4 Front Brake Adjustment Procedure
1.) Refer to Figure 6-12. Use the Allen wrench to add more pressure in order to get more braking action.
2.) If the brakes are too tight, loosen the adjustment with the Allen wrench.3.) Check the brakes and readjust as necessary before replacing the front bumper.
Figure 6-12 Front Brake Adjustment
Adjustment Hole Allen Wrench to Adjust Brake
Wheel Brake
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-16 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes AdjustmentService adjustment to the rear brakes involves setting the brake so it will properly “bite” the rear tire. The default setting should provide proper braking. If not, follow the procedures below to remove the rear wheel and adjust the brake.
6-7-2-1 ToolsBottle JackAllen Wrenches
6-7-2-2 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour + travel
6-7-2-3 Preparations
1.) Remove the left- and right-side covers.2.) Remove the upper rear cover.3.) Remove the lower rear cover.
WARNINGWARNING PRIOR TO ELEVATING SCANNER, VERIFY THAT THE FLOATING KEYBOARD IS LOCKED IN ITS LOWEST POSITION. VERIFY THAT THE FRONT BRAKE IS LOCKED AND THE SCANNER IS UNABLE TO SWIVEL. VERIFY THAT THE REAR BRAKES ARE IN THE LOCKED POSITION.
WARNINGWARNING USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN ELEVATING SCANNER. ELEVATING SCANNER WILL MAKE IT UNSTABLE WHICH COULD CAUSE THE SCANNER TO TIP OVER.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments 6-17
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
6-7-2 Rear Wheel Brakes Adjustment (cont’d)
6-7-2-4 Rear Wheel Removal Procedure4.) Elevate the scanner by placing the bottle jack on the back frame on the side of the bottom shield of
the wheel you will be removing. You can also use a block of wood as a lever to raise the scanner and place a second block of wood under the chassis to support the rear wheel off of the ground.
5.) Remove the four screws and remove the wheel from the scanner.6.) Use an allen wrench to adjust the brake so it will properly “bite” and release the rear tire.
6-7-2-5 Rear Wheel Installation Procedure
1.) After adjusting the rear brake, install the rear wheel on the scanner. Hand tighten the four screws.2.) Carefully lower the scanner and remove the bottle jack.3.) Tighten the four screws using the weight of the scanner to provide resistance.4.) Verify brake and scanner operation then replace all covers previously removed.
Figure 6-13 Rear Brake Adjustment
Figure 6-14 Rear Brake Adjustment
2 screws removed2 screws removed
from undersidefrom top
BrakeRear BrakeSet / Release
Handle
Area on either sideof bottom shield usedto elevate scanner and
remove rear wheel.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
6-18 Section 6-7 - Brake Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER6.FM
This page was intentionally left blank.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-1
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Chapter 7Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Section 7-1Overview
7-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 7This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Basic host, system, and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.
Table 7-1 Contents in Chapter 7
Section Description Page Number
7-1 Overview 7-1
7-2 Service Safety Considerations 7-2
7-3 Gathering Trouble Data 7-3
7-4 Screen Captures 7-13
7-5 Diagnostics 7-18
7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics 7-19
7-7 I/O Devices 7-24
7-8 Common Diagnostics 7-30
7-9 Utilities 7-33
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-2 Section 7-2 - Service Safety Considerations
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-2Service Safety Considerations
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNINGWARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNINGWARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNINGWARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-3
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-3Gathering Trouble Data
7-3-1 OverviewThere may be a time when it would be advantageous to capture trouble images and system data (logs) for acquisition through remote diagnostics (InSite) or to be sent back to the manufacturer for analysis. There are different options to acquire this data that would give different results.
7-3-2 Collecting Vital System InformationThe following information is necessary in order to properly analyze data or images being reported as a malfunction or being returned to the manufacturer:
- Product Name = LOGIQ™ 9
From the Utility>System>About screen:
Applications Software
- Software Version- Software Part Number
System Base Image Software
- Base Image Revision- Image Part Number
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-4 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-3 Collecting a Trouble Image with LogsIf the system malfunctions, press the Alt-D keys simultaneously. This Alt-D function is available at all times, and collects a screen capture of the image monitor, user-defined presets, and the following logs:
• Keyboard Shadow Log• Error Logs• Crash Log• Vital Product Data• DICOM Logs (Beginning with R3.x.x S/W)• Windows Event Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)• Windows Modem Log (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)• Diagnostic Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)• Service Logs (Beginning with R4.x.x S/W)
NOTE: Power Supply and Temperature logs are not currently being updated by the LOGIQ™ 9.
When Alt+D is pressed, a menu box opens. Enter the following information:
• System ID serial number.• Software version.• Date and time of occurrence.• Sequence of events leading to issue.• Is the issue repeatable?• Imaging mode, probe, preset/application.• Media brand, speed, capacity, type.• Save secondary image capture, cine loop, 4D multi-volume loop.
- A choice to store to a pre-formatted MOD (H: drive), CD-RW, USB memory stick, or to the Export directory D: drive (for remote viewing through InSite).
Figure 7-1 ALT+D Dialog Box
Example of R2.x.x screen Example of R3.x.x and after screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-5
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-3 Collecting a Trouble Image with Logs (cont’d)
NOTE: Restart the application before resuming clinical scanning.
NOTE: The USB memory stick option is only available in R4.0.x and after. To save to a USB memory stick you must insert the stick in the lower front of the console , prior to starting Alt-D, then the memory stick will appear as a destination. Do not attach the memory stick in the Wired Microphone port on the control panel.
NOTE: You MUST select H: or CD-RW as the destination device, otherwise the data is written to the default Export directory on the hard drive. The EXPORT directory is only used for InSite. It is not intended for FEs or Customer use; therefore, choose the H: drive which is the MOD or choose the CD-RW.
NOTE: NOTE: If writing to a CD be sure that it is preformatted.
The subsequent file is compressed and time stamped. The screen capture is a bitmap which eliminates the possibility of artifacts from compression.
Double check the CD or MOD that you made to ensure it contains at least two files. An example is shown in Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Example of Zipped Trouble Image & Logs File
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-6 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network SnifferA sniffer monitors network traffic and allows you to capture network data without redirecting or altering it.
1.) Access the Windows Desktop using the service dongleFrom the Start menu, select Programs > Distinct > Network Monitor.The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens (Figure 7-3).
2.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen (Figure 7-3), select CONFIGURE. The Configuration screen opens.
Figure 7-3 Distinct Network Monitor screen
Figure 7-4 Configuration screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-7
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
NOTE: Steps 3 - 9 describe how to filter the data so that you only record this system’s network activity.
If you prefer, you may skip the filter section and start the data capture now. If you do, you will capture all network activity, not just this system’s.
3.) On the Configuration screen (Figure 7-5), select the Filters tab > New Filter.Confirm “built-in templates” is selected, and select CREATE.The Select Filter Task screen opens (Figure 7-6).
.
Figure 7-5 Configuration - Filters tab
Figure 7-6 Select Filter Task screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-8 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
4.) On the Select Filter Task screen (Figure 7-6), select “Show only IP packets FROM/TO one or more IP addresses”, then select NEXT.The Enter Filter Settings screen opens (Figure 7-7).
5.) On the Enter Filter Settings screen, enter the IP address you wish to monitor, and click the ADD button (Figure 7-7). Repeat this step for all IP addresses you wish to add, then select FINISH.The Enter Filter Settings screen closes.
6.) On the Configuration Screen, select the Capture Tab (Figure 7-8).
Figure 7-7 Enter Filter Settings
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-9
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
7.) In the Filter to Apply field, select “My Computer”.
8.) Select CLOSE. The Configuration screen closes.
9.) On the Distinct Network Monitor Screen, select Capture > Packets and Statistics (Play).
NOTE: The Network Sniffer will now collect data until you select Capture > Stop.
10.)Double-click on the Go Mushashi icon to start the system application.11.)Perform the DICOM transaction you want to troubleshoot (such as Worklist Query, Send to PACS,
etc.).Perform the function several times to ensure the data is captured in the sniff.
Figure 7-8 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-10 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
12.)When the transaction finishes (or fails), select Ctrl+Alt+Del to open Task Manager.On BT07 systems and later, select Exit to close the application and return to Windows. Then open Windows Task Manager to open the Distinct Network Monitor screen.
13.)From the Task Manager Applications tab, select Distinct, and then select the Switch To button.The Distinct Network Monitor screen opens.
Figure 7-9 Capture Tab on Configuration Screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-11
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
14.)On the Distinct Network Monitor screen (Figure 7-3), select Capture > Stop.After stopping the data collection, a screen similar to Figure 7-10 opens.
15.)Select File > Save As. Enter the file name “D:\log\Sniffer\MyLog “. 16.)Select SAVE.
Figure 7-10 Capture Data sample
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-12 Section 7-3 - Gathering Trouble Data
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-3-4 Capturing Network Logs with Network Sniffer (cont’d)
17.)On the Save As Capture File Dialog (Figure 7-11), select SAVE.
18.)Check the D:\log\Sniffer directory. At a minimum, there should be the following two files: MyLog.cap, MyLog.num.
19.)Copy the files to media, or ask the OLC to upload the files if the system has remote connectivity.
Figure 7-11 Save As Capture File
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-13
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-4Screen Captures
There may be times when the customer or field engineer will want to capture a presentation on the screen so it may be recovered by the OnLine Center through InSite. This is accomplished by first saving the image(s) to the clipboard using a Print Key.
The P4 key is the factory default print key to accomplish a secondary screen capture. However, the default is for the video area only or the customer may have customized the P4 Key function. Therefore, screen capture should involve the following steps:
1.) Check and record any custom settings for the Print4 button.2.) Set the Print4 button to Whole Screen, Secondary Capture.3.) Capture the required screens to the Hard Drive, MOD, CD-R, DVD-R or USB Memory Stick.4.) Restore the Print4 button to it’s original settings.
7-4-1 Check and Record the P4 Key FunctionCheck the function of the Print 4 Key in the event that the customer may have made some custom settings.
1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.4.) In the Button field, select Print4.
The Connectivity/Buttons Screen will be displayed like the one shown in Figure 7-12 on page 7-13 .
Figure 7-12 Buttons Set Up Screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-14 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-1 Check and Record the P4 Key Function (cont’d)
P4 is the factory default Screen Capture Key. If it is not set to Whole Screen or Screen Capture, as shown in Figure 7-12, proceed to step 5 to record the customer’s custom settings.
5.) In the Destinations section, record the service that is displayed. The destinations list displays the following information:* Name: user defined during service configuration* Type: the type of service* Server: the device for which the service was configured* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
6.) In the Image generated section, record the parameters related to the service.
7-4-2 Setting the P4 Key to Screen CaptureIf the P4 Key is not set to screen capture:
1.) While on the Connectivity screen, with the Buttons tab displayed, go to the drop down selection menu in the Destinations section.
2.) From the drop down menu select CopyToWflow_01>Image to Buffer>MyComputer>Out.3.) Ensure that the Image generated section for capture Area is set to Whole Screen, secondary
Capture and No Image Compression.4.) The P4 Key should now be set up for whole screen capture, sending the screens to the image
buffer (clipboard).
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-15
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-3 Capturing a ScreenThe following is a generic process to capture any screen from the scanner:
1.) Navigate to and display the image/screen to be captured.2.) Press P4. This will place a snapshot of the screen on the “clipboard” displayed at the bottom
of the scan image display.
3.) Select SCAN from the touch panel to view the image screen and the snapshots displayed on the bottom.
4.) Highlight the snapshot to be stored to the system hard drive, MOD or CD-R.5.) Select Menu on the right side of the image screen, then highlight and select SAVE AS.
Figure 7-13 Select Image to Capture
Figure 7-14 Menu > Save As
Clipboard Thumbnails
Menu
Save As
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-16 Section 7-4 - Screen Captures
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-3 Capturing a Screen (cont’d)
6.) A Save dialog box will be opened. Choose d:\export folder as the archive location to save the image on the hard disk, MOD or CD-R.
7-4-4 Reset the P4 Key to Customer’s FunctionalityIf the customer had programmed the P4 Key to a function other than screen capture, restore that functionality recorded in 7-4-1 on page 7-13. Refer to Figure 7-12.
1.) Select Utility from the Touch Panel.2.) Select Connectivity from the Utilities Menu.3.) Select the Buttons tab on the Connectivity screen.4.) In the Button field, select Print4.5.) In the Destinations section, select the service(s) recorded in step 5, Section 7-4-1. The
destinations list displays the following information:* Name: user defined during service configuration* Type: the type of service* Server: the device for which the service was configured* Dir: direction: output, input, or both (I+O)
NOTE: Only output services can be associated to the print keys.
6.) In the Image generated section, select the parameters related to the service recorded in step 6, Section 7-4-1.
Figure 7-15 Save Dialog Box
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-17
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-4-5 Ctrl-PrintScreen ShortcutStarting with R4.x.x software, a Ctrl-PrintScreen shortcut is available for quickly capturing the image displayed on the system. Images captured using this shortcut are saved in the D:\export directory using both the JPEG (.jpg) and raw DICOM (.dcm) formats.
7-4-5-1 To Capture a Screen Image Using the Shortcut
1.) With the desired image displayed on the screen, press Ctrl and PrtSc keys simultaneously.2.) From the touchpanel, select Utilities -> Service -> Scanner Utilities -> Image, Compress, and Delete
Utilities.3.) Enter a checkmark in the checkbox next to the image(s) to save in the D:\export directory.4.) Select Compress File.
A compressed file of the images is stored in d:\export. You may rely on the date and time of the Ctrl+PrtSc procedure to identify the most recent image recorded. The uncompressed files are stored in d:\export\service\image.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-18 Section 7-5 - Diagnostics
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-5Diagnostics
NOTE: Detach probes and reboot system after performing any diagnostics.
As described in Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory), the service platform uses a web-based user interface (UI) to provide access to common service components.
The Diagnostic home page displays a listing of test categories consisting of Acquisition Diagnostics, I/O Devices and Common Diagnostics. Expand the desired main category to select groups or individual tests.
Figure 7-16 Global Service User Interface Diagnostic Screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-19
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-6Acquisition Diagnostics
NOTE: After performing any diagnostics, detach probes and reboot the system.
Acquisition Diagnostics is one of three main headings under the GSUI Diagnostics Tab.
Individual selections run diagnostics and return status information identifying any problems.
When you select a test to run, the display changes as shown.
1.) Instructions Frame- Displays either a test-specific text or the default instructions.
2.) Status Frame- Initially displays the last known status for a selected diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts,
the frame displays the “current” status of all test results.- The Status Frame also contains the user interface elements used for Diagnostic Control and
Operator Feedback.3.) Execute Button
- This switch has two modes - each with appropriate text:- Execute - to start the diagnostic- Abort - to stop a diagnostic
Figure 7-17 Customer Acquisition Diagnostics
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-20 Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-6 Acquisition Diagnostics (cont’d)
4.) Loop Count- This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values of 4 digits or less. When the
switch is configured as an “execute” switch and pressed, the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic.
5.) Progress Indicator- Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user.
6.) Short Text Message- Displays brief messages about the test’s progress during execution.
7.) Status Frame Background Color- Initially gray, the Status Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to
indicate completion status.- Code Status Fail = Red- Code Status Pass = Green- Code Status neither Pass nor Fail (Example: Aborted) = Gray (default color).
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-21
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-6-1 Diagnostic Listings
Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing
Diagnostic/Utility Function
SCB PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the SCB via the secondary PCI bus
SCB Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
SCB DSP Diag Tests the Scan Sequencer’s DSP and associated components.
SCB Scan Bus Diag Tests the local Scan Bus and the associated system timing.
SCB Image Port Diag Tests the Image Port’s functionality.
BMP PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the BMP via the PCI bus.
BMP Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
BMP Signal Path Diag Tests the entire BMP signal path.
EQ PCI Interface Diag Tests the host’s ability to communicate with the registers and memory on the EQ via the PCI bus.
EQ Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, including registers.
EQ Signal Path Diag Tests the entire EQ signal path.
TD Memory Diag Tests all of the on-board memory, for all installed TD boards, including registers.
TD Analog Reference Diag Tests the AD_REF and VREF voltages on the TD.
Comprehensive Signal Path Diag Tests the signal path of every channel from the TD Rigel Transmitter Memories to the SCB, via both the EQ and the BMP.
TD Access Diag Tests all of the Access Modes utilized for Host/TD communication as well as Channel RAM to Rigel transfers.
Analog TGC Diag Tests the generation of the analog TGC voltage.
XDIF Interface Diag Tests all of the XDIF functionality that is testable without a probe or probe simulator attached to the system, including the IIC communication.
Power Supply Diag Tests the system voltages available on the EQ.
Temperature Diag Tests the temperature of the system, wherever available.
Noise Floor Diag Measures the noise floor of the system. The noise floor will be calculated form IQ data received without a signal source.
Loopback Diag Tests the analog front-end of the system.
Acquisition Hardware Information Utility Writes a file for each Acquisition Hardware FRU containing all Vital Product Data.
Transmit Utility - Start
Transmit Utility - Change Channel
Transmit Utility - Stop
Receive Utility - Single Frame Receives signal on one channel at a time.
Receive Utility - 8 Frames
Visual Channel Utility
High Voltage Reset Utility Tests whether all TD boards can detect a high voltage fault.
Set VRF Utility Set the analog VREF to a specified value.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-22 Section 7-6 - Acquisition Diagnostics
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
NOTE: In R4.x software and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed.
.
Set TGC Utility Set the analog TGC to a specified value.
Probe Select Utility Select a probe connector to be active.
Probe ID Read Utility Read the Probe ID of all installed probes.
Touchscreen Calibration Utility. Calibrates the Touch Screen.
Start Touchscreen Verification Utility. Helps verify the touchscreen calibration.
Front-End Calibration Utility Measures the Front End DC Offset, Gain, and Phase.
System Restart Test system restart
System Shutdown. Tests system shutdown.
OP Panel Interface Tests the OP Panel interface.
System Power Button Test Tests the system Power Button.
IIC PCI-DGVIC Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the PCI-DGVIC board
IIC IIO Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the Internal IO board.
IIC EIO Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.
IIC EIO Upper Diag Tests the IIC slave devices on the External IO lower board.
PC2IP IIC Troubleshooting ProcedureStep1 through 5
Procedure featured with tests that guides and helps you to troubleshoot PC2IP IIC failures.
Footswitch Test Utility Tests the system Power Button.
PC Diagnostics Interactive tests Tests std PC components (CPU, Hard Drive, Memory, CD/DVD drives) automatically.
PC Diagnostics Non-Interactive tests Tests standard PC components (keyboard, audio, monitor) non- interactively.
DANGER DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNINGWARNING IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED FROM AN OPERATING LOGIQ™ 9, SOME METAL SURFACES MAY BE WARM ENOUGH TO POSE A POTENTIAL HEAT HAZARD IF TOUCHED, EVEN WHILE IN SHUT DOWN MODE.
WARNINGWARNING IF A LOGIQ™ 9 IS ENERGIZED, AND THE FRONT END POWER SUPPLY (FEPS) COVER IS REMOVED, THE VOLTAGE TEST POINTS POSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WARNINGWARNING Use all Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) such as gloves, safety shoes, safety glasses, and kneeling pad, to reduce the risk of injury.
Table 7-2 Acquisition Diagnostics and Utility Listing (Continued)
Diagnostic/Utility Function
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-23
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-6-1-1 Calibration Utilities
Touchscreen Calibration: Follow the directions on the Touchscreen. As each of the cross-hairs appear, touch them with your finger or a pencil eraser. You MUST hold your finger on the cross-hair until it moves to the next location. If you just tap the calibration cross-hair, there is a better than average chance your calibration will be corrupt.
NOTE: Do NOT use sharp, pointed objects to press on the Touchscreen. You should also be careful if you have long, sharp finger nails. The Touchscreen can be damaged by sharp objects.
After all the cross-hairs are touched the screen is calibrated.
Start/Stop Touchscreen Verification: Select START TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE. The Start Touchscreen Verification brings up a grid. Each time you touch the screen a small red dots appears.
To terminate the verification, select STOP TOUCHSCREEN VERIFICATION and EXECUTE.
Front-End Calibration Utility - DC Offset: All probes must be disconnected. Measures the DC offset of each channel and writes a calibration file for use in zeroing the offset. Application code may utilize these values to zero each channel's DC offset, by programming the Rigel beam forming ASIC's on TD's.
NOTE: In R4.x and after: Front End Calibration Utility has been removed. Do not run this diagnostic test in previous versions of software.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-24 Section 7-7 - I/O Devices
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-7I/O Devices
lThe Operator Panel functionality can be tested using a program (GE Test App) available through the Service Platform.
7-7-0-1 Launching the Op Panel Test
1.) Log onto the Service Platform, and select the Diagnostics tab.2.) Locate the Op Panel Test under I/O Devices > Op Panel Utilities > Op Panel Interface.3.) Select Start to launch the GE Test App.
An hour glass displays on the Service Platform window. The GE Test App window is hidden behind the Service Platform window.
4.) When the hour glass displays, minimize the Service Platform window to reveal the GE Test App window. See Figure 7-18.a.) To minimize, move the cursor to the “-” minus icon at upper right hand corner of the window.b.) Press the Set key.
5.) On the Startup tab, select the Attach button to connect the Op Panel to the test interface. The other buttons on the Startup tab will now be active. See Figure 7-19.
Figure 7-18 Select System Type
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-25
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-6-1 Diagnostic Listings (cont’d)
6.) Select the tabs to test the various features of the Op Panel.
7-7-1 Trackball TabTest the trackball functionality by moving the pointer over the blue box. See Figure 7-20. Verify that the X and Y position are updated as the pointer is moved.
Test the Left and Right select buttons by pressing each button on the op panel. Verify that the corresponding button is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-19 Attach and GE Test App Startup Tab
Figure 7-20 Trackball Tab
Attach Button Active Detach and Other Buttons Active
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-26 Section 7-7 - I/O Devices
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-2 Keyboard TabTest the keyboard functionality by typing on the keyboard. Verify that the corresponding key is highlighted when each key is pressed. See Figure 7-21.
NOTE: The keyboard test does not give an indication when the Print Screen button is pressed.
7-7-3 Slidepots TabTest the slidepot (TGC) functionality by moving each slidepot through its range. See Figure 7-22. Verify that the visual and numeric position of the slide pot are updated as the slide pot is moved.
Test the LED for each slide pot by pressing on the LED buttons. See Figure 7-22. Visually verify the LED functionality on the upper operator panel.
Figure 7-21 Keyboard Tab
Figure 7-22 Slidepots Tab
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-27
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-4 Encoders TabTest the encoder functionality by rotating each encoder knob. See Figure 7-23. Verify that the position is updated as the encoder is moved.
Test the encoder button selection function by pressing each knob on the op panel. Verify that the corresponding knob is highlighted when each knob is pressed. See Figure 7-23.
7-7-5 Pushbuttons TabTest the pushbutton functionality by pressing each button on the operator panel. Verify that the corresponding pushbutton is highlighted when each button is pressed. See Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-23 Encoders Tab
Figure 7-24 Pushbuttons Tab
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-28 Section 7-7 - I/O Devices
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-6 LEDs TabTest the LED functionality by selecting each button or knob on the GE Test App. See Figure 7-25. Verify that the corresponding LED is illuminated when each button or knob is selected.
7-7-7 Touchscreen TabTest the touchscreen functionality by pressing on the touch screen of the upper operator panel. Verify that the press is indicated in the black window by a highlighted circle. See Figure 7-26.
Figure 7-25 LEDs Tab
Figure 7-26 Touchscreen Tab
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-29
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-7-8 Ending the Program1.) When you have finished testing the Op Panel, close the GE Test App.2.) In the Service Platform window, click on the Stop button.3.) Close the Service Platform window.4.) Shutdown the system and reboot.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-30 Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-8Common Diagnostics
Common Diagnostics is the second main heading under the GSUI heading of Diagnostics.
Figure 7-27 shows the top level menu choices under Common Diagnostics. The subheadings and their respective diagnostic/troubleshooting menu choices are called out and described in the sections below.
7-8-1 UtilitiesProvides two selections:
7-8-1-1 Disruptive ModeAllows you to enable or disable disruptive mode troubleshooting.
7-8-1-2 System ShutdownAllows for system shutdown from the diagnostic menu. Select to Restart System or Shutdown System. Also, select to retain Disruptive Mode or Not.
After submitting to restart or shutdown a confirmation screen gives one last chance to confirm or cancel the request.
Figure 7-27 Common Diagnostics
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-31
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-8-2 PC Diagnostics
7-8-2-1 Non-Interactive Tests - BT04 and earlier• CPU Test• Hard Drive Tests• Memory Tests• CD/DVD Drive Tests (BEP3.x only)• Video Test• USB Test• PCI Board Configuration Test• SCSI Device Test (This test normally fails since the Logiq 9 does not have any SCSI device)• AGP Video Card Test (This test is aborted, n/a for L9 BT04 or earlier)• Network Test
7-8-2-2 Non-Interactive Tests - BT06, BT07, BT09• Essential Tests (PCI bus, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Hard drive status and Random seek,
Network interface loopback only). It runs some of the tests below. • System board (it tests PCI Bus communication, CMOS memory, CPU, RAM, Parallel Port and
Network Interface loopback only)• Hard disk surface (over an hour, tests Drive status, Random seek, Surface scan test)• Hard disk quick test (takes about 6 min)• PCI Bus• Video card (it takes about 6 min)• Network interface (system needs to be connected to the network)• CMOS• DRAM memory• Parallel port
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-32 Section 7-8 - Common Diagnostics
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-8-3 PC Diagnostics (Interactive Tests)• Audio Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)• Keyboard Test• Midi - LOGIQ™ 9 does not support MIDI channels. If you try and run the MIDI test, the test may fail
(Not available in BT04, BT06, BT07, or BT09)• Monitor Test (not available in BT06, BT07, or BT09)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7-33
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
Section 7-9Utilities
7-9-1 Dicom Verify UtilityThis utility provides an easy way to verify DICOM connectivity between the scanner and DICOM devices on the network. See Figure 7-28.
NOTE: To monitor possible network issues for BT06 and later systems, the Dicom Verify Utility can be placed in a loop to run continuously until turned off. The BT06 Dicom Verify Utility screen has a checkbox at the bottom to enable the continuous loop.
1.) Enter the AE Title, IP Address, and Port Number for the DICOM device.2.) Click on the Verify button.
Figure 7-28 Dicom Verify Utility - BT04
Figure 7-29 Dicom Verify Utility - BT06 or Later
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
7-34 Section 7-9 - Utilities
1/18/10CHAPTER7.FM
7-9-1 Dicom Verify Utility (cont’d)
3.) Examine the utility error output. See Figure 7-30 for an example.
• In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.
• In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.• In the event of a hard drive failure, see 7-9-1-1 "Hard Drive Failure" on page 7-34.
7-9-1-1 Hard Drive FailureThe symptoms of hard drive failures are as follows:
• The results of hard drive diagnostics may indicate bad sectors on the hard drive.• The system may not boot because of bad sectors on the hard drive.• Attempts to re-image the C: partition may fail because of bad sectors on the C: partition.• The system may not boot and displays blue screen stop errors (dark blue screen with white text -
“blue screen of death”).In the event of a hard drive failure, determine whether or not the customer requires recovery of data. If the customer requires data recovery, collect the following information from the customer:
• Customer contact name• Customer contact phone• Customer contact address• What data they require (e.g. studies for a date range or everything)• Whether the customer wants their data on CD or DVD mediaTell the customer GE will attempt to recover as much data as possible. Write a complaint and include the above information, and do not discard or return the failed hard drive. A member of the Complaint Handling Unit or the Installed Base team will contact the author of the complaint and provide instructions for delivery of the failed hard drive to engineering. Engineering will then recover as much data as possible and send the recovered data directly to the customer.
Figure 7-30 Example Error Messages
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-1
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Chapter 8Replacement Procedures
Section 8-1Overview
8-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 8This chapter contains replacement procedures for different modules and their subsystems. Follow all safety precautions while servicing and repairing this equipment.
Table 8-1 Chapter 8 Contents
Section Description Page Number
8-1 Overview 8-1
8-2 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1 8-4
8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2 8-7
8-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5 8-10
8-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x 8-13
8-6 Before Starting a Software Load 8-17
8-7 Image Management Guide 8-18
8-8 Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-26
8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x 8-33
8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later 8-38
8-11 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior 8-44
8-12 Loading Application Software - R6.x.x 8-49
8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later 8-56
8-14 Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only 8-61
8-15 System Setup 8-65
8-16 Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-70
8-17 Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure 8-72
8-18 Gas Shock Replacement Procedure 8-74
8-19 Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure 8-86
8-20 Frog Leg Angle Adjustment 8-92
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-2 Section 8-1 - Overview
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-1-2 Definitions of Left, Right, Front and Back
Left Front Rear RightFigure 8-1 Console Views
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-3
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-1-3 Returning/Shipping Probes and Repair PartsEquipment being returned must be clean and free of blood and other infectious substances.
GEHC policy states that body fluids must be properly removed from any part or equipment prior to shipment. GEHC employees, as well as customers, are responsible for ensuring that parts/equipment have been properly decontaminated prior to shipment. Under no circumstance should a part or equipment with visible body fluids be taken or shipped from a clinic or site (for example, body coils or an ultrasound probe). The purpose of the regulation is to protect employees in the transportation industry, as well as the people who will receive or open this package.
NOTE: The US Department of Transportation (DOT) has ruled that “items that were saturated and/or dripping with human blood that are now caked with dried blood; or which were used or intended for use in patient care” are “regulated medical waste” for transportation purposes and must be transported as a hazardous material.
WARNINGWARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNINGWARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNINGWARNING When you return the used BEP to your local parts organization, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the BEP to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
WARNINGWARNING Before you dispose of the hard drive, make sure you remove ALL PATIENT DATA from the hard drive, given that the hard drive is still functional.In some countries, you may be required to delete all software from the disk before returning the hard drive to the parts warehouse. Follow your local policies.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-4 Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-2Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
8-2-1 ManpowerOne person, .5 hour + travel
8-2-2 ToolsPhillips screwdriver
8-2-3 PreparationsWe anticipate, with the exception of a failure, batteries will only need to be replaced once every three years.
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-2-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.2.) Remove the four screws from the power supply battery pack cover plate.3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.4.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
Figure 8-2 Removing / Installing the Power Supply Battery Pack
1 2
3 4
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-5
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1
1.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws removed .3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Figure 8-3 Power Supply Battery Pack
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
Table 8-2 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-2. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-3 Standby Mode
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks
In Line20A Fuse
Battery 1
Battery 2
Compression tape used tominimize battery pack movement
while installed in chassis
Heat-shrink holds batteries togetherand insulates terminals.
Spacerseperatesbatteries
+ -- +
Label to beattached tothis surface
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-6 Section 8-2 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 1
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-2-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 1 (cont’d)
The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the OFF condition. The OFF condition is:
- Circuit Breaker in the OFF position- System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature.
To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
8-2-6 Battery DisposalPlease make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-7
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-3Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2
8-3-1 ManpowerOne person, 15 minutes + travel
8-3-2 ToolsPhillips screwdriver
8-3-3 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side covers.
8-3-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.2.) Remove the screw from the power supply battery pack cover plate. See Figure 8-4.
3.) Tip the power supply battery pack cover plate forward and lift up to remove, refer to Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-4 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-8 Section 8-3 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 2
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-3-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)
4.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wire.5.) Remove the power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
8-3-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 21.) Slide the new power supply battery pack into its position in the Back End Processor.2.) Attach the power supply battery pack cover plate and secure it with the screw removed .3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
5.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.6.) Replace the left-side cover .7.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system .
Figure 8-5 BEP 2 Power Supply Battery Pack Cover Plate Tipped Forward
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-9
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-3-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 2 (cont’d)
8.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
8-3-6 Battery DisposalPlease make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
Table 8-3 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-3. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready
for use. “
4-2-3 Standby Mode
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-10 Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-4Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
8-4-1 ManpowerOne person, 15 minutes + travel
8-4-2 ToolsPhillips screwdriver
8-4-3 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-4-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove the cover of the Back End Processor.2.) Unplug the sidefan connection. Be careful not to pinch the wires when replacing cover.
Figure 8-6 BEP 3 with cover removed
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-11
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-4-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires. See Figure 8-7.
4.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-8.
5.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor 3.x. See Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-7 Disconnect Battery Pack Connection Wires
Figure 8-8 BEP 3.x One Power Supply Battery Pack Removed
Figure 8-9 BEP 3.x Both Power Supply Battery Packs Removed
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-12 Section 8-4 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.5
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-4-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 3 / BEP 3.51.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.2.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.3.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
4.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor removed.5.) Replace the left-side cover6.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system7.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
8-4-6 Battery DisposalPlease make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
Table 8-4 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-4. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-3 Standby Mode
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-13
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-5Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
8-5-1 ManpowerOne person, 15 minutes + travel
8-5-2 ToolsPhillips screwdriver
8-5-3 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left-side cover.
8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x1.) Remove the cover from the Back End Processor (BEP) by loosening the thumb screw on the back.2.) Unplug the side fan.
NOTICE Whenever accessing internal BEP components, ensure the wires are clear. Avoid pinching or damaging the wires or cables.
Figure 8-10 BEP 4.x
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-14 Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d)
3.) Disconnect the battery pack connection wires.
4.) Remove the 8 screws holding the battery pack bracket.
Figure 8-11 Battery Pack Connection Wires
Figure 8-12 BEP 4.x
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-15
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-5-4 Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure - BEP 4.x (cont’d)
5.) Take bracket off.
6.) Remove the first power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.7.) Remove the other power supply battery pack from the Back End Processor.
Figure 8-13 Remove Bracket
Figure 8-14 Remove Battery Pack
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-16 Section 8-5 - Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure - BEP 4.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-5-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure - BEP 4.x1.) Slide the new power supply battery packs into position in the Back End Processor.2.) Replace the bracket.3.) Apply Power .... turn the system on.4.) Connect the new battery pack to the power supply connector while power is applied to the Back End
Processor. This will avoid a possible spark while connecting the battery.
5.) Reattach the side fan wires.6.) Attach the cover for the Back End Processor. Be careful not to pinch the fan wires when replacing
the cover.7.) Replace the left-side cover.8.) If required, Power On/Boot-up the system.9.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
8-5-6 Battery DisposalPlease make sure replaced batteries are included in the recycling loop.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the power supply without power applied to the Back End Processor. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
To avoid the spark, connect the battery with power applied to the BackEnd Processor.
Table 8-5 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-5. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-3 Standby Mode
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-17
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-6Before Starting a Software Load
8-6-1 PrintersAny customized print settings will be lost when the new base image is loaded prior to R6.x.x. If the customer has any on board, peripheral, or network printers, any settings they have made in the device driver, such as Gray Scale Images, will be lost. These printer settings will need to be recorded. Go to Utilities>System>Peripherals>Printers in order to record the printer settings.
8-6-2 Save Connectivity Settings
8-6-2-1 DICOM TCPIP Settings
NOTE: DICOM Workflows and DICOM Device Configurations are saved when you preform the User-Defined backup procedure in Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.
If you want to Import exams back on to your system after the software load, you should record any vital DICOM data before proceeding.
1.) Select Utilities>Connectivity>TCPIP tab and record all information on that tab with particular attention to:- The “Enable DHCP” box should NOT be checked- Computer Name: ______________________________- IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________- Subnet Mask: ______/________/________/________- Default Gateway: ______/________/________/________- Remote Archive IP-Address: ______/________/_________/_________- Remote Archive Name: ______________________________________
For BT07 and later, service settings can be saved along with the user-defined configuration.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-18 Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-7Image Management Guide
8-7-1 Managing Patient Data and PresetsSave to MOD, CD-R or DVD-R any patient data, images, and system presets that have been stored or configured. Installing the base operating software may delete some patient data, images and system setups saved on the system.
NOTE: Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base operating software.
8-7-1-1 Patient Images and DataEZBackup/Move
Use this to copy both patient data and images for specified patient(s) from LOGIQ™ 9 to DVD-R, CD-R or MOD.
Refer to Section 8-7-2 "EZBackup/Move" on page 8-19.
8-7-1-2 Preset DataUser-Defined Backup Protocols
Use this to copy User-Defined presets before doing a base image software load.
Refer to Section 8-7-3 "User-Defined Backup Protocols" on page 8-22.
8-7-1-3 Backup MediaDVD Media Requirements
Only DVD-R. DO NOT use DVD-RW or DVD+R.
CD-ROM Media Requirements
Only use CD-R CD-ROMs, DO NOT use CD-RW CD-ROMs. Also, the CD-R CD-ROM MUST support 16x writing speed or greater.
CD-ROM Handling Tips
To eject the CD, always press F3. DO NOT press the eject button on the CD-ROM/DVD Drive.
Always finalize the CD-ROM. This allows you to read the CD-ROM on any other PC.
DO NOT finalize the CD if you want to add more images to the CD.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-19
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-2 EZBackup/MoveEZBackup/Move allows you to manage hard disk space (move images off the hard drive) while maintaining the patient database on the scanner, as well as to back up the patient database and images.
1.) Specify the EZBackup/Move setup on the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page.
2.) To start the EZBackup/Move procedure, go to the Patient menu and select the EZBackup/Move button at the lower right-hand position of the Patient list. The EZBackup/Move Wizard starts.
Figure 8-15 Utility > System > Backup/Restore Preset Menu
Table 8-6 EZBackup/Move Preset Parameters
Preset Parameter Description
Reminder Dialog Interval days Specify the number of days after the last backup that you want the system to prompt you to perform an EZBackup/Move procedure (only for moving images).
Enable Reminder Dialog Select to activate the EZBackup/Move reminder pop-up dialog.
Backup files older than in days The system will backup images older than the number of days specified here. If you enter a zero (0), then all of the images from today on will be backed up.
Move files after backup Check this box to delete images from the hard drive after the backup.
Media Select media type.
Media capacity for estimate (MB) Specify the capacity of the backup media.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-20 Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-2 EZBackup/Move (cont’d)
NOTE: EZBackup/Move can take up to 20 minutes (or longer, depending on the size of the backup). Make sure to schedule this at the same time daily, when no patients are scheduled.
3.) Verify the information on the first page of the EZBackup/Move Wizard, then press Next.
Figure 8-16 New Patient EZBackup/Move Example
Figure 8-17 EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-21
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-2 EZBackup/Move (cont’d)
NOTE: You do not need to format the media prior to performing an EZBackup/Move.
NOTE: EZBackup/Move cannot span a single image across two (2) or more media. Therefore, if EZBackup/Move encounters an image that is greater than the capacity of the media, it skips the oversized image.
NOTE: EZBackup/Move does not store images to media in sequential order. Instead it maximizes the most amount of images per media.
4.) Verify the information on the EZBackup/Move Wizard, Page 2. The backup may span multiple media. This page tells you how many media you need to do this backup. After you have gathered the media (allow for one extra media, just in case), you are ready to begin the backup. Press Next.
5.) A pop-up message appears that provides you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the media. Press OK.
6.) The status menu appears. When the backup/move has been completed, press Next.
NOTE: When/if you need to insert the next media, a message appears providing you with the media label. Label the media, then insert the next media and press OK.
7.) When the backup is complete, the Backup completed page appears.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-22 Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols1.) Insert the backup media. Format the CD-R or MOD. (DVD-R do not need to be formatted.) Select
the Utility tab on the Measurement Selection Menu. Select Connectivity->Tools. Label the media.A pop-up menu displays when the formatting is complete, see Figure 8-20.
2.) Press Ok to continue. Verify that the format was successful.
Figure 8-18 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen
Figure 8-19 Format MOD/CD-ROM Screen - BT04 and after
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-23
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)
3.) On the Touch Panel, press Utility.4.) On the Utility Touch Panel, press System.5.) On the monitor display, select Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore screen opens.
NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on with administrator privileges.
Figure 8-20 Format Successful Pop-up Menu
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-24 Section 8-7 - Image Management Guide
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)
Figure 8-21 Backup Menu- Prior to R4.x.x
Figure 8-22 Backup / Restore Screen - R4.x.x and R6.x.x
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-25
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-7-3 User-Defined Backup Protocols (cont’d)
NOTE: The detailed section of this menu decouples the user defined configuration above. This allows you to selectively restore what you want to restore across multiple machines. Refer to Chapter 16 “Customizing Your System” in the Basic User Manual for more information.
6.) In the Backup list, select the items you wish to backup.7.) In the Media field, select MOD, CD or DVD.8.) Select Backup.9.) Answer ‘Ok’ to the following pop-up message as many times as the number of items you are
backing up.The system performs the backup. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the Backup/Restore screen.
10.)After the backup is complete, press F3 to eject the media.
Figure 8-23 Back-up Confirmation Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-26 Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-8Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-8-1 PreparationsSave Connectivity Settings as described in 8-6-2 on page 8-17.
NOTE: Be sure there are no images in the clipboard or opened exams before reloading base image software.
NOTE: After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE: While it is believed to be unnecessary, it would not hurt to disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers.
NOTE: Be sure all printers are connected and turned on. If a printer is plugged in at this time it will automatically install and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.
NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
If the system you are loading software on has a BEP 2, please complete steps 1 - step 5 below. If the system you are loading software on has a BEP1 or BEP3, proceed to step 2 of 8-8-2 "Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-28.
NOTE: How to differentiate BEPs easily- If the MOD is 640M it should be BEP1. - If the MOD is 1.3G it should be BEP2.X.- There is no MOD on BEP3 and it has two USB ports.
8-8-1-1 To Prepare to Load Base Image
1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.WARNINGWARNING Risk of electrical shock, system must be turned off and disconnected from power
source. Cord must be controlled at all times. Wait at least 20 seconds for the charge on the FEPS capacitors to bleed off before handling the power supply board.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-27
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-1-1 To Prepare to Load Base Image (cont’d)
2.) Remove the left side cover.3.) Unplug the microphone input (C11) from the BEP, see Figure 8-24 on page 8-27 .4.) Wrap the cable end of the plug using electrical tape to isolate it from the BEP.
By disconnecting the microphone input, you eliminate feedback during the software load. This input may have been unplugged previously, if so, be sure it is wrapped and leave it disconnected.
5.) Replace the left side cover.
Figure 8-24 BEP2 Cable Identification
C11 Audio In
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-28 Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior
1.) Turn on the scanner.2.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, Disk 1 of 2” into the CD-ROM/DVD
drive.
NOTE: There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load CD version for BEP 2.x or BEP3.
3.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the On / Off switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the On / Off switch to turn amber.
NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
4.) If the system will not shutdown normally, hold down the Standby Switch until the light turns from green to amber.
WARNINGWARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner.
Figure 8-25 Shutdown Dialog Box
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-29
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
5.) Turn on the scanner. You will see a message displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-26 on page 8-29 .
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
6.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
Figure 8-26 Base Load Warning Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-30 Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
The first choice is to load the complete hard drive.
[1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.
NOTE: APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!
Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the complete base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
Figure 8-27 Base Load Option Screen
Figure 8-28 Base Load Option 1 Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-31
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
The second choice is to load only the bootable portion of the hard drive partition, the “C” partition. This is not an option for a new hard drive that has not been previously partitioned for proper LOGIQ™ 9 operation.
[2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is NOT lost.
NOTE: DO NOT USE THIS OPTION ON A BRAND NEW SYSTEM. IT IS INTENDED FOR RECOVERY OF A SYSTEM THAT WILL NOT BOOT UP. APPLICATION SOFTWARE WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED. ALL PATIENT DATA IS PRESERVED.
This selection will leave the remaining drive partitions intact.
Figure 8-29 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
The third choice,
[3] Exit to the A:\ prompt. Is intended for manufacturing use only.
This is NOT an option as it is intended for manufacturing use only.
If you select Option 3 by mistake, power off the system. Hold down the On / Off switch until the light turns amber then turn the system back on.
Table 8-7 LOGIQ™ 9 Drive Partition and Usage
Drive Partition Usage
C System Files and Applications
D User Define and Presets
E Patient Archive Data
F File Swap Area
Figure 8-29 Base Load Option 2 Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-32 Section 8-8 - Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-8-2 Base Image Load Procedure - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1 or Option 2, you will see a screen showing Norton Ghost. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 mins).
7.) When prompted, remove Disk 1 from the CDROM/DVD drive. Insert Disk 2 and press Enter to continue.
NOTE: There is only one disk for the BEP 1 Base Image.
A message, as shown in Figure 8-30, will be displayed when the process is complete.
8.) Remove the disk from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: Remove the CD-ROM from the drive; otherwise you will be repeating the Base System Software Load process when the system boots up.
9.) After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.10.)When the system reboots it will automatically log on to start checking hardware. This is a normal
process and should be allowed to run to completion.
NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes will appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 3-4 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
11.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select Yes.The system will come up and map the drives, then the system will reboot again automatically. After the second reboot, the system will come up into the Windows mode.
12.)If the customer has a USB (Digital Printer) to be installed, plug it in now. The system is still in Windows mode and should recognize the printer and install the necessary driver.
NOTE: If the printer is installed while in application mode, excessive CPU time will be consumed and the system will become very slow to unusable. Shutting down and rebooting will clear the condition. The printer will function correctly.
13.)Proceed to Section 8-11 "Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-44.
Figure 8-30 Base Load Complete
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-33
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system. This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT04 systems (as well as systems upgraded to BT04), software version R4.x.x.
NOTE: Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.
NOTE: After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE: Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
NOTE: Be sure all USB devices are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.
NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
1.) Turn on the scanner.2.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.
3.) Perform a Backup from the Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore page. You need to backup the Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, Voice Training, and Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.
4.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive.
5.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image, into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.
WARNINGWARNING The next steps will destroy ALL data on the Scanner
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-34 Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
6.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.
NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.7.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.8.) Turn on the scanner. A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure
8-32 on page 8-34 .
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
9.) Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
Figure 8-31 Shutdown Dialog Box
Figure 8-32 Base Load Warning Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-35
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
10.)Select [1] Load the complete disk - All existing data will be lost.
NOTE: YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED.
11.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
Figure 8-33 Base Load Option Screen
WARNINGWARNING ALL PATIENT DATA (IF ANY) WILL BE DESTROYED!
Figure 8-34 Base Load Option 1 Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-36 Section 8-9 - Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
Once you have chosen to continue with Option 1, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).
Figure 8-35 Norton Ghost screen.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30, is displayed when the process has completed.
12.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the system boots up.
13.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.
Figure 8-36 Base Load Complete
If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully com-pleted. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-37
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-9 Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button.
14.)When the system reboots it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process and should be allowed to run to completion.
NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive. Wait for the “System Settings Change”dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
15.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-37 Restart Windows Message
16.)You now need to run the Firmware executable to update the DVD/CD-ROM drives.
a.) Determine the type of drive this LOGIQ 9 supports by right clicking on My Computer (left Set key) --> Manage (right Set key) --> Device Manager --> DVD/CD-ROM drives. Note the type of device.
NOTE: If the device on the LOGIQ 9 does not match any of the Firmware directories in the next step, then you do not need to run this update.
b.) Go to the c:\Hardware_Drivers\Firmware\ directory (you can use Windows Explorer for this). Select the directory that matches the device supported by this LOGIQ 9 system from the previous step.
c.) Run the executable for the DVD drive. Follow the directions in this executable (the instructions vary by device).
17.)If necessary, remap the DVD drive. The DVD drive should be drive G. Remap the drives by running remap.bat in c:\remap.
18.)Check your Service Dongle. Plug in your Service Dongle to ensure that it is recognized and lights up. You can then remove the Service Dongle.
19.)Proceed to Section 8-12 "Loading Application Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-49.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-38 Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
Save all Service Presets if you are connected to InSite to restore remote connectivity after completed.
Contact the customer prior to this upgrade to allow them enough lead time to backup the system.
This software upgrade applies to all LOGIQ™ 9 BT07 and later systems with software version of R7.x.x and later.
NOTE: Be sure no images are in the clipboard or opened exams before loading base image software.
NOTE: After a full or partial base image load, be sure to confirm the Windows automatic Daylight Saving Time feature is turned off (Utility ->System -> General -> Date/Time -> Time Zone tab -> Automatically Adjust Clock checkbox) and the date and time are set correctly.
NOTE: R7.x and later Base Image and Application software disables the following: the Run window normally accessed from Start->Run, and the mouse right-click (left set key) feature.
NOTE: Disconnect the system from the network and remove all transducers from the system.
NOTE: Be sure all USB devices (printers only) are connected and turned on (except for USB Flash devices). If a printer is plugged in at this time it is automatically installed and you won't have to go back to Windows to install it.
NOTE: If the system has any digital peripherals, be sure that they are turned on.
1.) Turn on the scanner.2.) Turn on all digital peripherals, including the DVR.3.) Record the system’s TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Network Speed) from the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP page. You will add these settings back to the system in the System Checkout section after the Upgrade has been completed.
4.) Record the system’s installed Option strings from the Utility --> Admin --> System Admin page.5.) Perform a Backup from the Utility-->System-->Backup/Restore page. You should back up the
Patient Archive, Report Archive, User-Defined Configuration, Voice training, and Service settings. You will perform a Restore after the Upgrade has been completed.
6.) Confirm that all patient data has been archived. If not, perform the archive. 7.) Insert the disk labeled “Base System Software Load Image”, into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Base Image Load version.
WARNINGWARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-39
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
8.) Properly turn off the scanner by momentarily pressing the Standby (ON/OFF) Switch. Select Shutdown from the System Exit menu. Wait for the Standby Switch to turn amber.
NOTE: If the system exit menu does not appear, press Alt F10.
9.) If the system does not shutdown normally, hold down Standby Switch until green light turns amber.10.)Turn on the scanner.
A message is displayed on the Touch Panel screen as shown in Figure 8-39 on page 8-39 .
Now is your chance to abort the Base Image load or continue.
11.)Press any key to continue. To abort, remove the CD-ROM from the drive and press CTRL-C.
Figure 8-38 Shutdown Dialog Box
Figure 8-39 Base Load Warning Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-40 Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
12.)Select either option:
a.) [1] Load the complete disk -- All existing data will be lost. Or, b.) [2] Load the bootable C: partition only - Patient data is not lost.
NOTE: YOU NEED TO INSTALL APPLICATION SOFTWARE WHEN THIS PROCEDURE HAS COMPLETED.
13.)Figure 8-28 is the last warning message before the base load process begins. Press any key to continue or abort by pressing CTRL-C.
Figure 8-40 Base Load Option Screen
Figure 8-41 Base Load Option 2 Message
You are about to reload only the C: partition. If you DO NOT want to do this, remove the CDROM from the CDROM drive and Press “CTRL-C” now to exit and power cycle your system to restart without overwriting your disk drive's current contents.
Press any key to continue...
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-41
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
Once you have chosen to continue with the selected option, you see a screen showing Norton Ghost (see Figure 8-35. This automatically loads a base set of software onto the hard disk. Let it run to completion (Approximately 8-10 minutes).
Figure 8-42 Norton Ghost screen.
A message similar to the one shown in Figure 8-30 is displayed when the process has completed.
Figure 8-43 Base Load Complete
NOTICE Do NOT proceed with the Application Software load yet. Do NOT insert the application disc into the CD-ROM/DVD drive until you have completed all the remaining directions in this section. If you insert any media in the drive beforehand, the drives will not remap correctly.
If there are no error messages listed above, the “Base System Software Load Image” process has successfully completed. You will now need to load the “Application Software” onto your system.
Please remove the CDROM from the drive, power cycle the system and then continue with the “Application Software” load procedure.
Thank you!
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-42 Section 8-10 - Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
14.)Remove DVD from the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: If you do not remove the DVD, the Base System Software Load process repeats when the system boots up.
15.)After removing the CDROM from the drive, press Ctrl+Alt+Delete to reboot the system.When the system reboots, it automatically logs on to start checking hardware. This is a normal process.
16.)Allow the hardware checking process to run to completion.
NOTE: If the system does not reboot, press and hold down the Power On/Off button (button turns amber).
NOTE: Prior to the System Settings Change dialog box, Do NOT touch the system during this process. Activating the keyboard, mouse or front panel could corrupt the installation.
NOTE: While the script is running, several windows or dialog boxes appear on the screen. At times it may look like the system is unresponsive.
Wait for the “System Settings Change” dialog box “Do You Want to Restart computer now?” to appear, approximately 1-2 minutes after the desktop is displayed.
17.)When you get a message to restart Windows, select YES (see Figure 8-37).
Figure 8-44 System Settings Change dialog box - Restart Windows Message
After restart, the DriveUpdater dialog box and an Instructions dialog box open.
Figure 8-45 DriveUpdater (left) and Instructions Dialog Boxes
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-43
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-10 Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
Figure 8-46 DriveUpdater Dialog Box
18.)If the Current Version matches the New Version, proceed to step 20.
NOTE: If completing step 19, you must complete all substeps associated with the DriveUpdater dialog box BEFORE you select OK on the Instructions dialog box. If you select the OK button on the Instructions dialog box prematurely, the system may not remap the drives correctly.
19.)If the Current Version does not match the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:
a.) Select the Update button.After firmware update is complete, the Update button changes to a Reboot button.
b.) Select the Reboot button.c.) Wait for Windows to finish installing the new Driver for the upgraded firmware and to find new
hardware.After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again. Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box at this time.
d.) Wait for the System Settings Change dialog box to open asking “Do you want to restart you computer now?” (Figure 8-44).Do NOT exit the DriveUpdater dialog box and do NOT click OK on the Instructions Dialog box.
NOTE: If the 'Do you want to restart your computer now?' dialog box does not open after several minutes, select Start -> Restart to reboot and continue with step f.
e.) Select Yes to restart.f.) Wait for the system to reboot.
After reboot, the DriveUpdater dialog box opens again.
20.)If the Current Version matches the New Version on the DriveUpdater dialog box:
a.) Select the Exit button on DriveUpdater dialog box first. b.) Select OK in the Instructions dialog box.
At this point, the CD drive re-mapping occurs. Do not reboot the system until the re-mapping is complete. After re-mapping, the CD/DVD drive should be drive G:\. When the re-mapping process is complete, the re-mapping window closes.
c.) Confirm the CD\DVD drive is mapped to G:\.21.)Proceed to 8-12-2 "Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x" on page
8-54 before loading application software R7.x.x and later.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-44 Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-11Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
NOTE: If you have not done so previously, double-click on the My Computer icon. Check for the drive letters assignments of the Removable Drive (MOD) and the CD-ROM/DVD Drive. If the CD-ROM/DVD Drive is not drive “g” and the MOD drive “h” , manually remap the drives.
NOTE: When installing R2.1.1 software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.
NOTE: Starting with the Application S/W R3.0.0C and above, you may get a notification that the service platform is out of date. One of the last steps in the software load is to check the service platform version. If the version is not correct, the screen will turn yellow and you will get a pop-up notifying you that you must reghost the C drive and reinstall software to get the latest service software. If you do not do this service may not work.
1.) Place the “Application Software” CD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.
2.) Wait about 15 seconds. A window will pop-up showing you the contents of the drive.
3.) Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software. 4.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute, perform steps a. and b. below.
a.) Select the Start button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”.b.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.
5.) After the screen opens to warn you that you are about to load software, press the Enter key or select OK to start the process.A Command (CMD) window opens, similar to the one shown in Figure 8-48.
Figure 8-47 Run Load Software
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-45
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. Software provides the message in Figure 8-49.
At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window will disappear automatically.
7.) In BEP 3.x systems only, the system will reboot before installing the Service Platform. You will see the Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.
Figure 8-48 Command Window
Figure 8-49 R2.1.1 Software Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-46 Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
After the system reboots, a DOS box displays showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process is complete, another dialog box displays telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-50, but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”
NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present, these messages are normal and should be ignored.
8.) In BEP 2.x systems only, when the process is complete, the window will turn dark red and display the following message in Figure 8-51, and the system will reboot.
9.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive. If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-52 opens. The ME2.0 will change to reflect the currently installed software.
Figure 8-50 BEP 3 Only - System Shutdown Warning Message
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper threading is turned off the system will respond slower than expected.
Figure 8-51 Software Load Complete
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-47
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
10.)Remove the Applications CD.11.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.12.)Select Cancel.
13.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.
NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
Figure 8-52 Start Software
Figure 8-53 Enter Option String
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-48 Section 8-11 - Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-11-1 Loading Application Software - R4.x.x and prior (cont’d)
14.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-8 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-11. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-49
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-12Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CDROM/DVD drive.
NOTE: See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to identify the correct Application Software version.
2.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-54) showing you the contents of the drive. Double click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-54 LoadSoftware.bat File
3.) If this pop-up window does not open in a minute then perform steps A and B below.
A.) Select the START button on the tool bar at the bottom of the monitor screen and select “Run…”.
B.) Enter “g:\LoadSoftware” into the dialog box as shown in Figure 8-47.
4.) You see a screen that warns you that you are about to load software. Press the Enter key or select OK to start the process.
Figure 8-55 Run Load Software
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-50 Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
5.) You see a window open similar to the example shown in Figure 8-48.
6.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R6.0.4 Software provides the message in Figure 8-56.
Please wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window disappears automatically.
Figure 8-56 Command Window
Figure 8-57 R6.X.X Software Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-51
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
7.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-50 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.
After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-58 but the message will be: Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”
NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present, these messages are normal and should be ignored.
Figure 8-58 BEP 3 Only System Shutdown Warning Message
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-52 Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
8.) When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.You get a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-59. (Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software version will be reflected.)
9.) REMOVE the Applications CD. 10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select START (if the CD is still in the tray; otherwise,
the system starts up automatically).
NOTE: If the service dongle is still plugged in, you will see the Service Login instead (see Figure 8-60).
Figure 8-60 Service Login
Figure 8-59 Start Software
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-53
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-1 Loading Applications Software - R6.x.x (cont’d)
If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.
11.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.
NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding is essential to proper system function and optimization.
12.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Figure 8-61 Enter Option String
Table 8-1 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-12. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-54 Section 8-12 - Loading Application Software - R6.x.x
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.xIf the customer had the Wired VoiceScan option on their system, the following procedure needs to be done to change the audio output from the wired headset to the PC Speakers. This procedure only needs to be performed after a reghost of the system.
NOTE: This procedure is not required for Wireless VoiceScan.
1.) Plug the wired headset into the USB ports on the left side of the upper control panel.
NOTE: After the system is turned on, the operating system assigns the headset as the new preferred playback/recording device. The following steps reassign the preferred playback device.
2.) Select Start->Settings->Control Panel->Sounds and Audio Devices to bring up the Sounds and Audio Devices properties box.
Figure 8-62 Path to Sounds and Audio Devices<$elemtextonly
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-55
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-12-2 Wired VoiceScan Speaker Assignment - R6.x.x, R7.x.x, and R9.x.x (cont’d)
3.) Select the Audio tab.
4.) In the Sound Playback area, select “SoundMAX Digital Audio” as the Default device, press Apply then OK.
NOTE: The recording device should remain “Plantronics Headset”.
The system sounds should now be directed to the PC Speaker.
Complete the appropriate application load.
Figure 8-63 Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Box
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-56 Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
If you have previously performed a Base Image Software Load, proceed to section 8-23-1, Step 1.
If you are only loading the Application Software, insert the application CD into the CD/DVD drive and power cycle the system. At boot-up, the system shows the “Start Application” dialog box. Click on [Install SW] and proceed with section 8-23-1, Step 6.
8-13-1 Loading Applications Software1.) Confirm drive letter for CD\DVD is mapped to G:\. If the CD\DVD drive is not mapped to the
G:\ drive:
A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.B.) Open C:\remap. C.) Double-click on newmap.bat to remap the drive.
2.) Place the “Application Software” CDROM into the CDROM/DVD drive. See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.
3.) Wait about 30 seconds. A window pops up (see Figure 8-64) showing you the contents of the drive.
4.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
Figure 8-64 LoadSoftware.bat File
5.) If the pop-up window in Figure 8-64 does not open in a minute, perform steps A - C below.
A.) From the Desktop, select “My Computer”.B.) Double-click the G:\ drive to open the pop-up window in Figure 8-64. C.) Double-click on LoadSoftware.bat to load the software.
NOTE: If the base image does not match the part number and revision of the approved base image, then the system notifies you of the required base image needed and does not run the software.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-57
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
6.) A window similar to the example shown in Figure 8-65 opens.
7.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R9.X Software provides the message in Figure 8-66.
8.) Wait while the software loads (Approximately 7-8 minutes).
NOTE: When the Information Window appears asking you to select OK, do nothing. This window disappears automatically.
Figure 8-65 Command Window (Note: Application software for release R9.X L9)
Figure 8-66 R9.X.X and later Software Message
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-58 Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
9.) The system reboots before installing the Service Platform. You will see Figure 8-67 dialog briefly just before the system reboots.
After the system reboots, a DOS box is displayed showing you the installation of the Service Platform. When the process has completed, you get another dialog box telling you that the system is rebooting. It is similar to Figure 8-50 but the message will be: “Computer is being rebooted to complete installation”
NOTE: After the Service Platform installs, and during the second reboot you may get some error messages about processes not starting because the workstation is shutting down. If present, these messages are normal and should be ignored.
Figure 8-67 BEP 3.x and later System Shutdown Warning Message
NOTICE Do not try to prevent these actions from occurring. If you do, you may end up with hyper threading turned off. If hyper threading is turned off, the system responds slower than expected.
If hyper threading turns off, you must perform the c: partition reghost and application s/w load again.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-59
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
10.)When the software has completed loading, the system reboots.A dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-68 opens. (Version “R6.0.3B” in the illustration below is an example. The actual application software version will be reflected as R9.X.)
11.)REMOVE the Applications CD. If the Basic Option is not saved in the Option Dongle, then the SW License dialog window opens.
12.)During the reboot process, the system asks for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the Upgrade Kit.
Figure 8-68 Start Software
Figure 8-69 Enter Option String
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-60 Section 8-13 - Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-13 Loading Application Software - R7.x.x or Later (cont’d)
NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
NOTE: If the system does not display an image or a good image when you boot up, Do Not troubleshoot it as a problem yet. Continue with this upgrade. Proper Vital Product Data coding is essential to proper system function and optimization. For information on updating VPD, see Proprietary Service Manual (2294854-100), Chapter 8, Verify and Update Vital Product Data.
8-13-2 Functional CheckoutRun functional checkout to ensure system operation.
1.) Connect each probe to ensure that it is recognized by the system.2.) Check every probe in every mode.3.) Reconnect to the network.4.) Verify Software level on the Utility --> System --> About menu; also confirm the Base Image Load
and Patch CD information on this screen.5.) Check Date, Time, and Timezone.6.) Restore (type in) the TCPIP settings (IP Address, Computer Name, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway, Network Speed) on the Utility --> Connectivity --> TCPIP menu. Save these settings and reboot the system.
7.) Verify the Presets loaded properly. The patient data should have transferred since the upgrade only entails a C: Partition load.If the transfer failed, perform a Restore via Utility --> System --> Backup/Restore. Select to restore Patient Archive, Report Archive, User Defined Configuration, and Service settings. The system automatically reboots.
8.) Perform audio test. 9.) Format a DVD, and backup Customer Presets to confirm proper CD/DVD write functionality.10.)Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
11.)Perform basic system measurements.12.)Replace old Base Load and Application Software CDs and Documentation.
Table 8-1 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-13. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-61
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-14Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure
NOTE: When installing software you may see error messages about not being able to replace the following *.dll files: ginastub.dll and msvcr70.dll. These are known, non-critical issues that are being tracked and will be fixed in the next revision of software.
1.) Place the “Application Software” CD/DVD into the CD-ROM/DVD drive.See Section 9-15 "Software" on page 9-41 to confirm the correct Application Software version.
2.) Power Down the scanner.3.) Power up the scanner. Wait for a dialog box like the one in Figure 8-70.
WARNINGWARNING WHILE THE SOFTWARE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS DESIGNED TO PRESERVE DATA, YOU SHOULD SAVE ANY PATIENT DATA, IMAGES, SYSTEM SETUPS TO A MOD, CD, DVD OR HARDCOPY BEFORE DOING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE
CAUTION Remember to remove the MOD before continuing with the software install.
Figure 8-70 Start Application Window
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-62 Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)
4.) Select Install SW ... .5.) Two separate dialog boxes open warning you that you are about to install new software as shown
in Figure 8-71. In both cases, click OK.
6.) Another window will be displayed asking you to “Press any key to continue…”.
Figure 8-71 StartLoader Dialog Boxes
Figure 8-72 Command Window (R2.x shown)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-63
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)
7.) As indicated, press any key to continue. The process is completely automated and provides you with messages as to its status. R2.1.0 Software provides the message in Figure 8-73.
At this point you just have to wait while the software loads (Approximately 10 minutes).
When the process is complete, the window will turn dark red, display the message in Figure 8-74, and the system will reboot.
8.) If possible while the system is rebooting, remove the CD from the drive.If you remove the CD, the system will automatically reboot into the applications software. If you didn’t remove the CD, a dialog box like the one shown in Figure 8-75 opens.
9.) Remove the Applications CD.10.)From the Start Applications dialog box, select Start.11.)Select Cancel.
Figure 8-73 R2.1.0 Software Message
Figure 8-74 Software Load Complete
Figure 8-75 Start Software
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-64 Section 8-14 - Generic Application Software - Upgrade Only
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-14-1 Application Software Upgrade Procedure (cont’d)
12.)During the reboot process, the system may ask for the option string (valid license) to be entered. When this happens, enter the option string provided in the installation paperwork.
NOTE: Starting with R3.x Software, all systems must have at least the basic option string in order for the software to run. Any single option string may enable multiple options (i.e. Basic & B-Flow).
Demo option strings turn on all options for a limited period of time. Do Not leave a demo option string in a unit when it is sold to a customer.
8-14-2 Functional Checkout1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Figure 8-76 Enter Option String
Table 8-2 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-14. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-65
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-15System Setup
8-15-1 To Complete the System Setup1.) From the Touch Screen on the scanner, select Utility -> Connectivity -> TCPIP Tab. 2.) Ensure that DHCP is deselected so you can enter information manually.3.) Input the DICOM information.
- This should be the appropriate DICOM information for the system if it is on the hospital network. If it is not correct, input the correct data.
4.) After all information is entered, select Save Settings.5.) Complete the InSite Checkout again. Refer to the InSite/iLinq and InSite ExC Installation Manual,
2354611-100, Rev 4 or later.
8-15-2 VCR Setup 1.) Reset the VCR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals. 2.) Under VCR, select Sony SVO-9500 VCR or Mitsubishi MD 3000, as appropriate, and SAVE.3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
8-15-3 DVR Setup 1.) Reset the DVR and choose a Default Line Printer by going to Utilities>System>Peripherals. 2.) Under VCR, select Panasonic DVR and Save.3.) Under SETUP, select the desired default line printer and Save.4.) Select Exit in the lower left-hand corner of the Touch Screen.
8-15-4 Printer Setup1.) If the customer has a USB (Digital) Printer and it was plugged in at the time the Base Image
Software was installed, it should have been recognized and automatically installed. 2.) If you did not install the printer until after the Applications software was loaded, you will need a
service key (dongle) to open Windows. Follow the manual setup procedures in the LOGIQ™ 9 Peripheral Installation Manual 2341053-100.
3.) For the UP-D895 Printer, you must manually set the resolution to 1920 x 1280 whenever software is reloaded see 3-14-1 "Printer Set Up (R4.x and later)" on page 3-24.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-66 Section 8-15 - System Setup
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-5 Print Key Assignment and CheckoutBecause of the addition of more printer choices, digital and analog, the factory default print key configuration has been removed for the color and b/w printers.
1.) Determine which printers are configured on the system. The former factory defaults were Color = P3 and B/W = P2.
2.) Consult the customer to ensure which “Print” keys (P1-4) should be assigned to printers. 3.) Select Utility -> Admin -> Connectivity -> Buttons. Choose the desired print button. Under
“Destinations”, select necessary printer choice from the drop-down list.4.) Press the print key just configured.
The screenshot prints to the destination printer.
8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets1.) Place the Backup/Restore media (MOD or CD-R) in the drive.2.) Select the Utility tab on the Touch Panel. Select System, then Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore screen opens.
NOTE: If you are not logged in with administrator privileges, the Operator Login window opens. Log on with administrator privileges.
Figure 8-77 Backup / Restore Screen
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-67
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-6 Restore Patient, Report, and User-Defined Presets (cont’d)
3.) In the Restore list, select from the following, depending on which configurations you want to restore: - Patient Archive- Report Archive- User Defined Configuration- Service (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)
OR, in the Detailed Restore section select one of the following: - Imaging Presets - Connectivity Configuration - Measurement Configuration - Comment/Body Pattern Configuration - Voice Scan Training Profiles - Report Templates- 3D/4D (Only available with R4.x.x SW and higher)- Fast Key (R7.x.x or Later)- Custom Programs (R9.x.x)- All Others
NOTE: Only restore the Service presets onto the system from which they were backed up. Do not carry Service presets from one system to another.
4.) In the Media field, select the media that the backup is on. 5.) Select Restore.
The system performs the restore. As it proceeds, status information is displayed on the System/Backup/Restore screen.
NOTE: If you restore Service there is another progress bar that comes up during restore. When you do a restore, the system will automatically reboot. This only occurs after the boot where you restore Service. After this progress bar goes away the system will load normally. The progress bar will complete several full passes. This is normal.
8-15-7 Cycle System Power1.) Press the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel once to display the SYSTEM - EXIT menu.
2.) Power up the system for functional check-out.
Figure 8-78 System Exit Menu for Back-end Processor Power Down
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-68 Section 8-15 - System Setup
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-8 Standby Operation Checkout
8-15-8-1 To Place the System in the Standby Mode
1.) Press the ON/OFF switch at the front of the system once. The System-Exit window displays.2.) Use the Trackball to select Standby.
The Monitor Display and Touch Panel turn black. The On/Off switch indicator is green.
3.) After the monitor blacks out, wait at least 20 additional seconds before unplugging the power cable or switching off the breaker. The system does not fully enter Standby Mode until after the following occurs:
- If you have a CD/DVD drive, the Power ON/OFF button blinks.- If you have a CD drive only, the green lights beneath the CD drive show no activity for 15
seconds.
NOTE: Starting with BT04, the ON/OFF Switch blinks while the system is in Standby Mode. Because of a hardware dependency, this feature is not supported on systems that upgrade to BT04.
4.) Once in Standby Mode, unplug the system from the wall. The system beeps.
NOTE: DO NOT press the ON/OFF switch while the system is unplugged. This will turn the system off.
5.) Plug the system back in within 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for longer than 15 minutes, the battery is discharged and the system shuts down. This assumes a fully-charged battery.
NOTE: It takes ten hours to recharge the battery. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
NOTE: If the system is left in the OFF condition (system unplugged from the wall and circuit breaker in the OFF position) for an extended period of time (greater than three days), the system may not boot up or beep when turned on. If this occurs, plug in the system, set the circuit breaker to the ON position, and allow the system’s UPS battery to recharge for several hours. DO NOT use standby during this time.
See Moving the System in the Basic User Manual for more information.
8-15-8-2 To Wake the System from Standby Mode
1.) Press ON/OFF switch QUICKLY! Less than .25 seconds. The system becomes functional after about 45 seconds.
NOTE: If the ON/OFF switch is pressed too long, the system shuts down instead of coming out of Standby Mode.
NOTE: Waking the system from Standby without AC connected will turn off the system.
NOTE: Charge time for batteries is approximately 10 hours. Expected battery lifetime for frequent standby use is six months. To maintain battery life, keep the system plugged in with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-69
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-15-9 Functional Checkout1.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
2.) Reboot the system.3.) If the system does not recognize the video card, perform a C: partition base load
(see Section 8-8 "Loading Base Image Software - R4.x.x and prior" on page 8-26, Section 8-9 "Loading Base Image Software - R6.x.x" on page 8-33, or Section 8-10 "Loading Base Image Software - R7.x.x or Later" on page 8-38).
Table 8-3 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-15. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-70 Section 8-16 - Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-16Console Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-16-1 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour
8-16-2 ToolsHexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm
Phillips screwdriver size 2
Socket 8 mm
8-16-3 Preparations1.) Shut down the system .2.) Remove Operator Panel.3.) Remove XY- Handle .
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-71
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-16-4 Console Lock Assembly Removal Procedure1.) Unscrew 8 (5 mm) and 2 (3 mm) hexagon screws .2.) Take care of the spring.3.) Remove the Console Lock Assembly.
8-16-5 Console Lock Assembly Installation Procedure1.) Install the Lock Assembly.2.) Install the spring.3.) Fasten the 10 hexagon screws.4.) Install Operator Panel.5.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-4 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-16. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-5-1 or4-5-2 or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) orOperator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-72 Section 8-17 - Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-17Release Lock Assembly Replacement Procedure
8-17-1 ManpowerOne person, 1 hour
8-17-2 Tools• Hexagon key 2,5 and 3 mm• Phillips screwdriver size 2• Socket 8 mm
8-17-3 Preparations1.) Shut down the system .2.) Remove Operator Panel .3.) Remove XY- Handle .
8-17-4 Release Lock Removal Procedure1.) Unscrew 8 mm nut behind XY-Handle.2.) Unscrew 2 hexagon screws (3 mm).3.) Unscrew 4 hexagon screws (2,5 mm).4.) Remove Release Lock Assembly.
Figure 8-79 Release Lock Assembly
Strap
Screws
Screws
Screws
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-73
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-17-5 Release Lock Installation Procedure1.) Install Release Lock Assembly.2.) Fasten 6 hexagon screws.3.) Fasten nut behind XY- Handle.4.) Install XY-Handle .5.) Install Operator Panel.
6.) Perform the following functional tests. If all are successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Figure 8-80 Release Lock Assembly
Table 8-5 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-17. Equipment passed all required tests and is ready for
use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-5-1 or4-5-2 or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option)orOperator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Strap
Screws
Screws
Screws
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-74 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-18Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
8-18-1 Manpower2 persons, 4 hours
8-18-2 ToolsLarge coin and a large flat screwdriver
Phillips screwdriver
Long Phillips driver
#2 Phillips screwdriver
5 mm Hexagon key
8-18-3 OverviewReplacement of the gas shock in a LOGIQ™ 9 is not a difficult task but one that should be approached with safety in mind.
The Gas Shock is used to balance the weight from the Top Console. It is located inside the frame, between the Front End Card Cage and the Back End Processor (BEP).
WARNINGWARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.
WARNINGWARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
Figure 8-81 Typical Gas Shock Assembly
1
2
2
3
4
4
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-75
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-3 Overview (cont’d)
You get access to the Gas Shock via openings in the frame behind the BEP, so the BEP must be removed. To reduce the weight of the Top Console, the monitor should be removed.
To release the tension in the Gas Shock, the Top Console must be secured in its upper position during replacement.
Components must be removed to remove weight from the console and to gain access to the gas shock attachment points. Items removed are:
- Covers- Handle- Air Filter- Peripherals- VCR/Top Tray Frame- Monitor- Back End Processor (BEP)
Pay particular attention to all cautions and warnings in this procedure because injury could result from improper handling of components and sharp edges on metal chassis parts.
8-18-4 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the left- and/or right-side covers.3.) Remove the upper rear cover.4.) Remove the top cover.5.) Remove the front cover.6.) Remove the lower rear cover.7.) Remove the rear handle.8.) Remove the back-end processor9.) Remove the monitor assembly.10.)Remove the color video printer.11.)Remove the black and white video printer.12.)Remove the VCR.
WARNINGWARNING When the top console is in its locked position, the gas shock is compressed and stores mechanical energy. During normal operation the top console, the weight of the monitor and the mechanical force of the gas shock are in balance. Take care if/when you activate this gas shock. Personal injury can occur after the panel is removed and the shock pressure is released. Take care when you repair the elevation assembly.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-76 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-5 Top Tray FrameThe Color Printer/Top Tray Frame should be remove to avoid damage to this part.
8-18-5-1 Removal Procedure
1.) Remove the four screws securing the frame to the chassis.
2.) Remove the frame and set it aside.
Figure 8-82 Color Printer/Top Tray Frame
Figure 8-83 Remove Four Screws
Top Tray Frame
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-77
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-5-1 Removal Procedure (cont’d)You should now have a chassis with all the necessary parts removed as shown in Figure 8-84 on page 8-77 .
Figure 8-84 Chassis with Necessary Parts Removed
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-78 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-6 Gas Shock RemovalThe stripped down system console will be tilted on its side in order to remove and replace the gas shock.
1.) Set the back brake on the Right Side of the console. The right side is the side with the Front End Processor.
2.) Ensure that the keyboard X/Y motion (“Frogleg”) is locked.3.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.
4.) Place some padded material on the floor next to the right side of the chassis.5.) Refer to Figure 8-85, with one person at the back of the chassis and one at the keyboard handles
in the front, carefully tilt the console and lay it on its right side.
6.) You should now have access to the top and bottom shock mounts as shown in Figure 8-86.
WARNINGWARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.
Figure 8-85 Tilting the Console
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-79
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)
7.) At the top of the shock mount there is a Wire Clamp nestled in the Forked Retainer. Using 2 slotted screwdrivers (one on each side of the clamp) loosen the clamp. Refer to Figure 8-87.
8.) At the top shock mount remove the:- Top “C” (Circlip) Clip- Pin- Bushings
Slide out the top shock end.
Figure 8-86 Console on its Side
WARNINGWARNING Beware of possible sharp edges on all metal chassis parts. if sharp edges are encountered, the appropriate PPE should be used to reduce the risk of injury.
Bottom Shock Mount
Top Shock Mount
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-80 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-6 Gas Shock Removal (cont’d)
9.) At the shock bottom mounting point, remove the Circlip. Refer to Figure 8-88.10.)Remove the mounting axel and the washers. Refer to Figure 8-88.
NOTE: Take care, not to loose clips or washers.
11.)Lift up the bottom of the shock and pull it out and away from the pin.
Figure 8-87 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism
Figure 8-88 Bottom Shock Mount
SpringRelease arm
CirclipGas Spring Axle
Wire end lock
Plastic strap
Mounting Axel, Circlip and washers
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-81
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-7 Install the New Gas ShockReverse the removal procedure to install the new gas shock.
The shock comes pre-loaded with a “stop block” tywrapped to the top of the shock to prevent accidental complete extension of the shock. Refer to Figure 8-90. The Position of the release arm is also preadjusted.
1.) Slide the bottom of the shock into the bottom mount position as shown in Figure 8-91.
Figure 8-89 New Gas Shock as delivered
Figure 8-90 New Shock with Stop Block
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-82 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)
2.) Place a washer on each side of the bottom of the shock mount and align the holes as shown in Figure 8-91.
NOTE: You can use the top mounting pin to help align the bottom of the shock mount with the washers.
3.) Reach behind the bottom of the shock mount and lift the bottom mounting pin so that it slides through the washer, shock, washer and bottom mounting bracket as shown in Figure 8-91.
4.) Install the “C” clip to secure the bottom of the shock mount as shown in Figure 8-91.5.) Move the top of the shock mount into position as shown in Figure 8-92.6.) Assemble the top of the shock to the chassis using the pin, two washers and “C” clips as shown in
Figure 8-92.
Figure 8-91 Shock Bottom Mounted
Figure 8-92 Top of Shock mounted
Mounting Pin “C” Clip
Mounting Pin“C” Clip
Stop BlockTywrap
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-83
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-7 Install the New Gas Shock (cont’d)
7.) Using two people, return the console to its upright position (sitting on all four wheels).8.) Release the shock by cutting the tywrap and removing the stop block as shown in Figure 8-92.
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release1.) Place the Release Cable Socket in the slot on the Shock top’s lower flange as shown in Figure 8-93.
2.) Tywrap the Release Cable Socket to the Shock head as shown in Figure 8-94.
WARNINGWARNING Tilting the console requires two people in order to avoid injury to service personnel and damage to the equipment.
Figure 8-93 Mounting the Release Cable
Figure 8-94 Tywrapped Release Cable
Release Cable Socket
Slot in Shock top’s Lower Flange
Tywrap
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-84 Section 8-18 - Gas Shock Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d)
3.) Thread the spring and barrel clamp(s) onto the Release Cable wire. Place the Barrel Clamp(s) in the Clamp cradle on the Shock’s Valve Release arm as shown in Figure 8-95.
4.) Using needle nose pliers, hold the wire end shown in Figure 8-95 above the clamp(s) and pull it upward to take up any cable slack.
5.) Using one of the two slotted screwdrivers, push the Clamp(s) downwards until it rests in the Shock Valve Release Arm Clamp Cradle as shown in Figure 8-95.
6.) Tighten the clamp with one screwdriver to hold the cable. Let go of the pliers and then use the two screwdrivers to fully tighten the clamp.
7.) Without squeezing the Top Console Release Lever, check that the Shock Valve Release Arm is in its uppermost position as shown in Figure 8-95.
8.) Squeeze the Top Console Release Lever and watch the clamp cradle move down immediately as the lever is squeezed, there should be very little play in the cable. Small amounts of play can be taken up (or slackened) with the Top Console cable adjustment screw.
NOTE: Before installing the Back End Processor, check all connections to the AC Transformer box to ensure they were not disturbed while replacing the gas shock.
9.) Replace the BEP. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.10.)Replace the Monitor. Refer to Chapter 8 of the Proprietary Manual if necessary.11.)You should now be able to power up the system and check basic operation prior to installing the
peripherals and covers. If the system functions normally, continue reassembling the system.12.)After completing a basic check out, power down the system.13.)Replace the Color Printer/Top Tray frame.14.)Replace the VCR.15.)Replace the B/W.16.)Replace the Color Printer.
Figure 8-95 Cradled Barrel Clamps
WARNINGWARNING Do NOT attempt to pinch together or pry apart the Cradle. If one of the tines should break off, the gas spring piston may have to be replaced AGAIN.
Barrel Clamps
Spring
Cable wire End
Release Arm in Upper Position
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-85
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-18-8 Reassemble Z-Release (cont’d)
17.)Replace all covers. - Air Filter- Handle- Top Cover- Back Covers (Top & Bottom)- Front Cover- Filter Cover- Side Covers
18.)Power up the system and do a complete functional check of all peripherals.19.)Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below
20.)Check the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation). Readjust if necessary. Refer to Section 6-5 "Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment" on page 6-8.
Table 8-6 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-18. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
tests and is ready for use. “
4-2-3 Standby Mode
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks
4-5-1 or4-5-2 or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks
Section 6-3 Monitor
10-7-4 Grounding Continuity
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-86 Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-19Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
The Gas Spring Wirecable (FB307375) is a field replaceable unit. The wirecable is used when operating the Z-Release Handle to move the Top Console up/down.
8-19-1 Manpower1 person, 1-2 hours
8-19-2 Tools• Narrow standard screwdriver• Needle nose pliers• 4mm allen wrench• Hexagon key 3mm (covers)• Phillips screwdriver (covers)• Coin and large screwdriver (covers)
8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system as shown in .
2.) Remove the Side Covers .3.) Remove the Front Cover .
Removing the Front Cover allows you easier access to raise the column cover as necessary.
4.) Remove B/W Video Printer .
NOTICE
Energy Control and Power Lockout for LOGIQ™ 9When servicing parts of the system where there is exposure to voltage greater than 30 Volts: 1. Turn off the breaker. 2. Unplug the system. 3. Maintain control of the system power plug. 4. Wait at least 20 seconds for capacitors to discharge as there are no test points to verify isolation.Beware that the AC Control Box, Front End Processor and Back End Processor may be energized even if the power is turned off when the cord is still plugged into the AC Outlet.
Signed Date
TAG &
LOCKOUT
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-87
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-3 Wirecable Removal Preparations (cont’d)
5.) Remove VCR or DVR.Removing B/W Video Printer and VCR/DVR gives access to the lower end of wirecable and the release mechanism located behind and between the rear parts of these two units.
6.) Remove upper op panel and lower op panels.7.) Lift console to top position.
Figure 8-96 Disconnect and Remove the Printer and VCR or DVR
Disconnect Cables
VCR
B/W Printer
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-88 Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure1.) Remove Z-handle shown in Figure 8-97.
c.) Unscrew 1 hexagon screw.d.) Release the wire-end lock from the handle.e.) Remove the handle.
2.) Cut plastic strap shown in Figure 8-98.3.) Unscrew both upper and lower wire-end locks shown in Figure 8-98. Take care of spring.
Figure 8-97 Z-Release handle, view from below
Figure 8-98 Upper Gas Shock Axle and Release Mechanism
Hexagon ScrewWire-end lock
Z-Handle
Spring
Release arm
Circlip
Gas Spring Axle
Upper wire-end lock
Plastic strap
Mantle end - lower
Console Cable Assembly
Arm fork
WirecableLower wire-end lock
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-89
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-4 Wirecable Removal Procedure (cont’d)
4.) Pull the wirecable out of mantle (black rubber tube housing) from the upper end of the mantle shown in Figure 8-99.
Figure 8-99 Z-Release handle, view from above
Mantle end - upper
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-90 Section 8-19 - Gas Spring Wirecable Replacement Procedure
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure1.) Thread the new wirecable with prefixed wire-end lock through Z-Handle.2.) Thread wirecable from Z-Handle down through the upper mantle (Figure 8-99) until the wirecable
is visible through the lower mantle end (Figure 8-98).3.) Reinstall Z-handle.4.) Thread the cone-shaped spring on the lower end of the wirecable.5.) Put two wire-end locks on wirecable and hook wire-end into the release arm fork. See Figure 8-87.6.) Secure wirecable with a new plastic strap. See Figure 8-87.7.) Loosen the lower wire-end lock. See Figure 8-87.8.) Use the needle nose pliers to pull the lower end of the wirecable upwards and to push the loose
wire-end lock against the release arm fork. While maintaining tension on the wirecable using the needle nose pliers in one hand (so that the Z-handle is tight and in proper position, Figure 8-100), use a flathead screwdriver in the other hand to fasten the loose lower wire-end lock.
9.) Loosen the upper lock, push it against the lower, and fasten the upper wire-end lock. 10.)Confirm the Z-handle is in proper position (Figure 8-100).
NOTE: When the wirecable is tight, the Z-handle will be in proper position. Improper Z-handle position will affect the performance of the gas shock.
11.)Perform a functional test of the Z-Release operation (Operator Console up/down operation) before cutting off overshooting lower wire-end. Readjust if necessary (see “Z-Release Cable and Gas Spring Adjustment” in Chapter 6 of the Service Manual).
12.)Reinstall the upper and lower operator panels.13.)Reinstall VCR or DVR.14.)Reinstall B/W-Video Printer.15.)Reinstall Front Cover.16.)Reinstall Side Covers.
Figure 8-100 Z-Release handle in proper position, view from above
Z-Handle
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-91
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-19-5 Wirecable Installation Procedure (cont’d)
17.)Perform the following functional tests. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Table 8-7 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-19. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all required
tests and is ready for use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
Section 4-4 Peripheral Checks
4-5-1 or4-5-2 or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
4-5-4 Brakes and Direction Locks Checks
7-6-1-1 Calibration Utilities
Section 7-7 I/O Devices
10-7-4 Grounding Continuity
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-92 Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
Section 8-20Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
8-20-1 ManpowerTwo persons, .5 hour + travel
8-20-2 ToolsHexagon keys, 5mm and 6 mm
8-20-3 Kit Contents
8-20-4 Preparations1.) Power Off / Shutdown the system.2.) Remove the monitor.
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure1.) Return the console to the locked position and engage the X-Y Lock.2.) Carefully raise the console to its fully extended position.
Table 8-1 Shim Kit - LOGIQ™ 9 or Vivid 7 Op Panel (5116529)
Qty Description
2 Shim Washer .635 mm thick
1 Shim Washer 1mm thick
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-93
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)
3.) Have one person hold on to the rear of the operator panel. See Figure 8-101 on page 8-93 .
4.) Unscrew and remove socket head cap screw from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93 and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .
5.) Unscrew and remove four button head screws from Top Console. See Figure 8-102 on page 8-93 and Figure 8-103 on page 8-94 .
Figure 8-101 Hold on to Rear of Operator Console
NOTICE Lock Tight is applied to the hex screws that attach the Operator Console to the Frogleg during assembly. Be sure to seat the Hexagon Key firmly in the screw before attempting to unscrew so that you don’t strip the screw head.
Figure 8-102 Screws through Frogleg to Top Console
Socket Head Cap Screw requiring 6 mm hexagon key
Button Head Screws requiring 5 mm hexagon key
Button Head Screws requiring 5 mm hexagon key
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-94 Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)
6.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip it back. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
7.) Place 1 mm thick washer between Frogleg and Top Console so the socket head cap screw can be inserted through it. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
8.) Place the two .635 mm thick washers between the Frogleg and Top Console assembly so the middle button head screws can be inserted through them. See Figure 8-104 on page 8-94 .
Figure 8-103 Remove Screws
Figure 8-104 Place Washers (shims) on Frogleg
1 mm thick washer goes on rear hole (Socket head cap screw)
.635 mm thick washers go on middle holes
.635 mm thick washers go on middle holes
no shims on front holes
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-95
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-5 Frog Leg Adjustment Procedure (cont’d)
9.) Have person holding the Operator Console gently tip console back into place.10.)Install socket head cap screw using care not to cross thread the casting. 11.)Install all button head screws, using care not to cross thread the casting.12.)Tighten all five screws.13.)Replace the monitor.
8-20-6 Functional Check1.) Close Frog Leg.2.) Verify “Crash Arms” extend at least 1/2 way down “Crash Pads”. See Figure 8-105 on page 8-95
and Figure 8-106 on page 8-96 .
Figure 8-105 Crash Arm
Crash Arms
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-96 Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)
3.) Lock and Unlock Frogleg to verify correct operation.
NOTE: If frogleg continues to rub on operator panel after the shims have been put in place, or if crash arms do not extend at least 1/2 way down the crash pads, you will need to order a new frogleg.
4.) Perform the following functional test. If successful, include the debrief script provided below.
Figure 8-106 Crash Pad
Thumbnail indicates 1/2 way down Crash Pad
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures 8-97
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
8-20-6 Functional Check (cont’d)
Table 8-8 Functional Tests
Service Manual Section Functional Test / Diagnostic Test Debrief Script
4-2-2 Power On / Boot Up
“Service Manual, Direction , Rev 14, Section 8-20. Leakage Current measured at (record the value) and meets allowable limits. Equipment passed all
required tests and is ready for use. “
4-2-4 Power Off / Shutdown
4-2-5 Probe/Connectors Usage
4-2-8 System B/M-Mode Checks
4-2-9 System CFM and PWD Checks
4-2-10 Basic Measurements
4-5-1 or4-5-2 or
4-5-3
Operator I/O Movement - Standard Monitor orOperator I/O Movement - 17” LCD (Option) or
Operator I/O Movement - 19” LCD (Option)
Section 6-3 Monitor
7-6-1-1 Calibration Utilities
Section 7-7 I/O Devices
10-7-4 Grounding Continuity
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
8-98 Section 8-20 - Frog Leg Angle Adjustment
1/18/10CHAPTER8.FM
This page was intentionally left blank.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-1
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Chapter 9Renewal PartsSection 9-1Overview
9-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 9This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts available for the LOGIQ™ 9.
Table 9-1 Contents in Chapter 9
Section Description Page Number
9-1 Overview 9-1
9-2 List of Abbreviations 9-3
9-3 Console View 9-4
9-4 External Covers 9-5
9-5 Additional Console Hardware 9-7
9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts 9-9
9-7 Operator Control Panel Brackets 9-13
9-8 Gas Spring 9-14
9-9 Monitor Assembly 9-16
9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly 9-20
9-11 Front End Processor Assembly 9-26
9-12 I/O Interfaces 9-32
9-13 3-D Externals 9-34
9-14 Back End Processor Assemblies 9-35
9-15 Software 9-41
9-16 Interconnect Cables 9-44
9-17 Power Distribution Modules 9-61
9-18 Air Distribution 9-62
9-19 Voice Scan 9-63
9-20 4D Components 9-66
9-21 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components 9-67
9-22 Peripherals 9-68
9-23 Customer Documentation 9-69
9-24 Probes 9-70
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-2 Section 9-1 - Overview
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-1-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Models Numbers
Special Service Tool: service key/dongle (p/n 066E0703) required for some GE proprietary operations.
Table 9-2 LOGIQ™ 9 Model Designations
Part Number Description
2188900 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP1.0
2188900-4 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-5 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.0
2188900-6 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.0
2351100 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2351100-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.1 BT’02
2375600 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2375600-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP2.2 BT’03
2404587 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
2404587-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3 BT’04
5150000 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-2 LOGIQ™ 9 240V Console & Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5150000-3 LOGIQ™ 9 120V Console & 240V Peripherals - BEP3.5 BT’06
5177000 LOGIQ™ 9 120-60V Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*
5177000-2 LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V PAL Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*
5177000-3 LOGIQ™ 9 220-50V NTSC Console & Peripherals - BEP4.1 BT’07 + BT09*
*BT09 is a software-only upgrade
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-3
1/22/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-2List of Abbreviations
• Assy - Assembly• BEP - Back End Processor• CRU - Customer Replacement Unit• Ctrl - Control• FEP - Front End Processor• F.O.B - Flock of Birds or 3-D Option• FRU 1 - Replacement part available in parts hub• FRU 2 - Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved)• LCD - Liquid Crystal Display• Int - Internal• I/O - Input/Output• PWA - Printed Wire Assembly• Recv - Receive• XFRMR - Transformer
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-4 Section 9-3 - Console View
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-3Console View
Left Front Rear RightFigure 9-1 Console Views
Table 9-3 Parts by Table Numbers
Part Table Name Table Number Part Table Name Table Number
External Covers Table 9-4 Back End Processor AssembliesTable 9-20Table 9-21Table 9-22
Additional Console Hardware Table 9-5BEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 1 and 2.xBEP Base Image Load Matrix - BEP 3.x/4.xSoftware Tools
Table 9-23Table 9-24Table 9-25
Operator I/O Mechanical Parts Table 9-6 Peripheral Cables
Table 9-26Table 9-27Table 9-28Table 9-29Table 9-30
Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086 Table 9-7 Power Distribution Table 9-31
Operator Panel Brackets Table 9-8 Air Distribution Parts Table 9-32
Gas Spring Table 9-9 Voice Scan Table 9-33
Monitor Assembly - Standard Table 9-10 Wireless Interconnect Table 9-34
Monitor Assembly - 17” LCDMonitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Table 9-11Table 9-12 4 D Parts Table 9-35
Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper Table 9-14 Continuous Wave Doppler Components Table 9-36
Operator Control Panel Assembly - LowerTable 9-15Table 9-16 Approved Peripherals Table 9-37
Front End Processor Assembly Table 9-17 User Documentation Table 9-38
I/O Interfaces Table 9-18 Available Probes Table 9-39
3-D Externals Table 9-19 Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix Table 9-40
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-5
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-4External Covers
Figure 9-2 External Covers
101
101A
102A102
103A
103
103B
104A
104
104B
105
105A
106
107
108
108A
109A
110109
110A
111
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-6 Section 9-4 - External Covers
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-4 External Covers (cont’d)
Table 9-4 External Covers
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
101 Top Cover FB307383 Replaced with FC307772 1 - N
101A Top Cover FC307772 Replaces FB307383 1 - 1
102 Front Cover FC307771 Cover only 1 - 1
102A Front Cover Assembly FC200076 with Two Labels, Apply the Appropriate Label 1 - 1
103 Right Side Cover FC307422 Cover only 1 - 1
103A Right Side Cover Assembly FC200074 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
103B Right Side Cover Assembly FC200422with bumper and GE Logo. If ordering to replace
non-logo cover, also order FC200421 and replace set
1 - 1
104 Left Side Cover FC307773 Cover only 1 - 1
104A Left Side Cover Assembly FC200073 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
104B Left Side Cover Assembly FC200421with bumper and GE Logo. If ordered to replace
non-logo cover, also order FC200422 and replace set
1 - 1
105 Rear Cover FC307776 Cover only 1 - 1
105A Rear Cover Assembly FC200077 with bumper - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
106 Rear Filter Cover FB200385 with brackets - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
107 Footrest Bumper FB307387 1 - 1
108 Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307990 Replaced with FC307785 1 - N
108A Color Printer Cavity Filler Insert FC307785 Replaces FB307990 1 - 1
109 B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FB307989 Replaced with FC307784 1 - N
109A B/W Printer Cavity Filler Insert FC307784 Replaces FB307989 1 - 1
110 VCR Cavity Filler Insert FB307988 Replaced with FC307783 1 - N
110A VCR Cavity Filler Insert FC307783 Replaces FB307988 1 - 1
111 Filter Media FB307903 Dust Filter - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-7
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-5Additional Console Hardware
Figure 9-3 Additional Console Hardware
142143144
145
146
147
148
149 150
151
145A
150A
141
151A 152
148A
149A147A150B
142A
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-8 Section 9-5 - Additional Console Hardware
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-5 Additional Console Hardware (cont’d)
Table 9-5 Additional Console Hardware
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
141 Caster Hub Caps 2293008-5 Need to order 2 per caster, adhesive mounting 1 - 1
142 Rear Casters (wheels) 2293008-3
Does Not Have Pedal Activated Swivel Lock Assembly. Manual Swivel Lock
- Same as Vivid 7 -Also order FC200829
2 - 1
142A Rear Caster Replacement Tool FC200829Wooden wedge and bevel edge board
rear caster replacement tools 2 - 1
143 Front Casters (wheels) 2293008-2Includes Swivel Lock Assembly
- Same as Vivid 7 -2 - 1
144 Shelf Cover 2291452 1 - 1
145 TV/TR Probe Holder Front 2291455 1 - 1
145A TV/TR Probe Holder Rear 2299040 1 - 1
146 Pocket Shelf Mat 2291453 1 - 1
147 Under Shelf Cover 2291454 1 - 2
147A Under Shelf Cover 2291454-2 BT06 and later 1 - 2
148 Right Probe Holder Assembly 2299038 1 - 1
148A Right Probe Holder Assembly - DSB 5212181 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
149 Left Probe Holder Assembly 2299039 1 - 1
149A Left Probe Holder Assembly - DSB 5212272 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
150 Gel Warmer Assembly * see note 2291461 *Need to order GE Logo Decal 2269030-15 orL9 Logo Decal 5255441 1 - 1
150A GE Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 2269030-15 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 - 1
150B L9 Logo Decal for Gel Warmer 5255441 Must order when replacing Gel Warmer 1 - 1
151 Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637 12VDC Power Source - Obsolete (See FMI 70183) 1 - N
151A Gel Warmer Power Source 2329637-3 6VDC Power Source (BT’06 and earlier) 1 - 1
152 Gel Warmer and Subwoofer Power Supply
5133204-6 Dual Out Power Supply & Gel Warmer (BT’06 and later) 1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-9
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-6Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
Figure 9-4 OP I/O Mechanical Parts
170
171172
173
175
176177
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
175A
182A
183A
178
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-10 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (cont’d)
Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
170 Top Console Upper Casting Assembly
2331665 Assembly for Service 1 - 2
171 Top Console Lower Casting Assembly
2331858 Assembly for Service 1 - 2
172 Frogleg (complete) FB200340 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
173 Frogleg Bumper Kit FC200086goes on back/top half of Frogleg arms
- Same as Vivid 7 -1 - 1
175 Rear Handle Assembly FB200406 with cable wrap hooks - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
175A Rear Handle Assembly - DSB 5199876 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
176 Brake Lock Pedal FB307407 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
177 Directional Lock Pedal FB307409 Swivel Lock Pedal 1 - 1
178 Upper Column Cover FC307787 Part of KitColumn Cover Kit FC200088
1 - 1
178 Lower Column Cover FC307779 1 - 1
179 Top Console Lock Assembly FB200350 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
180 Lock Release FB200920 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
181 X-Y Release Handle FB307297 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
182 Z-Release Handle FB307296 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
182A Z-Release Handle - DSB 5213108 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 2
183 Main Handle with Label FC200131 Front Handle with Label in center 1 - 1
183A Main Handle - DSB 5213255 BT07 and later with 19” LCD only - Dark Steel Blue 1 - 1
184 Pedal Assembly FB200595 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
185 Wire Cable, Gas Spring FB307375 Wire used when operating vertical movement of Top Console - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 2
186 Frogleg Shim Kit 5116529
Needed on some models to keep the frogleg from rubbing on the operator console
Kit contains two .635 mm washers and one 1mm washer See Section 8-20 "Frog Leg Angle
Adjustment" on page 8-92
1 - 1
188 Subwoofer Speaker Assembly 5133204-2 1 - 1
189 Speaker Harness 5133204-3 1 - 1
190 Speaker Grill 5133204-4 1 - 1
191 Knob 5133204-5 1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-11
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
192 Brake mechanism - Left Connecting Rod
FB307471
- Same as Vivid 7 -threaded rod between front brake and caster.
Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper screws as necessary
1 - 1
193 Brake mechanism - Right Connecting Rod
FB307472
- Same as Vivid 7 -threaded rod between front brake and caster
Also order Parking Brake Pedal and Front Bumper screws as necessary
1 - 1
194 Brake mechanism - Parking Brake Pedal screws
080X0612 - Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism 1 - 1
195 Brake mechanism - Front Bumper screws
080X0612 - Same as Vivid 7 - Brake mechanism - 1 - 1
Table 9-6 Operator I/O Mechanical Parts (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-12 Section 9-6 - Operator I/O Mechanical Parts
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-6-1 Bumper Kit, Frogleg
Figure 9-5 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above
Table 9-7 Bumper Kit, Frogleg FC200086
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
1 BUMPER CRASH PAD - Bumper Crash Rear 1 - N
2 BUMPER INNER BOSS - - 1 - N
3 BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG - - 1 - N
4 BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG - - 1 - N
5 BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH - - 2 - N
1
2
3
4
5
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-13
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-7Operator Control Panel Brackets
Figure 9-6 Operator Panel Brackets
Table 9-8 Operator Panel Brackets
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
190 Storage Tray Bracket 2306018 1 - 2
191 Upper Casting Bracket 2291449 1 - 2
192 “U” Bracket 2330476 ‘U’ Shaped Bracket, Nut is Attached to Casting 1 - 2
193 TV/TR Front Bracket 2306021 1 - 2
194 Bulkhead Bracket 2305886Does Not Include s
Through BT03 with SVGA Style1 - 2
194A Bulkhead Bracket 5119174 BT04 with DVI Style 1 - 1
190
191
192
193
194
Bracket on units built before Mid-2002. Replaced by Item # 192.
194A
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-14 Section 9-8 - Gas Spring
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-8Gas Spring
WARNINGWARNING WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SPRING IS COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING NORMAL OPERATION THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE OF THE GAS SPRING ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS GAS SPRING. PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND THE SPRING PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE ELEVATION ASSEMBLY.
Figure 9-7 Gas Spring
Table 9-9 Gas Spring
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
1 Gas Spring 080X4500
- Same as Vivid 7- BT’04 and earlier
NOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part
5160374.
1 - 1
1A Gas Spring (BT’06) 5160374
For CRT or LCD, BT’06 and laterNOTE: BT01/02/03 consoles may have been
factory-upgraded to LCD. In this case, use part 5160374.
1 - 1
1
2
3
4
1A
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-15
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
2 Socket, Wire Cross Spring FB307376 Socket for Gas Spring release cable 1 - 1
3 Spring for Release Wire 080X4010 1 - 1
4 Nipple Screws 080X4530 1 - 1
Table 9-9 Gas Spring (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-16 Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-9Monitor Assembly
9-9-1 CRT Monitor Assembly
Figure 9-8 Monitor Assembly - Standard
Table 9-10 Monitor Assembly - Standard
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
251 Open Frame Monitor 2283334-4 - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 1 - 1
252 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-see Callout 545 on page 9-44
1 - 2
253 Speaker and Mounting Bracket Kit 2297882 2 - 2
254 Monitor Tilt/Swivel/Male Post 2284225 Neck Assembly 1 - 2
255 Monitor Rear Cover Assembly 2303930 Assembly with Speaker Grills 1 - 2
256 Monitor Left Speaker Grill 2279675 Labeled as the LEFT Speaker Grill 1 - 2
257 Monitor Right Speaker Grill 2279676 Labeled as the RIGHT Speaker Grill 1 - 2
258 Monitor Screw Caps (covers) 2303932 Covers the screws on each side in the back of the cover - Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7- 2 - 2
259 Monitor Front Bezel Assembly 2303929-2 Includes three logos Vivid 7, LOGIQ 7 and LOGIQ 9 1 - 2
260 Monitor Switch Assembly 2297050 User Switch Assembly 1 - 2
251
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
252
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-17
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-9-2 Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD
Figure 9-9 Monitor Assembly - LCD 17”
Table 9-11 Monitor Assembly - 17” LCD
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
261 17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display 5125393 Going obsolete. If unavailable, use 5169935-2 1 - 1
261A 17 inch LCD Flat Panel Display 5169935-2 1 - 1
262 17 inch Speaker Set 5132576 1 - 1
263 17 inch Panel Front LCD 5132572 1 - 1
264 17 inch Panel Rear LCD 5132573 1 - 1
265 17 inch Rear Cover VESA LCD 5166624 BT06 and later 1 - 1
266 17 inch Mic & Switch Assembly LCD 5137744 1 - 1
267 17 inch LCD ARM 5130651 17 “ LCD Arm Assembly with (4) cables 1 - 1
268 17 inch LCD Arm Gas Spring 5224462 1 - 1
269 LCD Video Card 5111298 Matrox card - If no longer available, order 5111298-2 1 - 1
269A LCD Video Card 5111298-2 Matrox card 1 - 1
270 17 inch LCD Cables (4) 5135957 1 - 1
271 17 inch Spiral Wrap - 1/2” 5152397 1/2” - Power and DVI HDMI cables 1 - 1
272 17 inch Spiral Wrap - 3/8” 5152399 3/8” - Speaker and Ground cables 1 - 1
273 17 inch LCD Adapter 5135957-6 HDMI to DVI-I adapter 1 - 1
263 264 265
266
267
262
272
261 261A
269
269A
270
271
268
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-18 Section 9-9 - Monitor Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-9-3 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Figure 9-10 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Table 9-12 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
276 19 inch LCD Monitor 521280819” LCD Monitor,
also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap and (1) 46-208747P1 ty wrap mount
1 - 1
277 19 inch LCD Rear Cover 5199018 Rear Cover 1 - 1
277A 19 inch LCD Rear Cover Screw 46-312358P36 Screw for Rear Cover 1 - 1
278 Adaptor Power Supply Assy 5212977 Power Supply, Ty wraps 1 - 1
279 19 inch LCD Speaker Assy 5199460 19” LCD Speaker Assembly 1 - 1
280 19 inch LCD ARM 5212677 19” LCD Arm Assembly 1 - 1
281 19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable 5198235-2 Microphone Cable crosses up to 5256603 1 - 1
281A 19 inch LCD Mic Adaptor Cable 5256603 Microphone Cable, alternate to 5198235-2 1 - 1
282 19 inch LCD Video Cable 5214911 Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps,crosses up to 5256600 1 - 1
276 277
277A
278
279
280
281
281A
282
282
283
283A
283B
284
284A
285
286 286A287
288
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-19
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
282A 19 inch LCD Video Cable 5256600 Video Cable, also order (2) 46-208758P1 ty wraps, alternate to 5214911 1 - 1
283 19 inch LCD DC Power 5212254 DC Power Cable, also order (1) 46-208758P1 ty wrap,crosses up to 5256601 and 5256601-1 1 - 1
283A 19 inch LCD DC Power 5256601 DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254, obsolete, use 5256601-1 1 - 1
283B 19 inch LCD DC Power 5256601-1 DC Power Cable, alternate to 5212254 1 - 1
284 19 inch LCD Speaker Cable 5198216 Speaker Cable, crosses up to 5256602 1 - 1
284A 19 inch LCD Speaker Cable 5256602 Speaker Cable, alternate to 5198216 1 - 1
285 19 inch LCD Arm Adaptor Assy 5220151 Arm Adaptor Assy - Bushing and Screw 1 - 1
286 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5198490 Power Cable AC, crosses up to 5256605 1 - 1
286A 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5256605 Power Cable AC, alternate to 5198490 1 - 1
287 19 inch Subwoofer Ground Reference Cable
5234477 Adapter between subwoofer/gel warmer PS and gel warmer 1 - 1
288 19 inch LCD AC Power Cable 5256605-2 LCD power cable (longer) used on BT01, BT02, BT03 LCD factory upgrades 1 - 1
Table 9-12 Monitor Assembly - 19” LCD (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-20 Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-10Operator Control Panel Assembly
9-10-1 Upper Op Panel
Figure 9-11 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Upper
Table 9-13 Console/Operator Panel Compatibility Matrix
ConsoleType
FRU
BT01/02/03- OR -
BT01/02/03 console upgraded toBT07 and Later BEP 4.1
BT04/06/07BEP 3.x
Forward ProductionBT07/BT09 CRU
Upper Operator Panel Assembly
2188902-3 (obsolete)2188902-13 (obsolete)
2188902-33
2404652-3 (obsolete)2404652-13
2404652 -103 -
Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-xx 2404652-xx -
LCD Backlight Inverter2188902-6 (obsolete)
2188902-162404652-6 -
TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2188902-7 2404652-7 -
Bezel - Upper Op Panel 2188902-15 -
Slide Pot Knobs 5115063 Y
Inside Touch Panel Assembly
201 201A 201B
202
203 203A
204
205
202A 202B
201D201C 201E
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-21
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-10 Operator Control Panel Assembly (cont’d)
Table 9-14 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Upper
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
201 Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-3 Obsolete - use 2188902-13 1 - N
201A Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-13has USB port A
Use 2188902-33 (when 2188902-13 no longer available)1 - 1
201B Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-33has USB port - new style spacer between bezel &
touchpanelReplaces 2188902-13
1 - 1
201C Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-3BT04 Only - with simplified cable interface.
If unavailable, use 2404652-13. Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-2
1 - 1
201D Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-13BT04 and later consoles
Must be used with BEP4.1 (LVDS) or BEP 3.xMust be used with lower op panel 2404652-2
1 - 1
201E Upper Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-103 Must use with BEP4.0 (DVI)Must be used with lower op panel 2404652-xx 1 - 1
202 LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-6Use with 2188902-3 or -13
When depleted, use 2188902-161 - 1
202A LCD Backlight Inverter 2404652-6 BT04 and later - Use with 2404652-3 or 2404652-13Cannot be used with 2188902 series op panels 1 - 1
202B LCD Backlight Inverter 2188902-16 Backward compatible with 2188902-6 1 - 1
203 TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2188902-7 Circuit board slide pot - For use with Upper Op Panel 2188902-3 or 2188902-13 1 - 1
203A TGC (Slide Pot) PWA 2404652-7 Circuit board slide pot - Use w/Upper Op Panel 2404652-3 or -13 1 - 1
204 Bezel - Upper Operator Panel 2188902-15 1 - 1
205 Slide Pot Knobs 5115063 Group of ten knobs on TGC PWA 1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-22 Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-10-2 Lower Operator Panel
Figure 9-12 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower
Table 9-15 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
211 Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-2 - Obsolete - use 2188902-32 1 - N
211A Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-12With Standby. Backward compatible.
R3.X.X Software and above MUST USE this part.When depleted, use 2188902-32.
1 - N
211B Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2188902-32 BT03 lower op panel with 4D markings on buttons 1 - 1
211C Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-2
BT’04 with simplified cable interfaceCan only be used with upper op panel 2404652-xx
(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-4 if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)
When depleted, use 2404652-32.
1 - 1
211D Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-12
Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytopsCan only be used with upper op panel
2404652-1xx(May also need A/N Keyboard 2404652-14
if Upper Op Panel is Rev1)When depleted, use 2404652-32
1 - 1
211E Lower Operator Panel Assembly 2404652-32
Lower OP Panel Assembly BT07 and later. Includes 2404652-15 trackball.
Backward compatible with 2404652-12, -2Must be used with upper op panel:
2404652-3, -13, or -103May be used with BEP 3.x, BEP 4.0 or BEP 4.1
1 - 1
212 A/N Keyboard - English 2188902-4Alpha Numeric Keyboard
R3.X.X Software MUST USE 2188902-14Obsolete - use 2188902-14
1 - N
212A A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2188902-14
With Standby. Backward compatible. R3.X.X Software MUST USE this part
When depleted, use 2404652-4 or 2404652-14.Do NOT use 2188902-14 in 2404652-x op panel.
1 - N
211A
211C
213A
214A
215
216
217
212C
213B
215A222A
214
213
222 223
214B
223A
212B212A212
211B
211
211D 211E
215B
224
225
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-23
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
212B A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2404652-4BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting
When depleted, use 2404652-14. Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel.
1 - 1
212C A/N Analog Keyboard - English 2404652-14 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytop.Backward compatible with 2188902-x op panel. 1 - 1
213 A/N Keyboard - Russian 2188902-20 As required 1 - 1
213A A/N Keyboard - Russian 2404652-20BT04 and BT06 improved back lighting
When depleted, use 2404652-50.1 - 1
213B A/N Keyboard - Russian 2404652-50 Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
214 A/N Keyboard - Greek 2188902-21 As required 1 - 1
214A A/N Keyboard - Greek 2404652-21BT’04 and BT06 improved back lighting
When depleted, use 2404652-51.1 - 1
214B A/N Keyboard - Greek 2404652-51 Includes new BT07and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
215 Trackball 2188902-5 When depleted, use 2404652-15. 1 - 1
215A Trackball Assembly 2404652-5 When depleted, use 2404652-15. 1 - 1
215B Trackball Assembly 2404652-15 Backward compatible with 2404652-5, 2188902-5 1 - 1
216 4D Probe Holder 5111708 1 Y 1
217 Bezel - Lower Operator Panel 2188902-11 1 - 1
222 A/N Keyboard - Swedish 2404652-22 Use 2404652-52 (when 2404652-22 stock is depleted) 1 - 1
222A A/N Keyboard - Swedish 2404652-52 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
223 A/N Keyboard - Norwegian 2404652-26 Use 2404652-56 (when 2404652-26 stock is depleted) 1 - 1
223A A/N Keyboard - Norwegian 2404652-56 Includes new BT07 and later F5 and F6 keytops 1 - 1
224 Single Shaft Encoder 066E2306 Replacement part for all lower op panels: e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12 1 - 1
225 Concentric Shaft Encoder 2404652-19 Replacement part for all lower op panels: e.g. 2188902-32, 2404652-2, 2404652-12 1 - 1
Table 9-15 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-24 Section 9-10 - Operator Control Panel Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-10-3 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs
Figure 9-13 Operator Control Panel Assembly (Op I/O) - Lower
218 218A
219
219A
221
220
222
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-25
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-10-3 Lower Op Panel - Buttons and Knobs (cont’d)
Table 9-16 Operator Control Panel Assembly - Lower - Buttons and Knobs
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
218 Universal Knob Kit 2384216 Obsolete - order 5114700 1 - N
218A Universal Knob Kit 5114700
All blue gumdrop knobs - Replaces 2384216This Kit contained; 4 small domed knobs, 4 large
dished knobs, 6 large domed knobssame as Vivid 7
1 Y 1
219 Programmable Button Keytop Kit
2188902-9 Key caps for customer to customize the P1 - P4 key caps 1 Y 1
219A Button Cap Kit 2188902-10 Includes all buttons (except thumb buttons) 1 Y 1
220 Key Ring and Operator Panel Mode select Knob Kit
2188902-8 Includes: 4 Mode select knobs (Inner & Outer pieces) and Key Ring 1 - N
221 Mode Select Knob Kit with 3D/4D Button with XYZ markings
2404652-8 Four Mode Select Knobs (M, PW, CF, B) and 3D/4D Grey Bowl Button 1 Y 1
222 F5 and F6 A/N keytops 2404652-9 F5 and F6 A/N keytops, along with key puller 1 Y 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-26 Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-11Front End Processor Assembly
Figure 9-14 Front End Processor Assembly
410
Empty Card Slot
BT’01 Card Rack
BT’02, BTCard Rack
401
402 402A
402B 402C 402D
411411411411411411 411F
403404
405 405A
405B
406
406A
406B
406C
407
408
408A
409
409A 409C
409D
409E
409G
through
402E
409B
414
409F
413412
405C
405D
409H
410A
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-27
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-11 Front End Processor Assembly (cont’d)
Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly
Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X
LOGIQ 9Model Number
2188
900-
X (B
T’01
)
2351
100-
X (B
T’02
)
2375
600-
X (B
T’03
)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2404
587-
X (B
T04)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2375
600-
X (B
T03
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
5150
000-
x (B
T06)
5143
928
(BT0
3 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5143
923
(BT0
4 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5177
000-
x (B
T07/
BT0
9)
H49
06H
W /
H49
06H
Y(F
OB
) (B
T02
- BT0
7/09
upg
rade
)
5176
631
(BT0
3 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
411
(BT0
4 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
466
(BT0
6 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
ItemPart
NamePart
Number Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
401 Back Plane 2260219 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Front End Back Plane 1 - 2
402 SCB1 2260214-2 XScan Control Board. Use 2260214-3 if stock is depleted
1 - 1
402A SCB1.1 2260214-3 X1 X Scan Control Board - Required if using EBM Board
1 - 1
402B SCB2 2365739 X X X Has BT03 Functionality - Obsolete
1 - N
402C SCB2 2365739-3 X X X X X X Included power up transmit overload fix - Obsolete
1 - N
402D SCB2-4 2365739-4 X X X X X X X Additional transmit overload fix during run time - Obsolete
1 - N
402E SCB2-5 2365739-5 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Supervisory Circuit and 4D Reset Updates.
1 - 1
403 BMP4 2260207 X B-Mode Processor 1 - 1
404 EQ4 2260210 X Equalization Board 1 - 1
405 TD4 2260194-2 X X X X X X XTransmit/Delay Board. When stock depleted order 2260194-3
1 - 1
405A TD4.1 2260194-3 X X X X X X XTransmit/Delay BoardYou can mix TD4s and TD4.1s
1 - 1
405B TD5 2362863 X X X X X X X
New power requirements different from TD4. Can not mix with TD4s. Requires FEPS3You can mix TD5s and TD5.1sWhen stock depleted order 2386031
1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-28 Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
405C TD5.1 2386031 X X X X X X XSame Function as TD5 but larger and fewer ASICs. You can mix TD5s and TD5.1s
1 - 1
405D TD6 5142651 X X X Not Backward Compatible -- Used with R6.0.0 and later.
1 - 1
406 RF AMP 2260212 X X XRadio Frequency Amplifier BoardObsolete - Use 2341985-2
1 - N
406A RF AMP1.2 2341985-2 X X X X X X X Design Improvement 1 - 1
406B RF AMP2 2357621 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4
New power requirement different from RF AMP1.X Requires FEPS3Must only use 5115468 T Plane Use 2357621-2 if stock depleted
1 - 1
406C RF AMP2-2 2357621-2 X X X X X X X X X X
Same as RF Amp 2-2 except has schottky diodes Must use 2291656 Top Plane
1 - 1
407 XDIF 2260221 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Transducer Interface Board 1 - 1
408 Top Plane 2291656 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4 X4Top Plane connects XDIF to RF Amp on front of cards. No schotky diodes
1 - 1
408A Top Plane 5115468 X X X X X X Has schottky diodes 1 - 1
409 FEPS 2260203 X3
Front End Power Supply - Obsolete -When replaced with 2273641-3 or 2273641-4, requires replacement of the Front End Card Rack Cover in Kit 2374426
1 - N
Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X
LOGIQ 9Model Number
2188
900-
X (B
T’01
)
2351
100-
X (B
T’02
)
2375
600-
X (B
T’03
)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2404
587-
X (B
T04)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2375
600-
X (B
T03
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
5150
000-
x (B
T06)
5143
928
(BT0
3 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5143
923
(BT0
4 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5177
000-
x (B
T07/
BT0
9)
H49
06H
W /
H49
06H
Y(F
OB
) (B
T02
- BT0
7/09
upg
rade
)
5176
631
(BT0
3 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
411
(BT0
4 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
466
(BT0
6 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
ItemPart
NamePart
Number Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-29
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
409A FEPS2 2273641-3 X3 X X X X X X
Second Generation FEPSCross to a FEPS2.1 if stock is depletedMay require Front End Card Rack cover kit 2374426 if replacing a 2260203 FEPS
1 - 1
409B FEPS2.1 2273641-4 X3 X X X X X XSecond Generation with Standby Capabilities cross up to -6
1 - 1
409C FEPS2.5 2273641-5 X3 X X X X X X partial latch fix (all but -5 V analog)
1 - 1
409D FEPS2.6 2273641-6 X3 X X X X X X
Replaces FEPS2 (2273641-3) and FEPS2.1 (2273641-4)Only applies to TD4 systems
1 - 1
409E FEPS3 2376843 X X X X X X X
Analog Voltages are +/- 6V and 13V compared to +/-5v and 12V found in FEPS, FEPS2 and FEPS2.1Must use in systems w/ TD5.X and RF Amp2 (DO NOT use in R2.X.X systems or Systems upgraded to BT’03)Transmit overload fix (2376843-6): Replaces 237643 and 2376843-3, FMI 70188.2376843-92 replaces 2376843-2 (for BT03 systems with TD5.x boards)
1 - N
409F FEPS3.2 2376843-2 X X X X X X X X X Partial latch fix (all but -6 V analog)
1 - N
409G FEPS3.3 2376843-3 X X X X X X X X X X Replaces 2376843 and 2376843-2
1 - 1
Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X
LOGIQ 9Model Number
2188
900-
X (B
T’01
)
2351
100-
X (B
T’02
)
2375
600-
X (B
T’03
)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2404
587-
X (B
T04)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2375
600-
X (B
T03
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
5150
000-
x (B
T06)
5143
928
(BT0
3 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5143
923
(BT0
4 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5177
000-
x (B
T07/
BT0
9)
H49
06H
W /
H49
06H
Y(F
OB
) (B
T02
- BT0
7/09
upg
rade
)
5176
631
(BT0
3 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
411
(BT0
4 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
466
(BT0
6 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
ItemPart
NamePart
Number Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-30 Section 9-11 - Front End Processor Assembly
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
409H FEPS3.6 2376843-6 X X X X X X X X X X Replaces FEPS3 to eliminate transmit overload.
1 - 1
410FEP AC Line Filter & Cable
2315960 X X X X X X
Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter and Power HarnessObsolete, use 2375555 except for BT01
1 - 1
410A FEP AC Line Filter
2375555 X X X X X X* X X XBackward compatible for BT07 and earlier,*except for BT01 systems.
1 - 1
411 EBM 2273639-3 X2 X
Combined functions of EQ4 & BMP4. Positioned in the old EQ4 Slot. Needs SCB 2260214-3Obsolete - replace with 2273639-6
1 - N
411A EBM 2273639-6 X X I2C Reliability Improvements 1 - 1
411B EBM1.8 2273639-5 X X XEBM Board Upgraded to EBM2 functionality - Replace with EBM2, 2273639-21
1 - N
411C EBM2 2273639-20 X X XHas BT03 Functionality -obsolete - Replace with 2273639-21
1 - N
411D EBM2 2273639-21 X X X Has BT’03 Functionality - I2C Reliability Improvements
1 - 1
411E EBM2.5 2273639-23 X X X X
Has BT’04 Functionality 4D Option requires 2273639-24Obsolete - replace with 2273639-24
1 - N
411F EBM2.6 2273639-24 X X X X X X X X X X X X Has BT’04 Functionality Required for 4D Option
1 - 1
Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X
LOGIQ 9Model Number
2188
900-
X (B
T’01
)
2351
100-
X (B
T’02
)
2375
600-
X (B
T’03
)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2404
587-
X (B
T04)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2375
600-
X (B
T03
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
5150
000-
x (B
T06)
5143
928
(BT0
3 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5143
923
(BT0
4 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5177
000-
x (B
T07/
BT0
9)
H49
06H
W /
H49
06H
Y(F
OB
) (B
T02
- BT0
7/09
upg
rade
)
5176
631
(BT0
3 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
411
(BT0
4 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
466
(BT0
6 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
ItemPart
NamePart
Number Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-31
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
1 SCB1 can be used on this model number also.2 EBM can be used on this model replacing the BMP4 and EQ4. However EBM requires SCB1.1 at a minimum.3 FEPS2 and FEPS2.1 can be used on this model number. However, must also use FEP Card Rack Cover Kit 2374426.4 Combination of Top Plane and RF AMP must have at least one schotky diode. Therefore, never use 2357621 and
2291656 together.
412FEP Card Cage Front Cover Kit
2374426 X X X X X X X X X Obsolete, use 5159491 1 - N
413FEP Card Cage Front Cover Kit
5159491 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Required if upgrading from FEPS to FEPS2/FEP2.1Additional shielding around Top Plane and Power Supply areas. Labels included in kit to match FEP configuration.Corrects barber pole artifact.
1 - 1
414 Card Cage 2373269 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Cover with power supply shield
1 - 1
Table 9-17 Front End Processor Assembly (Continued)
Applications Software R2.X.X R3.X.X R4.X.X R6.X.X R7.X.X/R9.X.X
LOGIQ 9Model Number
2188
900-
X (B
T’01
)
2351
100-
X (B
T’02
)
2375
600-
X (B
T’03
)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT’
03 u
pgra
de)
2404
587-
X (B
T04)
2188
900-
X (B
T01
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2351
100-
X (B
T02
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
2375
600-
X (B
T03
- BT0
4 up
grad
e)
5150
000-
x (B
T06)
5143
928
(BT0
3 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5143
923
(BT0
4 - B
T06
upgr
ade)
5177
000-
x (B
T07/
BT0
9)
H49
06H
W /
H49
06H
Y(F
OB
) (B
T02
- BT0
7/09
upg
rade
)
5176
631
(BT0
3 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
411
(BT0
4 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
5177
466
(BT0
6 - B
T07/
09 u
pgra
de)
ItemPart
NamePart
Number Description
Qty
CRU
FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-32 Section 9-12 - I/O Interfaces
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-12I/O Interfaces
Figure 9-15 I/O Interfaces
USB MODEM OPTION
w/ Modem
MODEM
INTERNAL
I/0
C18
BEP
w/ Modem
Connects to
Phone Line
301
302 302A
302B 302C
304303A
303
302D 302E
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-33
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-12 I/O Interfaces (cont’d)
Table 9-18 I/O Interfaces
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
301 External I/O Assembly FB200198 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
302 Internal I/O Assembly FB200197- Same as Vivid 7 -
Obsolete - Use FC2004231 - N
302A Internal I/O Assembly FC200423
- Same as Vivid 7 -Has gain increase for improved microphone performance
Used on BT03 and earlierObsolete - Use FC200695
1 - N
302B Internal I/O Assembly FC200695 Replaces FC200423 1 - 1
302C Internal IO W/Gender change FC200503
BT04 Only - Has male connector for II/O to BEP cable- Same as Vivid 7 -
Obsolete - Use FC200889
1 - N
302D Internal IO W/Gender change FC200651 Obsolete - Use FC200889 1 - N
302E Internal IO W/Gender change FC200889 BT04 systems and later - replaces FC200503 and FC200651 1 - 1
303 Global Modem Assembly 2245794 Multi-Tech - New installation requires cable kit #2368850 -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
303A USB Global Modem Kit 5112680Includes modem 5114058, and Telco Adapter Kit
2249450Used with BEP3 only
1 - 1
304 USB Modem 5114058 Includes USB Modem, USB Cable, and phone cablesUsed with BEP3 only 1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-34 Section 9-13 - 3-D Externals
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-133-D Externals
Figure 9-16 3-D Externals
Table 9-19 3-D Externals
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
470 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Transmitter 2301019-4 Option Kit 1 - 1
471 3-D Externals - PCI Bird Receiver 2301019-5 Option Kit 1 - 1
470 471
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-35
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-14Back End Processor Assemblies
9-14-1 BEP 1
Figure 9-17 BEP 1
Table 9-20 Back End Processor Assembly 1
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
450 Back End Processor (BEP1) 2266548-3 BEP1 - P3 Processor 1 - 1
451 Back End Processor (BEP1) w/ 3-D Option
2266548-4P3 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option
(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included - See Table 9-19)
1 - 1
452 Back End Processor Power Supply
2348186-38 Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X 1 - 1
453 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.
Expected battery life is 1 year-Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 2
454 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 1 2366650 Will need to transfer mounting tray to new HDD 1 - 1
455 BIOS Blaster CD 2266548-27 BEP1 only 1 - 1
456 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 Motherboard battery 1 - 1
BEP1 Repairable 2266548-13 BEP1 -
450 451
452
453454
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-36 Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-14-2 BEP 2
Figure 9-18 BEP 2
Table 9-21 Back End Processor Assembly 2
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
460 Back End Processor (BEP2.0) 2348186-3 P4 Processor 1 - 1
460 Back End Processor (BEP 2.0) w/ 3-D Option
2348186-4, -74P4 Processor with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed
(PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)1 - 1
460 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-43, -73 BEP2.1 with 2.3 Power Supply 1 - 1
460 Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-44, -74 BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with 2.3 Power Supply 1 - 1
460 460A460A460A 460B 460C460C460C460C 460D460D460D460D460D460D
461
462
463
464
465
466 466A
467
469
460
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-37
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-67, -73 BEP2.0.1w/SB0220 Audio Card 1 - 1
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-68, -74 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0220 Audio Card with FOB 1 - 1
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-77, -73 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card 1 - 1
460A Back End Processor (BEP2.0.1) 2348186-78, -74 BEB2.0.1 w/SB0107 Audio Card w/ FOB 1 - 1
460B Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-13 P4 Processor with Digital VIC Card 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP 2.1) w/ 3-D Option
2348186-14P4 Processor (Digital VIC Card)
with 3-D “Flock of Birds” option installed (PCI Bird Transmitter & Receiver NOT Included)
1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-53, -73 BEP2.1 with New Sound Card 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-54 BEP2.1 “Flock of Birds” with New Sound Card 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-57 BEP2.1 w/o Base Image 1 - 1
460C Back End Processor (BEP2.1) 2348186-58 BEP2.1 w/o Base Image w/ FOB 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-63, -73With Version 2.3 Power Supply
Memory Upgrade to 768M1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) w/ 3-D Option
2348186-64With Version 2.3 Power Supply
Memory Upgrade to 768M1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-73 BEP2.2 Sound Card Change 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 2348186-74 BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” Sound Card Change 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP2.2) 2348186-83 BEP2.2 PC2IP II Board 1 - 1
460D Back End Processor (BEP 2.2) 2348186-84 BEP2.2 “Flock of Birds” PC2IP II Board 1 - 1
461 Back End Processor Power Supply
2348186-38 Version 2.3 For BEPs 1 & 2.X 1 - 1
462 BEP Battery Assembly 2266548-5Computer UPS Battery, located inside BEP Assy.
Expected battery life is 1 year-Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 2
463 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 2.x 2348186-31 Comes with bracket or mounting tray 1 - 1
464 Patient I/O Module 2348186-22 BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
465 MOD Drive 2348186-23 BEP 2.0 Only - 1.3 Gigabyte IDE - 3.5 inch 1 - 1
466 CD-RW Drive 2348186-37BEP 2.x Only -Same as Vivid 7 -
Obsolete - Use 24040281 - N
466A CD-RW Drive 2348186-47 BEP 2.x Obsolete - Use 2404028 1 - N
467 Fan 2348186-35 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 2.x Only 1 - 1
468 BIOS Blaster CD 2348186-27 BEP2.x only 1 - 2
469 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 Motherboard battery 1 - 1
Table 9-21 Back End Processor Assembly 2 (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-38 Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-14-3 BEP 3.x / 4.x
Figure 9-19 BEP 3.x / 4.x
484
485
486
BEP4.x
BEP3.x
475
475A
475B
475C
475D
475E
475F
475G
476
477
477A
478 478A
478B
479
480
481 481A
482
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-39
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-14-3BEP 3.x / 4.x (cont’d)
Table 9-22 Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
475 BEP3.0, Non-”Flock of Birds”(new PC2IPIIB)
2404027-3(2404027-13)
Complete assembly 1 - 1
475A BEP3.0, with ”Flock of Birds”(new PC2IPIIB)
2404027-4(2404027-14)
Complete assembly 1 - 1
475B BEP 3.5 Non-”Flock of Birds” 2404027-53 Complete assembly 1 - 1
475C BEP 3.5 with ”Flock of Birds” 2404027-54 Complete assembly 1 - 1
475DBEP 4.0Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)
5162777-3 Complete assembly 1 - 1
475EBEP 4.0 with ”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)
5162777-4 Complete assembly 1 - 1
475FBEP 4.1Non-”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)
5162777-7 Complete assembly 1 - 1
475GBEP 4.1 with ”Flock of Birds”, (new PC2IP3)
5162777-8 Complete assembly 1 - 1
476 BEP 3.x/ 4.x Power Supply 2404028-4 Also compatible for BEP 4.x 1 - 1
477 PCI DGVIC Assembly 5112272 BEP 3.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables 1 - 1
477A PCI DGVIC2 Assembly 5301220-2 BEP 4.x only - with bulkhead board and ribbon cables 1 - 1
478 PC2IPII card FC200312 If unavailable, use FC200656 1 - 1
478A PC2IPIIB card FC200656 BEP 3.x 1 - 1
478B PC2IP3 card 5197846 BEP 4.x only 1 - 1
479 Battery, BEP3.x / 4.x UPS 2404028-6 Set of 2 batteriesExpected battery life is 1 year 1 - 1
480 Hard Disk Drive (HDD) BEP 3.x / 4.x
2404028-2 Comes with bracket or mounting tray, and adaptor 1 - 1
481 CD/DVD Drive 2404028BEP 3 comes with bracket or mounting tray
(LG GSA-4167B replaces the Sony CD-RW Drive)Includes Patch disk for R2.x and R3.x
1 - 1
481A CD/DVD Drive 2404028-10 BT06 and later, BEP3.5 and later 1 - 1
482 Battery, CMOS 2404028-7 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x Motherboard battery 1 - 1
483 BEP3.x / 4.x Fan, Side Cover 2404028-5 Mounted on BEP Chassis Cover - BEP 3.x / BEP 4.x 1 - 1
484 MO Drive (External - stand alone)
2404028-3 For use with BEP 3 - BEP 3 does not have MO Drive 1 - 1
485 Intake Filter 2404028-8 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x 1 Y 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-40 Section 9-14 - Back End Processor Assemblies
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
486 Cover, FIlter 2404028-9 BEP3.x / BEP 4.x 1 Y 1
487 BIOS Blaster CD 5111457 For BEP 3 motherboard reset(obsolete - replaced with 5111457-3) 1 - N
487A BIOS Blaster CD 5111457-3 For BEP 3.x motherboard reset 1 - 1
487B BIOS Blaster CD 5215511-1 For BEP 4.x motherboard reset 1 - 1
Table 9-22 Back End Processor Assembly 3.x / 4.x (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-41
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-15Software
Tabl
e 9-
23
BEP
Bas
e Im
age
Load
Mat
rix -
BEP
1 a
nd 2
.x
App
licat
ion
Softw
are
L9
BEP
H
AR
DW
AR
E C
ON
FIG
UR
ATI
ON
BEP
122
6654
8 22
6654
8-2
2266
548-
322
6654
8-4
2266
548-
622
6654
8-10
2266
548-
1222
6654
8-13
2266
548-
1422
6654
8-16
BEP
2.0
2348
186-
323
4818
6-4
2348
186-
4323
4818
6-44
BEP
2.0.
1(P
rior t
o B
T03)
2348
186-
6723
4818
6-68
2348
186-
7723
4818
6-78
BEP
2.0.
1(F
or B
T03)
2348
186-
6723
4818
6-68
2348
186-
7723
4818
6-78
BEP
2.1
2348
186-
1323
4818
6-14
2348
186-
5323
4818
6-54
2348
186-
5723
4818
6-58
BEP
2.2
(Prio
r to
BT0
3)23
4818
6-63
2348
186-
6423
4818
6-73
2348
186-
74
BEP
2.2
(For
BT0
3)23
4818
6-63
2348
186-
6423
4818
6-73
2348
186-
7423
4818
6-83
2348
186-
84
BEP
2.2
(For
BT0
4)23
4818
6-63
2348
186-
6423
4818
6-73
2348
186-
7423
4818
6-83
2348
186-
84
R2.
4.0 (1
)23
5813
5-11
2371
612-
1323
7161
2-13
NA
2371
612-
1323
7161
2-13
NA
NA
R3.
0.12
(3)
NA
NA
NA
2371
612-
15N
AN
A23
7161
2-15
NA
R3.
1.1(3
)N
AN
AN
A23
7161
2-15
NA
NA
2371
612-
15N
A
R4.
1.3 (4
)N
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
AN
A24
0402
4-7
Cur
rent
(2) B
ase
Imag
e Lo
ad
2358
135-
1123
7161
2-13
2371
612-
1323
7161
2-15
2371
612-
1323
7161
2-13
2371
612-
1524
0402
4-7
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-42 Section 9-15 - Software
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-15 Software (cont’d)
(1) C
urre
nt R
2.X
App
licat
ion
Sof
twar
e =
R2.
4.0
(232
2686
-26)
.(2
) Bas
e Im
age
Load
s fo
r Res
pect
ive
BEP
are
Bac
kwar
ds c
ompa
tible
. (3
) Cur
rent
R3.
X A
pplic
atio
n S
oftw
are
= R
3.0.
11 (2
3226
86-6
4); R
3.0.
12 (2
3226
86-6
3); R
3.1.
0 O
bsol
ete.
See
FM
I 702
00. S
ee N
ote
(3);
R3.
1.1
Opt
iona
l FM
I 702
00.
(4) C
urre
nt R
4.X
App
licat
ion
Sof
twar
e =
R4.
1.3
(232
2686
-49)
.(5
) Cur
rent
R6.
X A
pplic
atio
n S
oftw
are
= R
6.0.
4 (2
3226
86-5
6), R
6.0.
5 (2
3226
86-5
7) R
6.0.
6 (2
3226
86-5
9) F
MI 7
0197
.(6
) Cur
rent
R7.
X A
pplic
atio
n S
oftw
are
= R
7.0.
2 (2
3226
86-6
2) ,
R7.
0.4
(232
2686
-66)
, an
d R
7.0.
5 (2
3226
86-6
7).
(7) C
urre
nt R
9.X
App
licat
ion
Sof
twar
e =
R9.
0.0
(232
2686
-70)
Not
e: S
ee F
MI C
losu
re S
ervi
ce N
ote
7044
3 fo
r inf
orm
atio
n on
late
requ
est p
lan.
To c
onfir
m y
ou h
ave
the
mos
t cur
rent
app
licat
ion
and
base
load
info
rmat
ion,
als
o se
e th
e la
test
revi
sion
of
SN
704
19 -
LOG
IQ 9
App
licat
ion/
Bas
eloa
d S
oftw
are
Mat
rix -
5245
411-
100.
Tabl
e 9-
24
BEP
Bas
e Im
age
Load
Mat
rix -
BEP
3.x
/4.x
App
licat
ion
Softw
are
L9
BEP
H
AR
DW
AR
E C
ON
FIG
UR
ATI
ON
BEP
324
0402
7-3
2404
027-
4
BEP
3.5
2404
027-
5324
0402
7-54
BEP
4.0
5162
777-
351
6277
7-4
BEP
4.1
5162
777-
751
6277
7-8
R2.
x.x(1
)N
AN
AN
AN
A
R3.
x.x(3
)N
AN
AN
AN
A
R4.
1.3(4
)24
0402
4-8
2404
024-
8N
AN
A
R6.
0.4(5
)N
A24
0402
4-50
NA
NA
R6.
0.5(5
)N
A24
0402
4-50
NA
NA
R6.
0.6(5
)N
A24
0402
4-50
NA
NA
R7.
0.2(6
)N
A51
3512
4-1
NA
NA
R7.
0.4(6
)N
A51
3512
4-1
NA
NA
R7.
0.5(6
)N
A51
3512
4-1
5135
124-
1051
3512
4-10
R9.
0.x(7
)N
A51
3512
4-3
5135
124-
1151
3512
4-11
Cur
rent
(2)
Bas
e Im
age
Load
R4.
1.3(4
)
R6.
0.6(5
)
R7.
0.5(6
)
R9.
x(7)
2404
024-
8N
AN
AN
A
NA
2404
024-
50 R
ev 7
5135
124-
151
3512
4-3
NA
NA
5135
124-
1051
3512
4-11
NA
NA
5135
124-
1051
3512
4-11
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-43
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-15 Software (cont’d)
Table 9-25 Software Tools
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
Database Defragmentation Toolkit
5184818 BT04 and later. Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use. 1 - 1
HDD Partition Wipe Tool Kit 5329420See SN 70447
Do not leave at customer site - Multi-site use..
1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-44 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-16Interconnect Cables
9-16-1 Peripheral Cables
Figure 9-20 Peripheral Cable Diagram
LeftRight
RightLeft
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
RS-232C
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD
A8A9
A6A7
A2
A11
A10
USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT
Remote
Video Rcvr
Op Control
Audio AmpMic Pre Amp
Video / Mic
AC Power
Speaker
MONITOR
OP PANELA1
A3
A4
A5
B5
B6
B7
B9
B8
B2
B1
B3
B4
A15
A14
TO CARD RACK
TOINTERNAL I/O
BOARD
USER INTERFACE
RS-232C
Video Output
B/W Video In
SONY ANALOGB/W PRINTER
UP890MD
SONY ANALOGCOLOR PRINTER
UP-2900MD
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
RGB & Sync
COLOR PRNTVIDEO
TOUCH PANELVIDEO
MONITORVIDEO
Video Rcvr
Op Control
Audio AmpMic Pre Amp
Video / Mic
AC Power
C13 or D4
D5
C22
Speaker
MONITOR
BEP
BT04 SYSTEMS
OP PANEL
USER INTERFACE
TOUCH PANELVIDEO
MONITORVIDEO
C13 or D4
C22BEP
530
545
500
500A
501
502
503
504
505
516A
516B
517A
517B
530545
546547
548
BT06 and later onlySpeaker and AC Power interrupted by Subwoofer electronics
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-45
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-1 Peripheral Cables (cont’d)
Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
500 Console Flex Cable Assembly (complete)
FB200320*
Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC Ctrl, BEP and Gas spring
*When replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems, also order 064G1768. Over-molded SVGA connector requires longer screws (064G1768) to attach to bulkhead.
1 - 1
Extended-length Jack/Lock Screws
064G1768 Longer screws required for modified connector (when replacing FB200320 in BT03 or earlier systems). 1 - 1
500A Cable, Main harness w/ DVI 5119218
BT04 or later
1 - 1
501 Color Printer Video Cable FB200789
RGB & Sync From PCVIC to Color Printer - #1 -BEP-D5 to RGB Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
502 Color Printer Control Cable FB200790
#2 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-46 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
503 BW/CP Printer Cable FB200791
#3 - IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
504 VCR Cable Harness 2371911
Combines FB200792 & FC200041 & FC200042 & FC200043 & FC200044
Same as Vivid 7
1 - 1
505 VCR Remote Control Cable FB200792
#4 - IIO-A2 to VCR - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
516A SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200041
#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR IN - Same as Vivid 7 -
2 - 1
516B SVHS Cable, Shielded FC200042
#16 - IIO-A10 to VCR Out- Same as Vivid 7 -
2 - 1
517A Audio Cable, Shielded FC200043
#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R)- Same as Vivid 7 -
2 - 1
Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-47
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
517B Audio Cable, Shielded FC200044
#17 - IIO-A6/A7 to VCR OutCH1(L)/CH2(R)- Same as Vivid 7 -
2 - 1
530 Speaker Cable - Bulkhead 2319024 1 - 1
545 Monitor Cable Assembly 2304171
- Same as Vivid 7 & LOGIQ 7-
1 - 2
546 cable, internal microphone 5119245 1 - 1
547 adapter, DVI to SVGA w mic(CRT only)
5118498
Found Behind OPIO
1 - 1
548 adapter, SVGA to DVI (CRT only)
5119495
Found on Back of BEP
1 - 1
Table 9-26 Peripheral Cables (Continued)
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-48 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-2 Peripheral Cable - Analog Color Printer with BEP3
Figure 9-21 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3
Table 9-27 Analog Color Printer W/BEP3
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
549 Cable, S-Video 5113288 1 - 1
LeftRight
Right
75 ohm Off
Left
AUDIO OUT
AUDIO IN
RS-232C
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO IN
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD
A8A9
A6A7
A2
A11
A10
Remote
If No VCRuse A10
A1
A3
A4
A5
A15
A14
TO CARD RACK
RS-232C
Video Output
B/W Video In
SONY ANALOGB/W PRINTER
UP890MD
SONY ANALOGCOLOR PRINTER
UP-2900MDUP-51MD
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
S-Video In
549549
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-49
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-3 Peripheral Cable - USB Printer Cables
Figure 9-22 USB Printer Cables
Table 9-28 USB Printer Cables
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
560 CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M 2353228 BEP C21 to BW Printer Sony UP-D895 1 - 1
561 USB TO SCSI ADAPTER 2354406 From C20 to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 - 1
562 CABLE, USB 2.0 COMPLIANT 1.0M 2353228 BEP C20 to Color Printer Sony UP-D21, UP-D23, UP-D55 1 - 1
COLOR PRINTER UP-D50
BW PRINTER UP-D895
BW
PRINTER
SONY
UP-D895C21
BEP
A5 COLOR
PRINTER
SONY
UP-D50C20
BEP
COLOR PRINTER UP-D21, 23, 55
COLOR
PRINTER
SONY
UP-D21, 23, 55C20
BEP
2353228
2353228
2354406
560
561
562
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-50 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables
Figure 9-23 AC Distribution Cable Diagram
P5XFMR BOX
P6
P100P101
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
Part of Main Cable
To Op Panel
To Color Printer
To VCR
To BW Printer
To Card Rack
To BEP
INTERNAL I/O
Fan
A13 A16 A15 A12
A14
AC CONTROL
BOX
AC
AdapterSerial
Modem
Reserved for Wireless Mic
To Color Printer
To VCR
To BW Printer
To Color Printer
To Wireless Mic
BT04 or Systems with 4D
Thru BT03
AC
DISTRIBUTION
BOX
507507A
514
515
540
513
#500
541A
550
551
541 542M542Ato
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-51
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables
Item Part NamePart
Number Description Qty CRU FRU
507 Fan Speed Control Cable FB200795
#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8
1 - 1
507AFan Speed Control Cable if EQ4 PWA (2260210) is Rev K or earlier
2333827
#7 - IIO-A15 to ACP-F8
1 - 1
513 AC-Distribution Cable Kit FB200802Includes FB200802-1, FB200802-2, FB200802-3 &
FB200802-4 1 - 1
514 AC Mains 1 Cable FB200803
#14 - ACT-M1 to ACP-F6 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
515 AC Mains 2 Cable FB200804
#15 - ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
540 AC Peripheral Cable 070C5080 AC to Color & B/W Printers and VCR 3 - 1
541 AC Power Cord - USA 2162856 Obsolete - replaced by 2286301 1 Y N
541A AC Power Cord - USA 2286301
If unavailable, order 5148381
1 Y 1
542 AC Power Cord - Outside USA 2118615Obsolete
1 Y N
542A AC Power Cord - Outside USA 070C3194Order only if a dedicated cord (5148381-x) for the
specific country is unavailable.
1 Y 1
542B AC Power Cord - North America 5148381
H4000ZA
1 Y 1
542C AC Power Cord - Japan 5148381-2
H4000ZK
1 Y 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-52 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
542D AC Power Cord - Europe 5148381-3
H4000ZB
1 Y 1
542E AC Power Cord - UK/Ireland 5148381-4
H4000ZD
1 Y 1
542F AC Power Cord - China 5148381-5
H4000ZC
1 Y 1
542G AC Power Cord - Switzerland 5148381-7
H4000ZL
1 Y 1
542H AC Power Cord - Denmark 5148381-8
H4000ZE
1 Y 1
542J AC Power Cord - Israel 5322309 1 Y 1
542K AC Power Cord - India 5323270 1 Y 1
542L AC Power Cord - Argentina 5323275 1 Y 1
542M AC Power Cord - Australia (Orange)
5323129 1 Y 1
Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables (Continued)
Item Part NamePart
Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-53
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
550 Cable, 3 Head AC Power FC200571 1 - 1
551 Cable, AC Power Split Y 5112631
Required If Using 3 Head AC Power Cable and Voice Command
1 - 1
Table 9-29 AC Distribution Cables (Continued)
Item Part NamePart
Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-54 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Figure 9-24 BEP 1.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram
RE
MO
TE
EX
P 1
SO
UN
D C
AR
D
PC
I D
IGIT
AL
VID
EO
(L
VD
S)
AD
VA
NC
ED
IN
PU
T D
EV
ICE
S
PC
I S
LO
T 1
AG
P V
IDE
O
AG
P S
LO
T
10
/10
0b
T
PA
RA
LL
EL
CO
M1
US
B1
US
B2
PC
I S
LO
T 2
PC
2IP
RS
23
2 (
X4
)
I2C
PC
2IP
PC
I S
LO
T 4
RS
42
2
PS
ON
PO
K
68M
TO
PO
WE
R
SU
PP
LY
NO
N-P
CI
SL
OT
PC
-VIC
& P
C2IO R
GB
OU
T
SV
GA
OU
T 1
SV
GA
OU
T 2
S/C
VID
EO
OU
T
SV
GA
IN
PC
PO
WE
R
PC
ON
/OF
F
50F
12
C
RS
23
2(X
3)
TO
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
SC
B
TO
CO
LO
R
PR
INT
ER
TO
IM
AG
E
MO
NIT
OR
TO
LC
D
FL
AT
PA
NE
L
INT
ER
NA
L I
/O
BW
VID
EO
OU
T
US
B
SV
GA
VID
EO
OU
T
SE
RIA
L
10
/10
0b
T
SV
IDE
O O
UT
VID
EO
OU
T
EX
TE
RN
AL
I/O
TO
OP
PA
NE
L
50F
RS
23
2 #
1
RS
23
2 #
2
SV
IDE
O L
SV
IDE
O C
TO
PR
INT
ER
S
PC
PO
WE
R
SV
IDE
O L
F
RO
M C
OL
OR
PR
T
SV
IDE
O L
TO
BW
PR
T
CO
MP
VID
EO
FR
OM
CO
LO
RP
RT
SV
IDE
O C
FR
OM
CO
LO
RP
RT
SV
IDE
O F
RO
M V
CR
SV
IDE
O T
O V
CR
SV
IDE
O L
F
RO
M V
CR
SV
IDE
O C
FR
OM
VC
R
SV
IDE
O L
T
O V
CR
SV
IDE
O C
TO
VC
R
PC
ON
/OF
F
PA
TIE
NT
I/O
CO
MP
VID
EO
PS
_O
N
TO
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
VIA
BA
CK
PL
AN
E
SV
GA
VID
EO
B7
B2
B1
B3
B8
B9
B4B5
B6
A11
A10
A1
A5
A4
PC
PO
WE
R F
OR
IN
TE
RN
AL
I/O
CIR
CU
ITS
BW
RE
MO
TE
; C
OL
OR
RE
MO
TE
1,2
VID
EO
SW
ITC
H
12C
RE
MO
TE
EX
P 2
FO
OT
SW
ITC
H
12C
12C
PO
RT
TR
IGG
ER
PH
ON
E
AU
DIO
R
AU
DIO
LT
RIG
GE
R
12C
12C
PO
RT
SC
AN
CO
NV
ER
T
PS
_O
N
12C
to
RS
23
2
US
B; A
UD
IO T
O O
P P
AN
EL; M
IC F
RO
M O
P P
AN
EL
MIC
FR
OM
OP
PA
NE
L
AU
DIO
TO
OP
PA
NE
L
MIC
EN
VC
R A
UD
IO E
N
OP
TIO
N
KE
YB
EP
1.0
VC
R A
UD
IO E
N
MIC
EN
MIC
IN
(P
INK
)
AU
DIO
LIN
E O
UT
(G
RN
)
AU
DIO
LIN
E I
N
(BL
U)
TO
VC
R
A2
SP
AR
EA
3
TC
ON
SW
1
AU
DIO
FR
OM
VC
R
AU
DIO
TO
VC
R
A6
A7
A8
A9
Ra
ck P
ow
er
"Off
Pa
th"
"On
Pa
th"
TC
ON
SW
1
C5
C6
C3
C4
C17
C13
C18
C1
0
C9
C1
1
C16
C7
C1
2
D3
D5
D4
D1
D2
CO
M2
PC
I S
LO
T 5
Cable
# 5
00
Cable
# 5
10
Cable
# 5
11
Cable
# 5
00
Cable
# 5
01
Cable
# 5
08
Cable
# 5
31
Cable
# 5
20
Cable
# 5
29
Cable
# 5
00
Cable
# 5
08
Cable
# 5
19
Cable
# 5
18
Cable
# 5
09
Cable
# 5
17B
Cable
# 5
03
Cable
# 5
17A
Cable
# 5
16A
Cable
# 5
16B
Cable
# 5
02
Cable
# 5
04
2266548-3
BE
P 1
.0 w
ith
ou
t 3D
op
tio
n
2266548-4
BE
P 1
.0 w
ith
3D
op
tio
n
OP
TIO
NA
L 3
D C
AR
D
PC
I B
IRD
PC
I S
LO
T 3
TO
MO
DE
M
Cable
# 5
06
FR
OM
MO
DE
M
See
# 53
6
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-55
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Figure 9-25 BEP 2.0 and II/O Cabling Diagram
RE
MO
TE
EX
P 1
AG
P V
IDE
O
AG
P S
LO
T
10
/10
0b
T
PA
RA
LL
EL
PO
RT
CO
M1
US
B1
US
B2
PC
2IP
RS
23
2 (
X4
)
I2C
PC
2IP
RS
42
2
PS
ON
PO
K
68M
US
B3
US
B4
PC
-VIC
& P
C2
IO RG
B
OU
T
SV
GA
OU
T 1
SV
GA
OU
T 2
S/C
VID
EO
OU
T
SV
GA
IN
PC
PO
WE
R
PC
ON
/OF
F
50F
12
C
RS
23
2(X
3)
TO
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
SC
B
TO
AN
AL
OG
CO
LO
R P
RIN
TE
R
TO
IM
AG
E
MO
NIT
OR
TO
LC
D
FL
AT
PA
NE
L
INT
ER
NA
L I/O
BW
VID
EO
OU
T
US
B
SV
GA
VID
EO
OU
T
SE
RIA
L
10
/10
0b
T
SV
IDE
O O
UT
VID
EO
OU
T
EX
TE
RN
AL
I/O
TO
OP
PA
NE
L
50F
RS
23
2 #
1
RS
23
2 #
2
SV
IDE
O L
SV
IDE
O C
TO
PR
INT
ER
S
PC
PO
WE
R
SV
IDE
O L
F
RO
M C
OL
OR
PR
T
SV
IDE
O L
TO
BW
PR
T
CO
MP
VID
EO
FR
OM
CO
LO
RP
RT
SV
IDE
O C
FR
OM
CO
LO
RP
RT
SV
IDE
O F
RO
M V
CR
SV
IDE
O T
O V
CR
SV
IDE
O L
F
RO
M V
CR
SV
IDE
O C
FR
OM
VC
R
SV
IDE
O L
T
O V
CR
SV
IDE
O C
TO
VC
R
PC
ON
/OF
F
PA
TIE
NT
I/O
CO
MP
VID
EO
PS
_O
N
TO
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
VIA
BA
CK
PL
AN
E
SV
GA
VID
EO
B7
B2
B1
B3
B8B9
B4B5
B6
A1
1
A1
0
A1
A5
A4
PC
PO
WE
R F
OR
IN
TE
RN
AL
I/O
CIR
CU
ITS
BW
RE
MO
TE
; C
OL
OR
RE
MO
TE
1,2
VID
EO
SW
ITC
H
12C
RE
MO
TE
EX
P 2
FO
OT
SW
ITC
H
12C
12C
PO
RT
TR
IGG
ER
PH
ON
E
AU
DIO
R
AU
DIO
LT
RIG
GE
R
12C
12C
PO
RT
SC
AN
CO
NV
ER
T
PS
_O
N
12C
to
RS
23
2
US
B;
AU
DIO
TO
OP
PA
NE
L;
MIC
FR
OM
OP
PA
NE
L
MIC
FR
OM
OP
PA
NE
L
AU
DIO
TO
OP
PA
NE
L
MIC
EN
VC
R A
UD
IO E
N
OP
TIO
N K
EY
BE
P2.0
VC
R A
UD
IO E
N
MIC
EN
TO
VC
R
A2
SP
AR
EA
3
TC
ON
SW
1
AU
DIO
FR
OM
VC
R
AU
DIO
TO
VC
R
A6
A7
A8
A9
Ra
ck P
ow
er
"Off
Pa
th"
"On
Pa
th"
TC
ON
SW
1
C5
C6
C3
C4
C1
7
C1
3
C1
6
C1
2
D3
D5
D4
D1
D2
US
B5
US
B6
C1
9
C1
8
C2
1
C2
0
PC
I D
IGIT
AL
VID
EO
(L
VD
S)
AD
VA
NC
ED
IN
PU
T D
EV
ICE
S
PC
I S
LO
T 3
C1
8
SO
UN
D C
AR
D
PC
I S
LO
T 1
MIC
IN
(P
INK
)
AU
DIO
LIN
E O
UT
(G
RN
)
AU
DIO
LIN
E I
N (
BL
U)
C1
0
C9
C1
1
PC
I S
LO
T 5
NO
T U
SE
D
PC
I S
LO
T 2
PC
I S
LO
T 6
UP
S C
on
tro
l to
th
e
BE
P P
ow
er
Su
pp
ly
PC
I S
LO
T 4
Op
tio
na
l 3
D I
nte
rfa
ce
Ca
rd
NO
T U
SE
D
NO
T U
SE
D
Ca
ble
# 5
29
Ca
ble
# 5
00
Ca
ble
# 5
20
Ca
ble
# 5
31
Ca
ble
# 5
08
Ca
ble
# 5
11
Ca
ble
# 5
00
Ca
ble
# 5
01
Ca
ble
# 5
10
Ca
ble
# 5
09
Ca
ble
# 5
19
Ca
ble
# 5
18
Ca
ble
# 5
17
B
Ca
ble
# 5
17
A
Ca
ble
# 5
00
Ca
ble
# 5
02
Ca
ble
# 5
04
Ca
ble
# 5
03
Ca
ble
# 5
16
A
Ca
ble
# 5
16
B
Ca
ble
# 5
34
23
48
18
6-3
BE
P 2
.0 w
ith
ou
t 3
D o
pti
on
23
48
18
6-4
BE
P 2
.0 w
ith
3D
op
tio
n
NO
T U
SE
D
NO
T U
SE
D
TO
MO
DE
M
Ca
ble
# 5
06
FR
OM
MO
DE
M
See
# 53
6
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-56 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Figure 9-26 BEP 2.1/2.2 and II/O Cabling Diagram
RE
MO
TE
EX
P 1
MO
TH
ER
BO
AR
D A
GP
VID
EO
-
AG
P S
LO
T
10
/10
0b
T
PA
RA
LLE
L
PO
RT
CO
M1
US
B1
US
B2
PC
2IP
RS
23
2 (
X4
)
I2C
PC
2IP
RS
422
PS
ON
PO
K
68M
US
B3
US
B4
DG
-VIC
& D
G2
IO RG
B
OU
T
SV
GA
OU
T 1
SV
GA
OU
T 2
S/C
VID
EO
OU
T
DV
I IN
PC
PO
WE
R
PC
ON
/OF
F
50M
12
C
RS
23
2(X
3)
TO
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
SC
B
TO
AN
AL
OG
CO
LO
R P
RIN
TE
R
TO
IM
AG
E
MO
NIT
OR
TO
LC
D
FL
AT
PA
NE
L
INT
ER
NA
L I/O
BW
VID
EO
OU
T
US
B
SV
GA
VID
EO
OU
T
SE
RIA
L
10
/10
0b
T
SV
IDE
O O
UT
VID
EO
OU
T
EX
TE
RN
AL
I/O
TO
OP
PA
NE
L
50M
RS
23
2 #
1
RS
23
2 #
2
SV
IDE
O L
SV
IDE
O C
TO
AN
AL
OG
PR
INT
ER
SN
ot
us
ed
wit
h
Dig
ita
l P
eri
ph
era
ls
PC
PO
WE
R
SV
IDE
O L
F
RO
M C
OL
OR
PR
T
SV
IDE
O L
TO
BW
PR
T
CO
MP
VID
EO
FR
OM
CO
LO
RP
RT
SV
IDE
O C
FR
OM
CO
LO
RP
RT
SV
IDE
O F
RO
M V
CR
SV
IDE
O T
O V
CR
SV
IDE
O L
F
RO
M V
CR
SV
IDE
O C
FR
OM
VC
R
SV
IDE
O L
T
O V
CR
SV
IDE
O C
TO
VC
R
PC
ON
/OF
F
PA
TIE
NT
I/O
CO
MP
VID
EO
PS
_O
N
TO
FR
ON
T E
ND
CA
RD
RA
CK
VIA
BA
CK
PL
AN
E
SV
GA
VID
EO
B7
B2
B1
B3
B8B9
B4B
5
B6
A11
A10
A1
A5
A4
PC
PO
WE
R F
OR
IN
TE
RN
AL
I/O
CIR
CU
ITS
BW
RE
MO
TE
; C
OL
OR
RE
MO
TE
1,2
VID
EO
SW
ITC
H
12C
RE
MO
TE
EX
P 2
FO
OT
SW
ITC
H
12C
12C
PO
RT
TR
IGG
ER
PH
ON
E
AU
DIO
R
AU
DIO
LT
RIG
GE
R
12C
12C
PO
RT
DV
I to
An
alo
g
PS
_O
N
12C
to
RS
232
US
B;
AU
DIO
TO
OP
PA
NE
L;
MIC
FR
OM
OP
PA
NE
L
MIC
FR
OM
OP
PA
NE
L
AU
DIO
TO
OP
PA
NE
L
MIC
EN
VC
R A
UD
IO E
N
OP
TIO
N K
EY
BE
P2.1
VC
R A
UD
IO E
N
MIC
EN
TO
VC
R
A2
SP
AR
EA
3
TC
ON
SW
1
AU
DIO
FR
OM
VC
R
AU
DIO
TO
VC
R
A6
A7
A8
A9
Rack P
ow
er
"Off
Path
"
"On
Pa
th"
TC
ON
SW
1
C5
C6
C3
C4
C1
7
C3
0
C1
6
C1
2
D3
D5
C1
3
D1
D2
US
B5
US
B6
C1
9
C1
8
C2
1
C2
0
PC
I D
IGIT
AL
VID
EO
(L
VD
S)
AD
VA
NC
ED
IN
PU
T D
EV
ICE
S
PC
I S
LO
T 3
C1
8
SO
UN
D C
AR
D
PC
I S
LO
T 1
MIC
IN
(P
INK
)
AU
DIO
LIN
E O
UT
(G
RN
)
AU
DIO
LIN
E I
N (
BLU
)C
10
C9
C1
1
PC
I S
LO
T 5
TO
DIG
ITA
L
B/W
PR
INT
ER
TO
DIG
ITA
L
CO
LO
R P
RIN
TE
R
NO
T U
SE
D
PC
I S
LO
T 2
PC
I S
LO
T 6
UP
S C
on
tro
l to
th
e
BE
P P
ow
er
Su
pp
ly
PC
I S
LO
T 4
Op
tio
na
l 3
D I
nte
rfa
ce
Ca
rd
AD
D C
AR
D -
DIG
ITA
L
VID
EO
OU
T
NO
T U
SE
D
Cable
# 5
29
Cable
# 5
00
Cable
# 5
20
Cable
# 5
31
Cable
# 5
08
A
Cable
# 5
11
Cable
# 5
00
Cable
# 5
01
Cable
# 5
10
Cable
# 5
09
Cable
# 5
19
Cable
# 5
18
Cable
# 5
17
B
Cable
# 5
17
A
Cable
# 5
00
Cable
# 5
02
Cable
# 5
04
Cable
# 5
03
Cable
# 5
16
A
Cable
# 5
16
B
Cable
# 5
34
Cable
# 5
33
Cable
# 5
32
2348186-1
3
BE
P 2
.1 w
ith
ou
t 3
D o
pti
on
2348186-1
4
BE
P 2
.1 w
ith
3D
op
tio
n
D4 N
ot
Use
d
MIC
TO
BE
PLINE IN TO BEP
LINE OUT FROM BEP
Cable
# 5
09
Cable
# 5
06w/ M
od
em
MO
DE
M
(op
tio
n)
See
# 53
6
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-57
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d)
Figure 9-27 BEP 3.x/BEP 4.x and II/O Cabling Diagram
See
# 53
6
PCI D
IGIT
AL
VID
EO
(LVD
S B
EP 4
.1) o
r (D
VI B
EP 4
.0)
AD
VAN
CED
(IN
PUT
DEV
ICES
)
BEP
3.x
and
BEP
4.x
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-58 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-16-4 AC Distribution Cables (cont’d) Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables
Item Part NamePart
Number Description Qty CRU FRU
505 Doppler Cable FB200793
From Front Panel to Front End Processor - #5Not used on BT04
1 - 1
506 Standard Modem Cable FB200794
From Modem to External I/O - #6Packaged with FB200802-1 (modem power cable)
and used with Serial Modem Option kit
1 - 1
508 Monitor Cable Standard FB200796
BEP AGP Video to PCVIC Card SVGA - #8 - BEP-C13 to BEP-D3 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
508A Digital Video Interface Cable 2354056Interface from AGP Slot ADD card to DGVIC
BEP 2.1 & BEP31 - 1
509 RS232 Com 1/2 Cable FB200797
#9 - IIO-B7 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7 Used with 2364642 in BEP 2.x Systems
- Same as Vivid 7 -2 - 1
510 Internal I/O-PC2IO Power/Control Cable
FB200798
#10 - IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
511 Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable
FB200799 #11 - Obsolete Use FC200286- 1 - N
511A Internal I/O-PC2IO Signals Cable
FC200286
#11A BEP D1 to IIO B5 Same as Vivid 7 - Improved flex and length
1 - 1
511B Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to Male FC200495
BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/ Internal I/O FC200503
1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-59
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
511C Cable, Signals, IIO-BEP Male to Female
2404419
BEP D1 to IIO B5 Needed if using BEP3 w/internalI/O FC200423 or FC200446
1 - 1
518 USB A-B Cable 070D2802
#18 - Same as Vivid 7 -
2 - 1
519 Ethernet Cat-5 Cable 070D2902
#19 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
520 PCI Cable, AMP 974298 070M0016
PCI Bus Extension Cable BEP to FEP - #20 - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
529 Internal I/O-PC Audio Cable FB200748
#29 - IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD - Same as Vivid 7 -
1 - 1
531 UPS Control Cable FC200016 1 - 1
532 Digital B/W Printer Cable
2363062
From USB #6 to Digital B/W Printer - BEP 2.1Straight USB, gray in color
1 - 1
533 Digital Color Printer CableFrom USB #5 to Digital Color Printer (USB to SCSI)
BEP 2.1, Right angle USB, black in color1 - 1
Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables (Continued)
Item Part NamePart
Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-60 Section 9-16 - Interconnect Cables
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
534 USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2348186-26
From USB #3 To Serial Cable To Internal I/O B7 - Obsolete
Use 2364642 and FB2007971 - N
534A USB to Serial Adapter Cable 2364642
From USB #3 To Serial Cable FB200797 To Internal I/O B7 (Ext I/O Com Port)BEP 2.0 & 2.1 & BEP3
1 - 1
535 USB to SCSI Adapter 2354406 From USB to SCSI for Sony UP-D50 input 1 - 1
536 Option Key 2320432
Parallel port hasp to BEP for Options
1 - 1
Table 9-30 Internal I/O Cables (Continued)
Item Part NamePart
Number Description Qty CRU FRU
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-61
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-17Power Distribution Modules
Figure 9-28 Power Distribution
Table 9-31 Power Distribution
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty FRU
601 Card Rack Power Supply PWA Assembly (FEPS)
See Item 409 Power Supplies are mounted on the circuit board 1 1
602 AC Transformer Assembly FB200581 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 2
603 AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V FC200079 - Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515 1 N
603A AC CTRL ASSY, 100-120 V 2399515 100-120 VAC Systems 1 1
604 AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V FC200081 - Same as Vivid 7 - Obsolete Use 2399515-2 1 N
604A AC CTRL ASSY, 220-240 V 2399515-2 220-240 VAC Systems 1 1
608 FEP AC Line Filter & Cable 2315960Attached to side of FEP Card Rack, Includes Line Filter
and Power HarnessObsolete, use 2375555
1 N
608A FEP AC Line Filter 2375555 1 1
609 ACC CLAMP 068E4000AC Controller Clamp - Same As Vivid 7-
1 1
601
602
603
604
608
603A
604A
609608A
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-62 Section 9-18 - Air Distribution
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-18Air Distribution
Figure 9-29 Air Distribution Parts
Table 9-32 Air Distribution Parts
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
651 Fan Assembly FB200580 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 - 1
652 Air Intake Cover FB307379 Replaced by FC307778 1 - 1
652 Air Intake Cover FC307778 Replaces FB307379 1 - 1
653 Filter FB307903 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 1
653
651
652652
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-63
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-19Voice Scan
Figure 9-30 Voice Scan Replacement Parts
760
761
765
766
767 767A
768
769
761A
763
770
772
755
762
750A
765A
773
750 756 757 764
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-64 Section 9-19 - Voice Scan
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-19 Voice Scan (cont’d)
Table 9-33 Voice Scan
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
750 Wireless Receiver 2383770 Obsolete - use 5115162 Must also order 5115164 1 Y N
750A Wireless Receiver 5115162 wireless receiver generation 2 1 - 1
755 Tray for Wireless Receiver 2377599 1 - 2
756 Foam - Wireless Receiver Bottom 2377600 1 - 2
757 Foam - Wireless Receiver Top 2377601 1 - 2
760 Battery Charger 2383775 1 Y 1
761 Battery - 9V NiMH 2383776Yellow 9V Rechargeable Battery
Obsolete - use 51212911 - N
761A Battery - 9V NiMH 5121291 Green 9V Rechargeable Battery 1 Y 1
762 Wireless Microphone 2383779 Over the ear style. 1 Y 1
763 Wired USB Headset 2386172 Obsolete - use 5159489 1 - N
764 Wireless Microphone Care Kit 2386142 wind screens, clip, and cable only 1 - 1
765 Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 2383773 Obsolete - use 5116453 Must also order 5115236 1 - N
765A Beltpack Transmitter - Wireless 5116453 wireless transmitter generation 2(with charging contacts) 1 Y 1
766 Adapter Kit - 240Vac 2390117For 2383775 only
For 120V order 23837751 - 1
767 AC power adapter, US 5116448 For 5116446 only 1 - 1
767A AC power adapter, foreign 5116450 For 5116446 only 1 - 1
768 Rechargeable Battery Pack for Transmitter 5116454 1 Y 1
769 Battery recharger station 5116446 1 - 1
770 Antenna 5115891 For 2383770 and 2383773 only 1 - N
772 Rechargeable AA Batteries 5115236 rechargeable AA batteries (pack of 4) for generation 2 transmitter 1 Y 1
773 Wired Headset 5159489 Andrea VS Headset 1 Y 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-65
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
9-19-1 Voice Scan Cabling
Figure 9-31 Wireless Interconnect
Table 9-34 Wireless Interconnect
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
751 Battery Eliminator Cable 2383769 For use with 2383770 1 - 1
751B Dummy AA Battery Power Supply 5115164 dummy AA battery power supply for wireless
receiver generation 2 1 - 1
752 Audio to USB Adapter 2383765 1 - 1
753 Audio Cable from Receiver 2383768 1 - 1
754 Power Cable for Receiver 2383767 1 - 1
758 AC Adapter - 9V, 1.1A 2384314 1 - 1
759 USB Extension Cable 2384449 1 - 1
WIRELESS MIC OPTION
2383767AC
Adapter
Wireless Mic
Receiver
2XXXXX
2384314
MIC IN
NOT USEDAUDIO OUT
AF OUT
2383765
2383768USB Audio
Adapter
C19
BEP2384449
AC
Distribution
Box
NOTE:
BT04 has AC
Distribution
Cable
2383769
or
5115164
751 751B
752
753
754 758
759
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-66 Section 9-20 - 4D Components
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-204D Components
Figure 9-32 4D Components
Table 9-35 4 D Parts
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
800 4D Motor Controller 2372904 BT06 systems and prior 1 - 1
800A 4D Motor Controller 5180588 BT07 and later systems, or systems upgraded to BT07 or BT09, only 1 - 1
801 Cable, Bracket to Probe 2384183 1 Y 1
802 Cable, Motor Controller/Bracket assembly 2375551 1 - 1
803 Cable, Motor Controller to IIO 2375552 1 - 1
804 Cable, USB to Motor Controller 2353228 1 - 1
805 Cable, Motor Controller Power 2375553 1 - 1
800
801802
803 804805
800A
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-67
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-21Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
Figure 9-33 Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler Components
Table 9-36 Continuous Wave Doppler Components
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
820 CW Card 2380188 1 - 1
CW Cable 2380188-13 1 - 1
Mu Metal Shield 2380188-11 inserts under BEP for noise reduction 1 - 1
820
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-68 Section 9-22 - Peripherals
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-22Peripherals
Table 9-37 Approved Peripherals
Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
Sony VCR 9500 M2D 2117635 (T3306ER)
H4700TC - NTSCObsolete - order 5122171 1 - N
Sony VCR 9500 MDP2 H45001PA - PAL Version (Europe) Obsolete - order 5122172 1 - N
Sony 2900 Color Video Printer 2207254 (T3306PT) H4700TD 1 - 2
Sony Color Printer UP51MDU 2281966 Analog (large footprint) H4700TH 1 - 2
Sony B/W Video Printer UP895MD 2288502 Analog E8210B 1 - 2
3 Position Footswitch FB200723 - Same as Vivid 7 - 1 Y 2
Sony UP-D895MD 2358588 Digital B/W Printer Obsolete - order 5171608 1 - 2
Sony UP-D897MD 5171608Replaces Sony UP-D895MD (2358588)
Part includes drivers for earlier BTs1 - 1
Sony UP-D50MD 2358596 Digital Color Printer Obsolete - crosses up to 5116559 1 - 1
Sony UP-D21MD 2358449 Digital Color Printer (small footprint)Obsolete - crosses up to 2401985 1 - -
Sony UP-21MD 2351318 Analog Color Printer (small footprint) 1 - -
Sony UP-D23MD 2401985 Digital, A6 (small footprint) - -
Sony UP-21 & D21 & UP-D23MD Adapter kit 2351082 Mounting plate, cover tray and screws 1 - -
HP6122 2378741 Deskjet Printer Y -
Sony UP-D55MD 5116559 Digital, Replaces 2358596. If replacing 2358596, also order 5123707 Adapter Kit - -
HP-6540 5121837 1 - -
HP-5650 5121839 1 - -
UP-D55 Adapter Kit 5123707 Includes: FC307635 plastic cover/tray,
46-312358P36 M4 screws and 068X0200 long strap- -
Mitsubushi NTSC VCR 5122171 for USA NTSC with RS232C-USB - -
Mitsubushi PAL VCR 5122172 for Europe PAL with RS232C-USB - -
DVR Video Recorder 5120592 Panasonic LQ-MD800P DVR Video Recorder BT07 and later only 1 - 1
Cable, USB Right-Angle 5181607 USB A to B for DVR 1 - 1
Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer
KTZ2300182 Offline Report/Image Color Printer 1 - 1
Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer Cable
5315370 Cable for Canon Pixma MP610 External Printer 1 - 1
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-69
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-23Customer Documentation
Table 9-38 User Documentation
DescriptionBT02
Part NumberBT03
Part NumberBT04
Part NumberBT06
Part NumberBT07
Part NumberBT09
Part Number FRU
Basic User Manual (BUM) 2309819-100 2384455-100 5113776-100 5140804-100 5174158-100 5338262-100 N
ARM 2309835-100 2384454-100 5113777-100 5140805-100 5173359-100 5338271-100 N
QG 2309820-100 2384458-100 5113779-100 5140807-100 5173872-100 N/A N
RN 2320595-100 2384452-100 5113780-100 5140811-100 5174065-100 5338272-100 N
eDocs 2384456-200 5113783-200 5140813-200 5173842-200 5338273-100 N
Kit 2392066 5113787-1 5140830-1 5173499-1 5338275-1 N
QC1 2309821-100 2384457-100 5113784-100 5140808-100 5173599-100 5173599-100 N
QC2 5113785-100 5140809-100 5173473-100 5173473-100 N
QC3 5113786-100 5140810-100 5174064-100 5174064-100 N
AIUM 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 2163920-100 N
Install 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 22361715-100 N
UG 2388578-100 5113778-100 5140812-100 5174247-100 5338270-100 N
Add 2389047-100 5113781-100 N/A N/A N/A N
OLH 2384453-100 5113782-300 5140806-100 5174102-100 5338264-100 N
Service 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 2294853-100 N
Install Cklist 2399069-100 2399069-100 2399069-100 N
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-70 Section 9-24 - Probes
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-24Probes
Figure 9-34 LOGIQ™ 9 Probes
901 902 903 904 905 906
908 909907 910 911 912
915
916
917
914
918
919
913
920
921
924
923
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 9 9-71
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-24 Probes (cont’d)
Table 9-39 Available Probes
Item Part Name Part Number Description Qty CRU FRU
901 3.5C 2050357 H4901PE - PDI Y 1
902 M7C 2294514 H40412LC Y 1
903 E8C 2294641 H40412LE Y 1
904 7L 2294521 H40412LF Y 1
905 10L 2294523 H40412LG Y 1
906 M12L 2294511 H40412LD Y 1
907 i12L 2264883 H4012L Y 1
908 4S 2295658 H4901PB - PDI Y 1
909 10S 2298589 H4901PC - PDI Y 1
910 8C 2348094 H40412LJ Y 1
911 TCD 3S 2323337 H4701SZ - PDI Y 1
912 3.5CS 2051858 H40412LK Y 1
913 Probe Latching Mechanism 2363861Large round blue locking knob used on some probes
L3, L5, L7, V3, V4, V7- 1
914 4C Probe 5123455H4904PC
Kit includes Probe 2401359, ICD card and shipping carton
Y 1
915 4D3C-L Probe KTZ195893 (KTI195894) H44801G Y 1
916 4D10L Probe KTZ156836 (KTI156837) H44801GB Y 1
917 4DE7C Probe KTZ195859 (KTI195860) H44801GA Y 1
918 CW 5 MHz Probe 2380188-5 Non-imaging Doppler Probe Y 1
919 CW 8 MHz Probe 2380188-8 Non-imaging Doppler Probe Y 1
4D8C KTZ156959 H44801GZ Y 1
920 t739L 2259246 H40212LM Y 1
921 i739L 2259206 H40212LF Y 1
923 4D16L KTZ156972 H44801GY Y 1
924 9L 5149427 H40412LT Y 1
M7C Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325300 - -
M12L Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325301 - -
4S Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325302 - -
E8C Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325303 - -
10L Tru3D Sensor Bracket 2325304 - -
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE PROPRIETARY TO GEDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
9-72 Section 9-24 - Probes
1/18/10CHAPTER9.FM
Section 9-24 Probes (cont’d)
Table 9-40 Software/Probe Compatibility Matrix
Item Part Name Part Number 2.x 3.x 4.x 6.x 7.x/9.x
901 3.5C 2050357 x x x x x
902 M7C 2294514 x x x x x
903 E8C 2294641 x x x x x
904 7L 2294521 x x x x x
905 10L 2294523 x x x x x
906 M12L 2294511 x x x x x
907 i12L 2264883 x x x x x
908 4S 2295658 x x x x x
909 10S 2298589 x x x x x
910 8C 2348094 NA x x x x
911 TCD 3S 2323337 NA x x x x
912 3.5CS 2051858 NA x x x x
914 4C Probe 5123455 NA NA x x x
915 4D3C-L Probe KTZ195893 (KTI195894) NA NA x x x
916 4D10L Probe KTZ156836 (KTI156837) NA NA x x x
917 4DE7C Probe KTZ195859 (KTI195860) NA NA x x x
918 CW 5 MHz Probe 2380188-5 NA NA x x x
919 CW 8 MHz Probe 2380188-8 NA NA x x x
4D8C KTZ156959 NA NA NA x x
920 t739L 2259246 NA NA NA x x
921 i739L 2259206 NA NA NA x x
923 4D16L KTZ156972 NA NA NA x x
924 9L 5149427 NA NA NA x x
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-1
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Chapter 10Care & Maintenance
Section 10-1Overview
10-1-1 Periodic Maintenance Inspections It has been determined by engineering that your LOGIQ™ 9 system does not have any high wear components that fail with use, therefore no Periodic Maintenance Inspections are mandatory. Some Customers Quality Assurance Programs may require additional tasks and or inspections at a different frequency than listed in this manual.
10-1-2 Purpose of Chapter 10This chapter describes Care & Maintenance on the scanner and peripherals. These procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before performing a task.
Table 10-1 Contents in Chapter 10
Section Description Page Number
10-1 Overview 10-1
10-2 Why do Maintenance 10-2
10-3 Maintenance Task Schedule 10-2
10-4 Tools Required 10-4
10-5 System Maintenance 10-5
10-6 Using a Phantom 10-10
10-7 Electrical Safety Tests 10-11
10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current... 10-27
ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE 10-28
10-9 Site Log 10-29
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an anti–static strap when handling electronic parts and even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-2 Section 10-2 - Why do Maintenance
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-2Why do Maintenance
10-2-1 Keeping RecordsIt is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of quality checks and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (provided on page 10-28) provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis.
A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.
10-2-2 Quality AssuranceIn order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customer’s responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee.
Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken.
Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site.
Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
Section 10-3Maintenance Task Schedule
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed?The Care & Maintenance Task Schedule (provided on page 10-3) specifies how often your LOGIQ™ 9 should be serviced and outlines items requiring special attention.
NOTE: It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure the LOGIQ™ 9 care & maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance.
Your GE Service Representative has an in-depth knowledge of your LOGIQ™ 9 ultrasound scanning system and can best provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for coverage information and/or price for service.
The service procedures and recommended intervals shown in the Care & Maintenance Task Schedule assumes that you use your LOGIQ™ 9 for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities.
NOTE: If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the maintenance frequencies.
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System performance and cooling require this.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-3
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-3-1 How often should care & maintenance tasks be performed? (cont’d)
Table 10-2 Customer Care Schedule
Service at Indicated Time Daily Weekly MonthlyPer Facilities QA Program Notes
Clean Probes •* * or before each use
Clean Probe Holders •Clean Air Filter • more frequently depending on
your environment
Inspect AC Mains Cable • Mobile Unit Check Weekly
Inspect Cables and Connectors •Clean Console •Clean Monitor and Touch Panel •Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and Swivel Locks • Mobile Unit Check Daily
Check Control Panel Movement • Mobile Unit Check Daily
Console Leakage Current Checks • also after corrective maintenance
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks • also after corrective maintenance
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks • also after corrective maintenance
Endocavity Probe Leakage Current Checks
• also after corrective maintenance
Transesphongeal Probe Leakage Current Checks
• also after corrective maintenance
Surgical Probe Leakage Current Checks
• also after corrective maintenance
Measurement Accuracy Checks • also after corrective maintenance
Probe/Phantom Checks • also after corrective maintenance
Functional Checks • also after corrective maintenance
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-4 Section 10-4 - Tools Required
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-4 Tools Required
10-4-1 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment
10-4-1-1 Specific Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Table 10-3 Overview of Requirements for Care & Maintenance
Tool Part Number Comments
Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
Anti Static Kit
46–194427P23146–194427P27946–194427P36946–194427P37346–194427P370
Kit includes anti–static mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 V system3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap3M #3051 conductive ground cord
Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner46–194427P27846–194427P279
120V230V
Air Filter Section 9-18 air intake
Safety Analyzer 46–285652G1 DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests
SVHS VCR CassetteE7010GGE7010GF
60 minute120 minute
SVHS VCR Head Cleaner See VCR user manual for requirements
DVD-RDVD-RAM See DVR user manual for requirements
3.5” MOD MEDIAE8381AAE8381AB
blank 128 M diskblank 230 M disk
5.25” MOD Media
3.5” MOD Media Cleaner 2117811 cleans the diskettes
5.25” MOD Media Cleaner cleans the diskettes
3.5” MOD Head Cleaner Kit 2148392 cleans the drive heads
5.25” MOD Head Cleaner Kit cleans the drive heads
QIQ Phantom E8370RB
RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GSNote: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
CD-RW Media For LOGIQ™ 9
B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements
Color Printer Cleaning Sheet See printer user manual for requirements
Disposable Gloves
Cut/Chemical Resistant Gloves
Ergonomic kneel pad 5140706
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-5
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-5System Maintenance
10-5-1 Preliminary ChecksThe preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
Table 10-4 System Checks
Step Item Description
1 Ask & Listen Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment.
2 Paperwork Fill in the top of the Ultrasound Inspection Certificate (see page 28). Note all probes and system options.
3 Power up Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed.
4 Probes Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes.
5 Displays Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel.
6 Presets Backup all customer presets on an CD-RW.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-6 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-2 Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4)The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1 System Checks
NOTE: * Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.
Table 10-5 System Functional Checks
Check Step Description
B-Mode Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
CF-Mode Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
Doppler Modes Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
M-Mode Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
*Applicable Software Options
Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, 3D, Contrast, Harmonics, Cine, Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation.
Xmit/Recv Elements Use the Visual Channel Utility on the 10L probe to verify that all system xmit/recv channels are functional.
Keyboard Test Perform the Keyboard Test Procedure to verify that all keyboard controls are OK.
Monitor Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Touch Panel Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual.
Measurements
Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications.Note: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-7
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option ChecksIf any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.
10-5-3 Input Power
10-5-3-1 Mains Cable Inspection
Table 10-6 GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks
Step Item Description
1 VCR Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
2 DVR Verify record/playback capabilities of the DVR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
3 B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
4 Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
5 DICOM Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device.
6 InSite Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications.(Warranty & Contract Customers only)
7 Camera Verify hardcopy output of the film camera. Clean as necessary.
8 Footswitch Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary.
9 ECG Verify basic operation with customer
Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection
Step Item Description
1 Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system.
2 Inspect Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kind.
3 Verify Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit.
4 Verify Inlet connector retainer is functional.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-8 Section 10-5 - System Maintenance
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-4 Cleaning
10-5-4-1 General Cleaning
10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning
NOTE: For your convenience or if the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.
Table 10-8 General Cleaning
Step Item Description
1 Console Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
2 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
3 Op Panel
Only use the following cleaners on the LOGIQ™ 9 Operator Panel:• Palmolive Dishwashing Liquid (manufactured by Colgate-Palmolive)• Sani Wipes (manufactured by Microgen Inc.)• Tspray 2 (manufactured by Pharmaceutical Innovations, Inc.)DO NOT use original formula Tspray (Tspray 1) on the operator panel. Only Tspray 2 is acceptable.
NOTE:Since various lotions can have a long term negative impact on the operator panel, hands should be clean and free of lotion.
4 CRT
To clean the monitor face:• Use a soft, folded cloth. Gently wipe the monitor face.• Do NOT use a glass cleaner that has a hydrocarbon base (such as Benzene, Methyl Alcohol or Methyl
Ethyl Ketone) on monitors with the filter (anti-glare shield). Hard rubbing will also damage the filter.• When cleaning the monitor, make sure not to scratch the monitor.
5 LCD
Never use thinner, benzene, alcohol (ethanol, methanol, or isopropyl alcohol), abrasive cleaners, or other strong solvents, as these may cause damage to the cabinet or LCD panel.DO NOT scratch or press on the panel with any sharp objects, such as pencils or pens, as this may result in damage to the panel.To clean LCD panel:• The LCD surface can be cleaned with a soft cloth, such as cotton or lens paper.• If necessary, stubborn stains can be removed by moistening part of a cloth with water to enhance its
cleaning power.
Table 10-9 Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment
Step Item Description
1 Remove Filter Cover Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions.
2 Clean Filter The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter is metal, wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic, vacuum or replace.
3 Install Filter Install the clean filter.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-9
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-5 Physical Inspection
10-5-6 Optional Diagnostic ChecksOptionally you can access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1 View the Logs
1.) Review the system error log for any problems.2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.3.) Check the Configuration Log; update if needed.
Table 10-10 Physical Checks
Step Item Description
1 Labeling Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition. Refer to the LOGIQ™ 9 User Manual for details.
2 Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks.
3 Control Panel Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items.
4 Control Panel Movement
Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that it latches in position as required.
5 Wheels & Brakes Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all caster locks and caster swivel locks for proper operation.
6 Cables & Connectors
Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Also check the wires connecting the side-fan on the BEP cover to the 4-PIN to make sure the wires are not pinched or damaged.
7 Shielding & Covers
Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning.
8 External I/O Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good.
9 Op Panel Lights Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TGC lights.
10 Monitor Light Check for proper operation of any monitor lights if available.
11 External Microphone Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-10 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-5-7 Probe Maintenance
10-5-7-1 Probe Related Checks
10-5-7-2 Basic Probe CareThe system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes.
Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty.
Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used.
Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe.
TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.
10-5-7-3 Basic Probe CleaningRefer to the User’s Manual for details on probe cleaning.
NOTE: To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
NOTE: Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probe’s warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe.
NOTE: Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
Section 10-6Using a Phantom
See the Basic User Manual “Customer Maintenance” for information on using a phantom and quality assurance tests.
NOTE: The use of Phantom is not required during Preventive Maintenance. Customer may use it as part of their Quality Assurance Program tests.
Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks
Step Item Description
1 Probe Holder Clean probe holders (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
2 Probes Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-11
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-7Electrical Safety Tests
10-7-1 Safety Test OverviewThe electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.
Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current.
To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should:
• Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way• Check probe leakage current:
* Based on your facilities QA program for surface probes* Based on your facilities QA program for endocavitary probes* whenever probe damage is suspected
WARNINGWARNING THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-12 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-2 GE Healthcare Leakage Current Limits for LOGIQ™ 9The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA), IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, and IEC 62353 Medical Electrical Equipment — Recurrent test and test after repair of medical electrical equipment. Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table IV.
NOTE: *Measurement limits per IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards, Table 19.5DV.1
**Most meters (like Dale 600/601) measure a composite of the AC and DC leakage current.
***ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) refer to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage.
Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current Limits—Accessible Metal Surfaces
Country Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral
USA 0.1 mA 0.3 mA* 0.3 mA
Other 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes
All Countries Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral
AC 0.1 mA 0.5 mA 0.5 mA
DC** 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections
Country Normal Condition Open Ground Open Neutral
USA 0.01 mA 0.05mA 0.05 mA
Other 0.01 mA 0.05 mA 0.05 mA
Table 10-15 ISO (on Dale 600) and Mains Applied (on Dale 601) Limits***
Probe Type Measurement
BF 5 mA
CF 0.05 mA
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-13
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-3 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & CanadaTest all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
Figure 10-1 Typical Outlet Tester
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-14 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-4 Grounding Continuity
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.
10-7-4-1 Meter ProcedureFollow these steps to test the ground wire resistance.
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF.2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet.3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's “CHASSIS” connector and attach the black chassis
cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.4.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to the RESISTANCE position.5.) Set the meter's “POLARITY” switch to the OFF (center) position.6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-15
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-5 Chassis Leakage Current Test
10-7-5-1 DefinitionThis test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading.
.
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit!
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-16 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-5-2 Generic ProcedureThe test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-12.
7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-16.
8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data kept on site.
Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and
Patient, Auxiliary Currents
Table 10-16 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition
TEST CONDITION
1 Mounting screw for probe receptacle
2 caster support
3 Mounting screw for CRT housing
4 Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit
5 Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-17
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-5-3 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage CurrentThe test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.
10-7-6 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to Ground
10-7-6-1 DefinitionThis test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Table 10-17 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Unit PowerTester Polarity
Switch
Tester Neutral or Ground
Switch
Test 1 Probe
ConnectorTest 2 caster
Test 3 CRT
Optional Test 4
Optional Test 5
Enter Name of tested peripheral here:
ON NORM OPEN
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REV OPEN
ON REV CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REV OPEN
OFF REV CLOSED
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-18 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-6-2 Generic ProcedureMeasurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads
Table 10-18 Testing Power Conditions
ECG Power Meter’s Polarity Switch Meter’s Neutral Switch
ON NORM CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF REVERSE OPEN
POWEROUTLET
H (Black)
N (White)
G (Green)
Internalcircuitry
Insulating surface
Polarity reversing switch(use both positions)
Appliance power switch(use both "off" and "on" positions)
Patient connected leads
The connection is at service entranceor on the supply side of a separatelyderived system
Buildingground
Grounding contact switch (use in both"open" and "closed" positions)
Current meterH = HotN = Neutral (grounded)G = Grounding conductor
H
N
G
Patient lead selector switch (if any)(activated as required)
Appliance
Between each patient lead and ground
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-19
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-7 Isolated Patient Lead (Source) Leakage–Lead to LeadReference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured.
10-7-8 Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation TestReference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meter’s function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
NOTE: It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-20 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage CurrentThe test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the Planned Maintenance Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
AC Power Source
MaximumAllowance Limit
GROUND OPENGROUND CLOSED
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Testand
Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test
115V 10uA 10uA
220/240V 500uA 10uA
Table 10-20 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current
AC Power Source
MaximumAllowance Limit
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test115V 20uA
220/240V 5mA
Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
ECG Power
Tester Polarity Switch
Tester Ground Switch
Tester Lead Selector
RL RA LA LL C
ON NORM CLOSED
ON REVERSE CLOSED
ON NORM OPEN
ON REVERSE OPEN
OFF NORM CLOSED
OFF REVERSE CLOSED
OFF NORM OPEN
OFF REVERSE OPEN
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-21
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9 Probe Leakage Current Test
10-7-9-1 DefinitionThis test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
NOTE: Some leakage current is expected on each probe, depending on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. It is abnormal if no leakage current is measured. If no leakage current is detected, check the configuration of the test equipment.
10-7-9-2 Test Equipment
Table 10-22 Test Equipment kits (Chapter 10 LOGIQ™ 9 Proprietary Service Manual)
Kit Description Contents
46-285652G1
Dale 601 - ULTRASOUND SAFETY ANALYZER FIELD KIT
-for 120V unit
• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601 for 120V unit• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE• Vendor MODEL 600/102 6FT SALINE BATH GROUND CABLE• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER • Vendor MODEL 600/600 SOFT CARRYING CASE• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL • Vendor MODEL 600/901 LMINATED OPERATORS GUIDE
46-328406G2
Dale 601E - ULTRASOUND SAFETY ANALYZER FIELD KIT
-for 220V unit
• ELECTRICAL SAFETY ANALYZER, DALE, MODEL 601E for 220V unit• Vendor MODEL 600/100 8FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE• Vendor MODEL 600/101 16FT CHASSIS GROUND CABLE • Vendor MODEL 600/103 8FT CHASSIS GROUND PROBE • Vendor MODEL 600/200 8FT EXTERNAL LEAKAGE GROUND CABLE • #20 WIRE W/MINIGATOR CLIPS, 2 Ft• CARRYING CASE and foam padding• Vendor MODEL 600/900 OPERATORS MANUAL
2113015 ULTRASOUND PROBE LEAKAGE ADAPTER KIT
• LOGIQ FAMILY PROBE ADAPTER• Vendor MODEL 600/202 ULTRASOUND PROBE ADAPTER • Vendor MODEL 600/203 RADIUS/SONOCHROME PROBE LEAKAGE
CURRENT ADAPTER
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-22 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-2 Test Equipment (cont’d)
Table 10-23 Test Equipment and Accessory Description
Dale Part number Accessory Name Picture Description
Vendor MODEL 600/100
46-285647P2 CHASSIS CABLE
Black coil cord with extended length and black grips.
Used on DALE601/601E to measure earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used as
reference lead for external measurement.
Vendor MODEL600/102
46-285647P4CHASSIS GROUND PROBE
Black coil cord with needle probe for testing receptacles and for
tight spaces.
Also referred to as “Saline Probe” or “Saline Bath Ground Cable”.
Measures earth resistance and enclosure leakage current. Also used
for grounding saline baths for isolation testing of probes.
Used on DALE601/601E. This probe may be substituted for the 600/100
Chassis Cable, and used as a probe instead of a clamp.
Vendor MODEL600/200
46-285647P6
ISO/EXTERNAL LEAKAGE CABLE
Black coiled cord with red grips.
Standard auxiliary cable for external measurements of leakage current and voltage gradient between two
surfaces.Used on DALE601/601E to measure:• Point-to-Point Leakage Current• Probe and Transducer Isolation
CurrentMay only be connected to the female
connector of the Analyzer, labeled EXTERNAL
Vendor MODEL600/202
2107545-2
ULTRASOUND LOGIQ FAMILY ADAPTER
Use during M.A.P. or Isolation test(see Chapter 10 - Meter procedure
using probe adapter)
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-23
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-3 Generic procedure on Leakage CurrentMeasurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line mains polarity normal, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
10-7-9-4 Meter procedure using probe adapterThe ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current:
1.) Turn the LOGIQ™ 9 unit OFF.2.) Plug the unit’s mains power cord into the test meter, and plug the test meter into the tested AC wall
outlet.3.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe) into the test meter's “CHASSIS” connector.4.) Set the test meter's “FUNCTION” switch to “CHASSIS” (Dale 600) or "ENCLOSURE LEAKAGE"
(Dale 601).5.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.6.) Put the saline probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the saline bath.
7.) Power ON the LOGIQ™ 9 unit.8.) After the LOGIQ™ 9 unit has completed the boot process, select the probe to be tested so it is the
active probe.9.) Depress the LIFT GROUND rocker switch and record the highest current reading.10.)Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-24 for every probe.
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and Table 10-14.
11.)Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data using Table 10-24.
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the LIFT GROUND switch is depressed.
SALINE
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-24 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-4 Meter procedure using probe adapter (cont’d)
CAUTION
PPower off
Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity or the status of the Neutral when the Ultrasound unit is powered on. Power off the Ultrasound unit, allow the stored energy to bleed down, and turn the circuit breaker off BEFORE switching the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch on the leakage meter to avoid possible power supply damage.
Table 10-24 Typical Data Sheet For Probe Source Leakage Current
Probe Tested:
Unit PowerTester Power Polarity
SwitchTester NEUTRAL
SwitchTester GROUND
Switch Measurement
Start with System Powered OFF
OFF NORMAL OPEN CLOSED
OFF NORMAL OPEN OPEN
OFF NORMAL CLOSED CLOSED
OFF NORMAL CLOSED OPEN
Open Neutral first, then attempt Power ON
ON NORMAL OPEN CLOSED
ON NORMAL OPEN OPEN
Close Neutral. Power System ON, and wait until Probe under test is active, before continuing
ON NORMAL CLOSED CLOSED
ON NORMAL CLOSED OPEN
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-25
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-5 Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) CurrentThe Dale 600/600E provides a method for testing probes independently from the system. The meter utilizes a probe adapter to apply a test potential commonly to all connector pins.
The ultrasound probe’s imaging area is immersed in a solution along with a grounding probe from the test meter to complete the current path. The solution is a mixture of water and salt. The salt adds free ions to the water, making it conductive. Use a mixture of 1 quart of water with one or more grams of table salt, mixed thoroughly.
Follow these steps to test each probe for leakage current.
1.) Plug the test meter into the tested AC wall outlet.2.) Plug the Chassis Ground Probe (saline probe in diagram) into the test meter's “CHASSIS”
connector.3.) Connect the probe to be tested to the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter.4.) Plug the LOGIQ Family Probe Adapter into the test meter's connector marked “EXTERNAL”.
Figure 10-6 Probe Isolation (Sink) Current Test
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-26 Section 10-7 - Electrical Safety Tests
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-7-9-5Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter to Measure Probe Isolation (Sink) Current (cont’d)5.) Set the meter's “FUNCTION” switch to EXTERNAL (DALE 600) or Mains on Applied Parts (M.A.P.)
(DALE 601) position.6.) Put the Chassis Ground Probe and the probe’s probe face (imaging area of the probe) into the
saline bath.
7.) Depress the ISO TEST (DALE 600) or M.A.P. (DALE 601) ROCKER SWITCH and record the highest current reading.
8.) Test every probe and record in Table 10-25 the test results for every probe.The test passes when all readings measure less than the values in Table 10-15.
9.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of Planned Maintenance data..
CAUTION To avoid probe damage and possible electric shock, do not immerse probes into any liquid beyond the level indicated in the probe users manual. Do not touch the probe, conductive liquid or any part of the unit under test while the ISO Test/MAP switch is depressed.
Table 10-25 Probes Tested for Isolation (Sink) Current
Probe Tested Measurement with ISO/Mains Applied
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-27
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-8When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
CHASSIS FAILSCheck the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part.
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead.
NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
PROBE FAILSTest the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner.
NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list.
If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity.
If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
PERIPHERAL FAILSTighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs.
Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
STILL FAILSIf all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
NEW UNITIf the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
ECG FAILSInspect cables for damage or poor connections.
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-28 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
10-8-1 ULTRASOUND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected.
Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________
Electrical Test PerformedMax Value Allowed
Value Measured OK? Comments
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.)
System Ground Continuity
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe
Chassis Source Leakage Current - Caster
Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT
Patient Lead Source Leakage(Lead to Ground)
Patient Lead Source Leakage(Lead to Lead)
Patient Lead Source Leakage(Isolation)
Peripheral 1 Leakage Current
Peripheral 1Ground Continuity
Peripheral 2 Leakage Current
Peripheral 2Ground Continuity
Peripheral 3 Leakage Current
Peripheral 3Ground Continuity
PROBES
Probe Number (from previous page)
Max Value Allowed
Max Value Measured OK? Comments
Probe 1:
Probe 2:
Probe 3:
Probe 4:
Probe 5:
Probe 6:
Probe 7:
Probe 8:
Probe 9:
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Chapter 10 Care & Maintenance 10-29
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Section 10-9Site Log
Table 10-26 Site Log
Date Service person Problem Comments
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
10-30 Section 10-9 - Site Log
1/18/10CHAPTER10.FM
Table 10-26 Site Log (Continued)
Date Service person Problem Comments
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Index Index - I
1/18/10L9_IX.FM
Numerics3-D Externals, 9-34
AAC Power PWB, 5-72Acoustic Noise Output, 3-11Acquisition Diagnostics, 7-19Adjustment
Z-Release Cable, 6-8AGP Video Card - DVI Video to the DGVIC Card, 5-35, 5-40Air Flow Control, 5-79Air Flow Distribution, 5-79Application Software
Upgrading, 8-49, 8-61Application Software Load, 8-44Automatic Troubleshooting, 7-19
BB/M Mode Processor (BMP) Board, 5-18B/M-Mode Checks
Functional Checks, 4-14Back End Processor, 5-22, , 5-27, 5-34, 5-39
BEP3, 5-34, , 5-39Inputs, 5-25Outputs, 5-26Theory, 5-22, 5-27, 5-34, 5-39
BackupMedia, 8-18Patient Database, 4-22Preset Configurations, 4-22
Basic MeasurementsFunctional Checks, 4-16
Battery, 8-12, , 8-16BEP, 8-7, 8-10, 8-13
Battery Pack Replacement, 8-4Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41Power Off Path, 5-45Power On, 5-44Power On Path, 5-44
BEP3Inputs, 5-37, 5-42Outputs, 5-38, 5-43
Block DiagramSimple System, 5-5
BMP BoardGeneral Description, 5-18
Boot Up, 3-8, 4-6
BrakeAdjustment, 6-15
Brake ArmAdjustment, 6-13
Brake Pedalwarning, 3-2
BrakesFunctional Checks, 4-28
CCalibration Utilities, 7-23CD-ROM
Handling Tips, 8-18Media Requirements, 8-18
CE Compliance, 1-22CFM and PWD Modes
Functional Checks, 4-15Common Diagnostics, 7-30Configuration, 5-88Connecting USB Line Printer, 3-24Connectivity
Settings, 8-17Worksheet, 3-22
Console Lock Assembly Replacement, 8-70Console Weight, 3-11Contact Information, 1-23Control Panel, 4-3Customer Assistance, 1-23
DDangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-18Diagnostics, 5-86, , 7-18
Acquisition, 7-19Common, 7-30
Direction LockFunctional Checks, 4-28
Disposal, 8-12, 8-16DVD Media Requirements, 8-18
EEBM Board, 5-19Electrical
requirements, 2-2Safety, 1-17
Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-22EMI Protection, 3-7
INDEX
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Index - II -
1/18/10L9_IX.FM
EQ BoardBasic Functions, 5-17General Description, 5-16
Equalization (EQ) Board, 5-16Ethernet Signal, 5-67External I/O, 5-65
Bi-directional Signals, 5-66Input Signals, 5-65Location in the Unit, 5-65Output Signals, 5-67
EZBackup/Move, 8-18, 8-19
FFacility Features
desired, 2-7required, 2-7
Frog LegAngle Adjustment, 8-92
Front End ProcessorPower Supply Board, 5-8Simple Theory, 5-7
Front End Subsystem, 5-9Functional Checks, 4-1
B/M-Mode Checks, 4-14Basic Measurements, 4-16Brakes, 4-25, 4-28CFM and PWD Modes, 4-15Control Panel, 4-3Image Management, 4-13Locks, 4-28Mechanical, 4-25Monitor Display, 4-5Peripherals, 4-24Probes/Connector Usage, 4-11Required Equipment, 4-1Touch Panel, 4-4
GGas Shock Replacement, 8-74Gas Spring
Adjustment, 6-8Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3General Cleaning, 10-8Global Service User Interface, 5-80
Error Logs Page, 5-82Service Home Page, 5-81
Global Service User Interface (GSUI), 5-80
HHazard Icons, 1-10Human Safety, 1-16
II/O Ports, 3-17Image Management
Functional Checks, 4-13Guide, 8-18
Inrush Current, 2-2Installation
average time, 3-2Internal I/O, 5-55
Connections, 5-57connections, 5-57Fuses, 5-58Inputs, 5-59Jumpers and Dip-switches, 5-58LEDs, 5-58Location in the Unit, 5-58Outputs, 5-61
Internal Storage Devices, 5-36, 5-41
LLabel Locations, 1-18LEDs SCB, 5-14Line Printer
Connecting, 3-24Loading Software
Application, 8-44Base Image, 8-26
Login Screen for Global Service User Interface, 5-80Logs, 5-83
MManaging Patient Data and Presets, 8-18Mechanical Checks
Operator I/O, 4-25Mechanical Descriptions, 5-76
Monitor, 5-76Top Console Positioning, 5-76
Mechanical Safety, 1-16Meter Procedure Using Probe Adapter, 10-23Models Covered, 1-3, 9-2
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCARE DIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Index - III
1/18/10L9_IX.FM
Modem, 5-69Inputs/Outputs, 5-69LEDs, 5-70Location in the Unit, 5-69
Monitor, 5-64Counter-balance Adjustment, 6-4Tilt, 6-4Tilt Adjustment, 6-4
Monitor DisplayFunctional Checks, 4-5
OOperator I/O
Emergency Release Procedure, 6-12Operator Panel
position warning, 3-2
PP4 Key Function, 7-13Patient I/O, 5-54PC Diagnostics, 7-31
(Interactive Tests), 7-32PCI Cards, 5-35, , 5-40PCI DGVIC and ADD Cards, 5-35, 5-40PCVIC Card, 5-23, 5-28Peripherals, 5-68
Functional Checks, 4-24Physical Dimensions, 3-11PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE, 10-28Power Distribution, 5-71
Basic Overall AC, 5-71Power Off, 3-9
Procedure, 4-9Power On, 3-8, 4-6Power Requirements, 2-2
electrical, 2-2stability, 2-3
Power Stability Requirements, 2-3Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure -BEP 2, 8-7Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure -BEP 3, 8-10, 8-13Power-up Procedures
Voltage Settings, 3-6Preparing the Unit for Installation, 3-6Preset Data, 8-18Probe
Leakage Current Test, 10-21Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-10Probe Leakage Current Test, 10-21Probes, 3-21
Probes/Connector UsageFunctional Checks, 4-11
Product Icons, 1-11PS Battery Operation, 5-35, 5-40
RRear Wheel Brakes
Adjustment, 6-16Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-4Regulatory, 6-1Release Lock Assembly
Replacement Procedure, 8-70, , 8-72RF Amplifier Board
Theory, 5-10
SSafety
reminders, 3-3Safety Considerations, 1-16Scan Control Board
High Level Features, 5-14Scan Control Board (SCB), 5-13SCB LED, 5-14Screen Captures, 7-13Service Adjustments, 6-1Service Home Page, 5-81Service Login, 5-80Service Manual
Purpose of, 1-1Service Platform, 5-79Shut Down
Procedure, 4-9Shutdown, 3-9Software
Application Load, 8-44Base Image Load, 8-26
System Features, 4-3System Maintenance, 10-5System Manufacturer, 1-24System Setup, 8-65
TTheory
Front End SubSystem, 5-9General, 5-2RF Amplifier Board, 5-10XDIF Board, 5-9
Time Delay (TD) Boards, 5-12Top Console, 5-63
See Operator I/O, 5-63Top Plane Board, 5-9
P R E L I M I N A R YGE HEALTHCAREDIRECTION 2294853-100, REVISION 14 LOGIQ™ 9 BASIC SERVICE MANUAL
Index - IV -
1/18/10L9_IX.FM
Touch PanelFunctional Checks, 4-3, 4-4
Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4Troubleshooting
Gathering Trouble Data, 7-3Screen Captures, 7-13Trouble Image with Logs, 7-4Vital System Information, 7-3
UUnpacking the Equipment, 3-4Upgrading Application Software, 8-49, 8-61USB Adapter Setup, 5-32User-Defined Backup Protocols, 8-22Utilities, 5-89
VVideo
Specifications, 3-20Voltage Settings, 3-6
WWarnings and Cautions, 1-16
XXDIF Board
Theory, 5-9
ZZ-Release Cable
Adjustment, 6-8
© 2002-2010, General Electric Company.GE Healthcare - GE Medical Systems Ultrasound and Primary Care Diagnostics, LLC.9900 Innovation DriveWauwatosa, Wisconsin 53226USA
www.gehealthcare.com
top related